Griffith – Stories of the High Priests of Memphis: the Sethon of Herodotus and the Demotic Tales of Khamuas (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1900) — OCR (Apple Vision)

Source and licence

share: publicnone

Source: corpus/incoming/e-2/griffith-setne-1900/ — Apple Vision OCR (tools/e2_ocr.py, worker E-2, 2026-09-29) of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/griffith_stories-high-priests-of-memphis_setne_1900.pdf, 232 PDF pages; provenance and verification in corpus/incoming/e-2/STAGING.md

Attribution: Griffith – Stories of the High Priests of Memphis: the Sethon of Herodotus and the Demotic Tales of Khamuas (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1900); public domain in Canada (death year verified: Griffith d.1934: PDF Author field "Griffith, F. Ll. (Francis Llewellyn), 1862-1934" (pdfinfo, read 2026-09-29) of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/griffith_stories-high-priests-of-memphis_setne_1900.pdf; title page pdf p. 11 ("… by F. Ll. Griffith … Oxford at the Clarendon Press 1900") · note (PROPOSED-scan_copyright-E-2.csv): (E-2 volume griffith-setne-1900)); OCR text by the Kemetic project, Yousef Hanna 2026.

Licence: public domain in Canada (author died ≤ 1971, verified; LICENCES.md §7) — US position (recorded, does not gate the class; PD-CA 2026-09-26): PD-US (published ≤1930)

Jurisdiction note: this text is public domain under Canadian law (the project is published from Canada; LICENCES.md §7: author died in or before 1971). It may still be in copyright elsewhere — in countries with a life + 70 term, or where a later edition claims its own rights. The licence line above says what was verified. If you are outside Canada, check your own law before re-using it.

Full provenance and citation

The text — part 1 of 2

6,900 lines · a line number is a link to itself

ref	L0 witness (OCR)
p. 1
1	UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO 3 1761 01037885 9
p. 2
p. 3
p. 4
2	Digitized by the Internet Archive
3	in 2007 with funding from
4	Microsoft Corporation
5	http://www.archive.org/details/storiesofhighpri00grifuoft
p. 5
p. 6
p. 7
6	3367
p. 8
p. 9
7	HIGH
8	STORIES
9	OF THE
10	PRIESTS OF
11	MEMPHIS
p. 10
12	HENRY FROWDE
13	PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSI
14	DOM MINA
15	INVS TIO
16	ONDON, EDINBURGH, AN
17	,M.A.
18	TY OF OXFORD
19	D NEW YORK
p. 11
20	STORIES
21	OF THE
22	HIGH PRIESTS OF MEMPHIS
23	THE SETHON OF HERODOTUS
24	AND
25	THE DEMOTIC TALES OF KHAMUAS
26	BY
27	F. LI: GRIFFITH, M.A.
28	FORSERLY SCHOLAR OF QUEEN'S COLLEGE, OXFORD
29	CORRESPONDING MEMBER OF THE ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AT BERLIN
30	Vol
31	11056
32	Oxforò
33	AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
34	1900
p. 12
35	PRINTEL
36	PR
37	Oxforo
38	, AT THE CLARENDON
39	BY HORACE HART, M.A.
40	INTER TO THE UNIVERSITY
41	PRESS
p. 13
42	PREFACE
43	IN editing these demotic stories I have endeavoured
44	to advance by a step that not insignificant branch of
45	Egyptology which counts an Englishman, Thomas
46	Young, among the chief founders of its study, but
47	which since his time has been neglected entirely in
48	this country. The decipherment of demotic, inaugu-
49	rated by Akerblad's famous letter to De Sacy in 1802,
50	and continued by Young and Champollion in 1820-1830,
51	was most successfully cultivated by Heinrich Brugsch
52	in the first half of his brilliant career, from 1847 to
53	1868, when he finished his dictionary of hieroglyphic
54	and demotic. With such completeness did he triumph
55	over the crabbed script that it remains for his successors
56	only to perfect his work, at least for the later periods.
57	Brugsch had for long been practically the sole reader
58	of demotic when Revillout attacked the subject as
59	a student of Coptic. By his multitudinous works the
60	latter has certainly thrown light on the interpretation
61	of the legal documents—some of which belong to the
62	early period—and on the metrology. Demotic is, how-
63	ever, a subject which requires above all things care
64	and accuracy if satisfactory results are to be obtained
65	by the student. The recent work of W. Max Müller
66	(commencing in 1886, but unfortunately never extending
p. 14
67	PREFACE
68	beyond brilliant discussions of single words and groups),
69	of Krall, Hess, and Spiegelberg, augur well for the
70	future of the study, and it is certain that it will
71	progress rapidly as the results of Coptic and hiero-
72	glyphic research are brought to bear in a scientific
73	manner upon this intermediate stage of the Egyptian
74	language.
75	In spite of all that has been accomplished in demotic,
76	there is much to be done that is almost of a pioneer
77	character, and much that has been conjectured or con-
78	tested must be either established or overthrown by
79	positive proofs. This is the main apology for the
80	voluminousness of the philological notes in Part II;
81	though many of them are due chiefly to the bad
82	writing or bad preservation of the second tale.
83	I may here be allowed to express my great obliga-
84	tions to the authorities of the department of MSS.
85	in the British Museum for permission to publish the
86	demotic text of the second story, and to the Delegates
87	of the Clarendon Press for undertaking the serious
88	expense of printing this book. My thanks are also
89	especially due to the Rev. E. M. Walker, of Queen's
90	College, for encouragement and advice; the Provost of
91	Queen's College, Oxford, for introducing and supporting
92	my application to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press;
93	Mr. Cannan, the Secretary of the Delegates; Mr. Horace
94	Hart, the Controller of the Press; and last, but not
95	least, Mr. F. G. Kenyon of the British Museum, by
96	whose kindness I was amongst the first to see the
97	newly unrolled 'Papyrus DCIV, and enjoyed every
98	facility for studying it. The particulars furnished by
99	him in regard to the history of the papyrus and to the
100	Greek text upon the recto will be found in a subsequent
101	page.
102	A glossary of the two demotic stories has been pre-
p. 15
103	PREFACE vii
104	pared, and it is intended to publish it later, when the
105	work may have had the benefit of the criticism of
106	fellow-students. A photographic facsimile and a hand-
107	copy of the new tale are issued herewith. The first
108	tale has long been accessible in a good facsimile, but
109	negatives of the original papyrus in the Gizeh Museum
110	have been taken at my request by Emile Brugsch-Bey,
111	brother of the great demotist, and are now deposited
112	with Mr. R. C. Murray, 8 Garrick Street, Covent Garden,
113	London, W.C., to whom applications for prints should
114	be addressed.
115	This volume must not go to press without a word
116	acknowledging its special indebtedness to the great
117	work of Professor Sethe on the Egyptian Verb, which
118	appeared last autumn at the moment when I was
119	engaged in the final shaping of the materials for the
120	book. By his masterly historical treatment of the
121	verbal forms in Hieroglyphic and in Coptic, Sethe has
122	made it possible here to begin classification, on the
123	lines laid down by him, of the remarkable forms which
124	the verb assumes in demotic.
125	May, 1900.
p. 16
p. 17
126	CONTENTS
127	PART 1
128	HISTORICAL AND LITI
129	CHAPTER I
130	THE STORY OF SETHON:
131	§1. Introductory: Stories in Later Egypt
132	§ 2. Khamuas in History •
133	$ 3. Khamuas in Tradition .
134	§ 4. The Title Sem-Setne, High-Priest of
135	$ 5. The Story of Sethon
136	§ 6. Historical Features
137	§ 7. Name Sethos or Zet
138	§8. Or title Sethon-Setne •
139	§9. Attempt to Identify the Priest-King
140	§1o. Foreign Elements inthe Story .
141	CHAPTER II
142	THE TALE OF KHAMUAS AND NENEFERKAPTAH
143	CHAPTER III
144	THE TALE OF KHAMUAS AND HIS SON SI-OSIRI
145	PART II
146	PHILOLOGICAL
147	CHAPTERIV
148	INTRODUCTORY:
149	§ 2. Bibliography § 1. Description of the Papyri :
150	RARY
151	Ptah
152	•
153	•
154	9
155	•
156	• 13
157	67
158	68
p. 18
159	CONTENTS
160	§ 3. Method of Transliteration
161	§4. Language, Spelling and Pronunciation of the Texts
162	§ 5. Specimen of a Phonetic Rendering •
163	$ 6. Hints for Studying Demotic
164	§ 7. List of Abbreviations used in the References
165	CHAPTER V
166	TRANSLITERATION AND TRANSLATION OF THE FIRST TALE
167	CHAPTER VI
168	TRANSLITERATION AND TRANSLATION OF THE SECOND TALE
169	INDEX
170	69
171	70
172	72
173	77
174	79
175	82
176	142
177	208
p. 19
178	PART I
179	HISTORICAL AND LITERARY
180	CHAPTER I
181	THE STORY OF SETHON
182	§ I. Introductory: Stories in later Egypt. § z. Khamuas ın history.
183	$ 3. Khamuas in tradition. §4. His title Sem-Setne, high priest of Piah.
184	§ 5. The story of Sethon. §6. Historical features. §7. Name Sethos
185	or Zêt? § 8. or title Sethon-Setne? § 9. Attempt to identify the priest-
186	king. §1o. Foreign elements in the story.
187	§ I. THIs is not the place to enter upon the general
188	subject of Egyptian tales, of which demotic is now
189	beginning to yield a rich variety dating from the
190	Graeco-Roman age. But we must note the fact that
191	while a considerable number of stories are extant in
192	hieratic of the Middle and New Kingdoms, ten centuries
193	follow between the end of the New Kingdom and the
194	middle of the Ptolemaic rule (circa 1200-150 B.c.), during
195	which this class of literature is entirely unrepresented
196	by native documents. From two external sources,
197	however, we gather that the art of the story-teller was
198	by no means in abeyance, though it would seem that his
199	tales were not often committed to writing by Egyptian
200	scribes. The Biblical story of Joseph, charged as it is
201	with Egyptian ideas and marked by Egyptian names of
202	the late period, may very well be a product of Hebrew
203	GRIFFITH.
p. 20
204	2 THE STORY OF SETHON [PT. I
205	intercourse with the Egyptians after 1000 B.c.'; and in
206	his history Herodotus collected multitudes of imaginative
207	traditions current in Egypt of the fifth century. How
208	far the stories in Herodotus are genuinely Egyptian
209	it would be difficult at present to say. Often they have
210	a strong Greek tinge, while the demotic stories of the
211	Graeco-Roman epoch are thoroughly native and bear
212	few distinct traces of external influence.
213	§ 2. Two of these stories-later by several centuries
214	than Herodotus—relate to a famous high priest of Ptah
215	who fourished about 1250 B.C. His name Kha-m-uas
216	(d-m-W'st)*, meaning 'manifestation in Thebes,' indi-
217	cates that he was born in the southern capital; but he
218	lived and died a Memphite. He was head of the whole
219	hierarchy of his time, and the most notable of the
220	innumerable progeny of the great King Rameses II.
221	From contemporary documents we learn that his mother
222	was the queen Isit-nefert. In his youth he would seem
223	to have taken part in the wars, but his recorded acts
224	are principally of a sacerdotal nature, and he appears
225	conspicuously in the celebration of national festivals
226	from the thirtieth year of Rameses onwards. Apparently
227	Khamuas died in the fifty-fifth year of his father's long
228	reign of sixty-seven years; otherwise he might perhaps
229	have succeeded to the kingdom which eventually fell
230	to Merenptah, the thirteenth son of Rameses. His
231	tomb is near the Great Pyramid3.
232	* The dates assigned by Biblical critics to various portions of this
233	story extend from the middle of the ninth century to the end of the sixth.
234	One of the Egyptian names (Asenath) points to a period not earlier than
235	the end of the ninth century. The others could be somewhat older, but
236	on the whole theimpression left is that these details belong rather to
237	the age of the Saites, beginning aslate as 680.
238	* As MasPEro pointed out (Ä. Z., 1877, p. 143, note 41) Xapois,
239	occurring in the fanciful list of kings of Syncellus (ed. DinDorr, p. 179),
240	is probably the Greek form of his name.
241	For the historical Khamuas see MASPERO, Hish., II, PP. 424-6, and
242	references there.
p. 21
243	cH. 1] THE TITLE SEM, SETNE 3
244	§ 3. In the demotic stories Khamuas is not presented
245	in a very heroic light: they relate his misfortunes and
246	seem rather to scoff at his learning, which availed
247	so little against the gods, or even the sages and
248	magicians of less degenerate times. The discovery of
249	certain late funerary texts' is attributed to his in-
250	defatigable research. They are entitled ' The writings
251	of the vase which Khamuas the chief son of the king
252	found under (or at?) the head of a divine one (mummy)
253	in the west of Memphis: it was more divine than any
254	vase in the treasury. It makes itself as a gate of
255	flame between the divine (yh-w) who are (?) dead
256	(ml•w) and that which attacketh them: it is very
257	excellent, a million times. The first of them is
258	further said to have been previously discovered or
259	invented for his own protection by the chief royal scribe
260	Amenhetep, son of Hepu?, a famous Theban priest in the
261	reign Amenhetep III. Thus the supposed history of
262	this spell is not unlike that of the book which Khamuas
263	found in the grave of the learned scribe Neneferkaptah?
264	§4. The title that most usually precedes the name
265	of Khamuas on the monuments is sm!. This is a sacer-
266	dotal title, not indeed confined to the high priest of
267	Memphis, but constantly borne by him and assigned to
268	his office in the Ptolemaic list of Egyptian priesthoods
269	at Edfu®, where the high priest of Ptah has the double
270	title sm, ur hrp hmww 'Sem and Chief Artificer (?)'
271	• Sem of Ptah' is a fuller form of the title®. Certainly
272	Khamuas was ar hrp hmww?, as well as sem, and, for
273	' PLEYTE, Chapitres supplémentaires du Lirre des Morls, ch.167-174;
274	see especially Pl. 136-7
275	" 'Apércopis Toû Mlaámios of Josephus, deified at Thebes in Piolemaic
276	times: see SeTur in Ebers' Aegypliaca, p. 1o6 et segg., and the graffti
277	published by PEErs, Hellenic Journal, 1899, 16.
278	• Below, pp. 16, 30 (1 Kh. iv. 26). • c.g. BR., Thes.. 957-9.
279	• BR., Dich. Géng», p. 1368. • Piankhy Slele, I. 20.
280	" BR., Thes., 957.
p. 22
281	THE STORY OF SETHON [PT. 1
282	instance, presided over the burial of the Apis bull,
283	which was sacred to the same god. Thus his title sm
284	is doubtless to be taken in its special application, i.e. as
285	•high priest of Ptah at Memphis.'
286	In the demotic tales Khamuas is entitled 'Stne (in
287	the second story Stme) H-m-ws, the son of Pharaoh,
288	Wsr-ms-pe"', the last name corresponding to the hiero-
289	glyphic Wsy-m4-Rs, the short form of the prenomen
290	of Rameses II: In the New Kingdom and later the
291	title sm is often written stm, and though in hieroglyphics
292	the ancient form was frequently adhered to, demotic
293	bilinguals of the Ptolemaic period give the form stm,
294	stm-t3. Thus stne* or stme HIs-m-ws in the tales would
295	seem to correspond exactly to sm H-m-wist in inscrip-
296	tions of his own time.
297	It must be noted also that Khamuas when referred
298	" I Kh. v. 4,7; cf. II Kh. ii. 28 and 33.
299	" Apparently Oủosúpns in the royal list of Syncellus (ed. DINDORF,
300	p. 189). The list is the same that in the preceding group of kings
301	gives Xnpois.
302	BR.,Wlb.,1221; Thes., 890,906, 9x2, 915. The change from sm
303	to sim was probably at first purely graphic; cf. Old Eg. sm, 'herbage,'
304	spelt slymu in Ramesside hieratic, but sm, sym in dem., and clel in
305	Coptic In the case of the title, the Ramesside writing stm for sm may
306	have given rise to a new pronunciation stm, sine (helped possibly by the
307	title s'-siny 'king's son,' which accompanied it in the case of Khamuas).
308	•Inthe Ptolemaic period we meet withproper names compounded
309	with Sine, viz.:-P'srdn) Sine, and I°Sre.((n) Sine in Pap. Berl. Ax. 2
310	(Br., Samml. dem.-Gr. Eigennamen, pp. 21, 23). These may some day
311	be found wrilen in Greek,perhaps as Tewaelwr and Sevorelov. Note
312	that here, as in the story, we have the form sine, while the priestly title
313	at the same period is always smi or stm(f). Clearly the equations sm=
314	slm(1)=slne=(later) slme represent no normal development (p.142).
315	I should suggest that Sine was the popular form of the title sm or stm-l-
316	the form in which it occurred in the tales, and, by transference thence, in
317	proper names. The final / in stm-t may represent a vowel ending, so that
318	the word was probably identical in pronunciation with sime. The change
319	from early m to n is not uncommon in Coptic, and the form stme in the
320	later tale may indicate an attempt to revert to the classical pronunciation.
321	• I., D., III, 174 e, 175 h, &c.
p. 23
322	сн. I] THE STORY OF SETHON 5
323	to more briefly in the tales appears by this title 'Stne,'
324	•Stme' alone, not 'the Stne,' or 'the Stme,' and never
325	once by his name. Thus, unless 'Stne' was misinter-
326	preted by the later scribes as a proper name, we must
327	conclude that this title of the high priest was used as
328	an appellative for its holder, just as ' Pharaoh' was used
329	for the king'.
330	§ 5. We will now turn to the Greek record. Herodotus,
331	whose travels in Egypt date from the reign of Artaxerxes,
332	about 460 B.C., reports amongst the information he
333	obtained from the natives regarding the kings of Egypt
334	a miraculous story of a Pharaoh, who was also priest of
335	Hephaestus, i.e. high priest of Ptah at Memphis:-
336	METà SÈ TOûTOr (SC. ÉNEyOr) BarIlEDOaL Tòr ipEa TOû
337	H to, rộ ouvopa eivar Zedân, Tùu Èv åroyinoı ěXEW
338	ахуoáрєvоr т paxiuor AiyuTTiou cs Oudèr SEnGóuEvOn
339	QUTÔv, ärra TE бÀ ₫TLUa TOLEÛUTO ÉS aUTOÚS, KaÍ OOEaS åTTENÉrDaL
340	TàS åpoúpas, TOîOL ÉT TOv mpOTÉpaN BaoINécr SeбóoDar Éfarpé-
341	TOUS ÉKáOTO SUÓSEKa ¿pOÚpaS. METÙ 8È ÉT AlyUTTOv ÉlaÚvEw
342	oтратд» нéyav LavaxápıBov BaoiNéa 'ApaBiov тe кaї "Aroupícov-
343	DÜKOOU SN EDÉNEL TOÙS MaXénOUS TON AiyUTTÍwu BOndÉELV° TON
344	SÈ ipÉa És arropin åTEyMÉvOr ÉDENdórTa És Tò MÉyapor mpòs
345	тăyarua åтобúpeodas, oĩa кınduvEvEL тавєîn олофирврєом б
346	Üpa Mn ÉTENDEi ÜTTVOU, KaÍ OL SÓğaL ẺN TI ÖII ÉTLOTáUTa TÒv
347	OEÔr DapOÚVELN, cS OUSÈr TeÍrETaL dxapI ¿rTIájov ròv 'Apaßíor
348	OTратó aтs gáp oi TÉpEL TIUCpOÚS. TOÚTOLOI Ôn pIv
349	TiTUVON TOiDE ÉvUTVÍOLGL, TapalaBóvra Aiyunriou roùs Boulo-
350	pÉvOUS Oi ETEODaL OTpaToTedevoaolar ev Inlourío (Tavrn yàp
351	ciơi al éoßorai). ÉreoDar ốé oi Tân Maxíuoor nèr ouSéva åvopân,
352	' In ancient Egyptian the article did not exist, and though it was in
353	general use as carly as 1500 B.C., apparently the ancient titles 'Pharaoh,'
354	and 'Seime' like many other religious and ceremonial terms, remained
355	arlikellos almost to the end. Before Coplic times, however, the initial
356	letter of Pr-p, 'Pharaoh, was falsely interpreted as the definite article p.
357	and was so declined—with fem. l. pl. n—the word for •Pharaoh' being
358	reduced to epo.
p. 24
359	6 THE STORY OF SETHON [PT. I
360	KaTÁdoUs Sè rai XEpávaKras kai ayopaíous årOpútous. Érbaûra
361	CTIKQLÉrOUS, TOiDE ÉrANTÍOLOL QUTOROI ÉTIXUDÉVTOS VUKTOS MOS
362	åpoupalous kaтà pèr фayєî rois фарєтрйнаs айтан, ката бє
363	Tà Tófa, TPÒS Sè TâN åoTíSaN Tà Öxara, COTE Til ioTepain
364	фEyórтor oфéo yuva ÖTлON TEOEi TONлÓUS. Kai vÛv OÛTOS
365	¿ BaTINEÙS EUTYKE ÈY TQO ipÇ TOû "HpaLOTOU NíDIVOS, EXOON ÈTri TÂS
366	xerpòs pên, Néyon dià ypapuáron TádE ès Éué TIS ópéOv EuoeßnS
367	čoтo'
368	• After him (i. e. Anysis, they told me) that there reigned the
369	priest of Hephaestus whose name was Sethon (P). He treated
370	the Egyptian soldiery with contempt, and held them of no
371	account as considering that he would not have need of them.
372	He did them dishonour in various ways, and in particular
373	deprived them of their allotments of land, they having been
374	given twelve arouras apiece of choice land under the previous
375	kings. But afterwards Sanacharib, king of the Arabians and
376	Assyrians, led a great army against Egypt. So the warriors
377	of the Egyptians refused to help, and the priest being driven
378	into desperate straits entered the temple and bewailed before
379	the image the misfortune that hung over him. And while he
380	lamented sleep came upon him, and it seemed to him in the
381	vision that the god stood by him bidding him be of good cheer,
382	for he would suffer no harm marching against the army of
383	the Arabians, for he himself would send him some who would
384	aid. And relying on this dream, he collected those of the
385	Egyptians who were willing to follow him, and pitched his camp
386	at Pelusium; for by that way is the entrance to Egypt. And
387	not one of the warriors followed him, but (only) traders and
388	artisans and market people. And when he had arrived there,
389	field mice streamed into the camp of his opponents themselves
390	and devoured all their quivers and all their bows and the handle-
391	thongs of their shields besides, so that the next day they fled
392	destitute of arms with great loss. And now this king stands in
393	stone in the temple of Hephaestus, having a mouse on his hand,
394	speaking thus by means of an inscription, ' Let any one looking
395	upon me, (learn to) be pious!'
396	' WIEDEMANN, Herodol's Zweiles Buch, cap. cxli.
397	• Twelve arouras would be eight or nine acres.
p. 25
398	CH. I] SETHON 7
399	This is the last item in Herodotus' Early History of
400	Egypt—that dealing with the ages before the Dodecarchy
401	and the advent of the Greeks. The materials for this
402	part of his work he professes to have derived from
403	statements made to him by the Egyptians and especially
404	by the priests', and from innumerable touches it is
405	evident that Memphite priests or guides were his principal
406	sources of information. The story quoted above is
407	obviously Memphite : let us examine it in detail.
408	§ 6. The name of Sennacherib (B. c. 705-680) accords
409	sufficiently well with the period of Egyptian history to
410	which Herodotus assigns the events of the story, namely
411	that which followed the Ethiopian conquest by Sabaco
412	(twenty-fifth dynasty) and preceded the rise of Psam-
413	metichus (в. c. 663). In that interval Egypt was invaded
414	time after time from Assyria, by Esarhaddon (B. c. 680-
415	669), and by Assurbanipal (B. c. 668-625). Sennacherib
416	apparently suffered no serious reverse in his great
417	Syrian and Palestinian expedition of B. c. 701; but the
418	story in Herodotus so remarkably resembles the Bib-
419	lical account of the disaster which befell the army of
420	Sennacherib in the reign of King Hezekiah?, that one
421	can hardly doubt that both narratives had a common
422	origin. In the Bible, Tirhakah, king of Ethiopia and
423	conqueror of Egypt, figures as about to attack Senna-
424	cherib?. Tirhakah was the opponent of Esarhaddon
425	and Assurbanipal. His date is not exactly known: he
426	can hardly, however, have begun to reign earlier than
427	в. c. 686, though he may have commanded an army
428	before that date.
429	§7. Who then was Zelâv, high priest of Hephaestus
430	and king of Egypt? At first sight his name would
431	scem to be Selós in the accusative, and Sélos is the
432	equivalent of the Egyptian name Sely, which occurs
433	' cc. xcix, cxlii. 3 2 Kings xix. • Ibid. verse g.
p. 26
434	8 THE STORY OF SETHON [PT. I
435	twice amongst the kings of the nineteenth dynasty', but
436	is not known later. A name compounded with that
437	of the god Set is not likely to be found in the twenty-
438	fifth dynasty, at a time when Osiris worship of a fanatical
439	kind was rapidly gaining the ascendency, and the name
440	of Sel was probably being erased from the monuments.
441	Africanus gives a king Zýjr at the end of the twenty-third
442	dynasty ; he may have been introduced into the list to
443	represent the original of the supposed Selâs. If Zýt
444	really existed, he was probably an Egyptian contem-
445	porary of the Ethiopian conquerors, like some other
446	kings of the twenty-third dynasty. It is hardly necessary
447	to say that a faint correspondence to facts is all we need
448	look to find in the story of Herodotus; and the obscurer
449	kings' names in Africanus are probably derived in many
450	cases from the popular tales, so that the mere occurrence
451	in his list of the name of a king Zht is no guarantee that
452	there was ever any such person.
453	§ 8. But it is also possible to read the name Eelâv as
454	indeclinable, and as such it is regarded by WIEDEMANN
455	in his admirable commentary?. KrALL has had the bold-
456	ness to identify Sedâv with the Setne of the demotic
457	story here published as the first tale of Khamuas?.
458	As yet he has given no reasons for the identification,
459	but evidently he abides by it, and now calls the tale
460	in question 'The Story of Sethon.' The form stme
461	furnished by the new story strongly suggests that stne
462	is the priestly title slm, and confirms in part Krall's
463	brilliant guess. The vocalization of words is not shown
464	' Each of these Setys was also named Merenptah, ' beloved of Ptah,'
465	i.e. of Hephaestus. The first of them waged war successfully in Syria,
466	and with him •Sethos (?) priest of Hephaestus' has hitherto generally
467	been identified.
468	• Herodol's Zweites Buch, P. 501.
469	• Foolnote to p. 1 of Ein neuer hislorischer Roman, in Mitth, aus den
470	Sammlungen der Papyrus Erzherzog Rainer, Bd. VI.
p. 27
471	сH. I] IDENTITY OF SETHON 9
472	by demotic, which can render little more than their
473	consonantal skeleton. cTwn is found as a decan-
474	name in a half Greek, half Egyptian horoscope' Eelor
475	might be for *cown, the Northern form of cтwn, and
476	Stne might well be its demotic spelling, like tne for
477	TWN: own 'whither?'
478	Hence the sentence тòv іpéa тоб 'Hфaíотou, &c., may
479	perhaps be rendered, 'that priest of Hephaestus that
480	was called (the) Sethon'; or Herodotus may be supposed
481	to have omitted to note the name of the priest-king, and
482	to have designated him confusedly by his title only, being
483	misled by its use as an appellative. In the section
484	immediately preceding (cap. cxxxvii), he has probably
485	made a blunder of a similar though less excusable kind,
486	assigning the name Anysis to a king whose birthplace
487	he says was Anysis, while to all appearance it is
488	Bocchoris of whom he speaks under this false desig-
489	nation. But in cap. cxi an exact parallel can be found.
490	Here $epóv is given as the name of a king, and Фepów
491	can only be 'Pharaoh,' Pr-o, nepo, the appellative title
492	by which the king was addressed and referred to in the
493	original of the tale retold by Herodotus.
494	§ 9. If then, as seems probable, 'Sethon' is merely
495	'Setne,' the popular form? of the high-priest's title,
496	who was the king intended by it in Herodotus? It
497	may appear useless to attempt to identify the hero of
498	such a tale, but the occurrence in it of the historical
499	name Sennacherib, and the resemblance of the story
500	to the Biblical narrative, encourage one to make the
501	endeavour.
502	No Egyptian king except Ay in the eighteenth
503	dynasty, and the anomalous priest-kings of Thebes
504	contemporary with the twenty-first dynasty, is known
505	' Greek Pap. in the Brit. Mus. I, Pl. 73, col. iii, l.11; cf.p. s42 below.
506	& See above, PP. 4. 5.
p. 28
507	IO THE STORY OF SETHON [PT.1
508	to have displayed a priestly title. The nomarch, how-
509	ever, was generally high-priest in his nome-capital;
510	Tefnekht, a chieftain who had succeeded in uniting
511	most of the princes of Lower Egypt against Piankhy,
512	assumed the titles of priest of Neith in Sais, and of
513	sem of Ptah in Memphis'. And if, to gratify the people
514	of Memphis, Tirhakah chose to perform the functions
515	of high-priest of Ptah, local tradition might celebrate
516	him in this character as a 'Sethon' when commemorating
517	a victory or success gained by him against the Assyrians.
518	The kings of the Ethiopian dynasty showed themselves
519	exceedingly devout worshippers of Amen, the god of
520	their own capital and kingdom, as well as of Thebes,
521	the capital of Upper Egypt, which they at first counted
522	as their principal Egyptian residence. But the later
523	members of the dynasty recognized the importance of
524	Lower Egypt as a source of wealth and as a barrier'
525	against the aggressive forces ever looming in the north-
526	east. The first Ethiopian conqueror, Piankhy, attributes
527	all success in war to Amen. Tirhakah, however, may
528	have erected a monument at Memphis in which he
529	similarly extolled the divine power of Ptah, while never-
530	theless offending the Egyptian soldiery by relying on the
531	sturdy warriors of the Sudan?
532	An attractive modification of this hypothesis, agreeing
533	with the chronology and with nearly all the data from
534	every source, would be to place the event before
535	Tirhakah's accession to the throne, supposing that he
536	was then governor of Lower Egypt and high-priest of
537	Ptah, and that in his office of governor he prepared to
538	move on the defensive against a threatened attack by
539	• Piankhy Stele, 1. 20.
540	" Krall thought that in Sedüv there might be seen a distorted reminis-
541	cence of the priestly son of Rameses II, the hero of the Egyptian tales.
542	The characteristics of neglect of the soldiers and faith in God might
543	perhaps have such an origin.
p. 29
544	CH. 1] FOREIGN ELEMENTS 1I
545	Sennacherib. While Tirhakah was still in the neigh-
546	bourhood of Pelusium, some unexpected disaster may
547	have befallen the Assyrian host on the borders of
548	Palestine and arrested their march on Egypt.
549	That previous Egyptian kings had made grants of
550	land to their soldiery is quite probable, and it is not at
551	all unlikely that in the twenty-fifth dynasty these grants
552	were revoked or modified in favour perhaps of Ethiopian
553	or foreign mercenaries ; but, actually, we know nothing
554	of these things.
555	§ Io. Some features in the story are thoroughly
556	Egyptian, but others are foreign. The prayer to the
557	god and the dream in the temple are exactly paralleled
558	in the second story of Khamuas ', while the idea of divine
559	command or guidance being given by the god himself
560	speaking in a dream occurs as early as the days of
561	Thothmes IV, who records that he was thus incited to
562	clear the great Sphinx of the encumbering sands?.
563	The incident of rescue by means of mice may perhaps
564	have been suggested by the Greek myth of Apollo
565	Smintheus. The shrew-mouse, as well as the large
566	ichneumon, and other creatures of similar appearance,
567	was sacred in Egypt to one or another of the gods,
568	though apparently none of them was sacred to Ptah.
569	A person holding a mouse is thus a conceivable subject
570	in Egyptian sacred iconography, though it is difficult to
571	quote any parallel instance. It is true that in a sculpture
572	upon the walls of the temple of Kummeh in Nubia,
573	Thothmes III is represented as dancing or running
574	forward while carrying a crested ibis as an offering to
575	Hathor?; but this is part of a scene, not a statue or
576	isolated figure. It is the last sentence, however, which
577	is the least Egyptian part of the tale. The form of the
578	inscription (és éué) and the pointing of the moral are
579	• Below, p. 38. • L., D., I1I, 68. • L., D., III. 57b.
p. 30
580	12 THE STORY OF SETHON [PT. I
581	both Greek and entirely un-Egyptian. No Egyptian
582	statue 'speaks by means of letters' in the direct way
583	that the productions of the old Greek artists were made
584	to speak. The words said to be engraved on the statue
585	might none the less represent the gist of part of an
586	Egyptian inscription.
587	The story of Sethon, whether it have an historical
588	basis or no, resembling as it does that of the destruction
589	of the Assyrian army in the Book of Kings, might very
590	well be accounted for as the product of Jewish inter-
591	course with Egypt in the Saite dynasty, finally shaped
592	by the pen of Herodotus after passing through the
593	mouths of Greek interpreters. Unfortunately it cannot
594	yet be determined with certainty whether Eedov repre-
595	sents the name of Sety Merenptah—i. e. 'Sety, beloved
596	of Hephaestus—, or is the Memphite sacerdotal title of
597	some later king; but the second of these alternatives
598	appears by far the most probable,
p. 31
599	CHAPTER II
600	THE TALE OF KHAMUAS AND NENEFERKAPTAH
601	THE translation of the story of Setne Khamuas
602	made by Brugsch in 1865-7 was one of the greatest
603	triumphs of that brilliant and laborious Egyptologist,
604	who thereby displayed the astonishing degree of per-
605	fection to which he had, almost single-handed, carried
606	the decipherment of the obscure demotic script, and at
607	the same time proved to the world that this script
608	contained a literature more lively than the legal
609	documents and religious texts which down to that
610	date had alone been recognized in it. For many
611	years little advance was made on Brugsch's first
612	reading, though the way to a better understanding of
613	demotic was prepared by the general progress which
614	Egyptology made in the interval, and the translations
615	and remarks of Maspero and Revillout contained some
616	useful suggestions. In 1888 appeared the edition of
617	Hess, a very promising pupil of Brugsch 1 This edition
618	comprised a commentary and a glossary, and showed
619	in many ways an advance on the original rendering.
620	For the first time also the text was now effectively
621	edited, though long before published in an admirable
622	facsimile prepared by Emile Brugsch. So good is this
623	facsimile—though sometimes a little obscure-of the
624	' Down to the time of his last illness in 1893, Brugsch occasionally
625	wrote and lectured on demotic.
p. 32
626	14 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. 1
627	minute and complicated writing, that in carefully
628	collating it with Hess's copy some years ago for my
629	own translation not once did I convict it of a mistake:
630	the merest traces of signs proved to be rendered in
631	agreement with the true sense, even where the papyrus
632	was much worn and injured and the meaning had
633	been previously misunderstood!
634	The manuscript is said to have been found in
635	Thebes. As to its age it bears no external evidence,
636	for the regnal date at the end is of little value, since
637	so many of the Ptolemaic kings and Roman emperors
638	reigned for fifteen. years and more. The evidence of Egyp-
639	tian palaeography and language has hitherto received
640	scant attention, and the present editor has probably
641	less right even than his predecessors to attempt any
642	decisive attribution. It would, of course, be impossible
643	to place the MS. before the beginning of the Ptolemaic
644	age or after the fourth century A.D. In demotic of the
645	Ptolemaic age the preposition r is constantly omitted,
646	but in this MS. it is omitted only before the suffix of
647	the first person, as in later texts. The full yet free
648	spelling, and the style of writing, seem clearly to point
649	to the period comprising the last century of Ptolemaic
650	rule and the first century of the Roman empire.
651	The text of the second tale, which is probably to
652	be dated a little later than the middle of the first
653	century A.D., has a very different and debased appear-
654	ance. But this may be due to local and individual
655	peculiarities, for graffiti and inscriptions on ostraca of
656	the second century, even of the time of the Antonines,
657	are written in a much purer style.
658	The first tale of Khamuas is remarkable from every
659	point of view. It is one of the finest works of imagina-
660	tion that Egypt has bequeathed to us; it belongs to
661	" Revillout's copy of the test was too erratic to be of any service.
p. 33
662	сн. 11] THE LOST PAGES 15
663	the best period of demotic writing, when the script
664	was at once full and expressive yet free from corrup-
665	tions and superfluities, and the existing copy contains
666	very few mistakes' The writing is small, but wonder-
667	fully uniform, and the orthography is correct. Alto-
668	gether the text must be pronounced exceedingly good.
669	The title of the story is virtually found in the
670	colophon : 'A complete writing is this, relating of Setne
671	Khamuas and of Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah and Ahure his wife,
672	and Mer-ab her son. The numbering of the pages is
673	a very unusual feature in Egyptian MSS.& The first
674	two are gone, and the third page is injured at the
675	beginning of each line. Happily the remainder is in
676	almost perfect condition, the beginning of the papyrus
677	having been torn off clean. Where it now commences,
678	on the third of the large and closely written pages,
679	we find Khamuas in the tomb of a certain Neneferkaptah,
680	the only son of an ancient Pharaoh. This prince is
681	represented to have married his only sister, and to
682	have perished miserably with his wife and child, thus
683	extinguishing the king's hopes of being succeeded by
684	his own descendants. The ghosts of Neneferkaptah,
685	of his sister-wife Ahure, and of their child Merab, are
686	present in the tomb, and at the beginning of our text
687	Ahure is recounting to Khamuas the story of the disaster.
688	All their calamities she attributes to Neneferkaptah's
689	determination to possess a certain book of magic, which
690	Khamuas is now eager to take from him. With this
691	clue the general argument of the lost part of the tale
692	may be confidently restored. It must be remembered,
693	• Two indubitable mistakes are a curious inversion of the sense
694	throughout a long passage in iii.17-19, and a very venial omission of
695	a few words at the end of vi. 12. Besides these, there are several small
696	points that are ar least suspicious.
697	" The only other instance of this known to the editor is the famous
698	Elers Papyrus, a medical work writen in the cighteenth dynasty.
p. 34
699	16 FIRST TALE OF KILAMUAS [PT. I
700	however, that what is missing exceeded the half of
701	what remains, and must have contained episodes of
702	considerable length now hopelessly lost.
703	The main points in the beginning of the story may
704	have been to this effect:-Setne Khamuas, the son of
705	Pharaoh Usermara, being a diligent seeker after divine
706	and ancient writings, was informed of the existence of
707	a book which Thoth, the god of letters, science, and
708	magic, had 'written with his own hand, and learned
709	that this book was to be found in the cemetery of
710	Memphis, in the tomb of Neneferkaptah, the son of
711	a Pharaoh named apparently Mer-neb-Ptah. Having
712	succeeded in identifying and entering the tomb, accom-
713	panied by his brother Anherru, he finds there the
714	ghosts of the owner, his wife and his child, and lying
715	by them the coveted book. But they refuse to give
716	it up to him. Theirs it was, for they had 'paid for it
717	with their earthly lives, and its magic power availed
718	them in good stead even within the tomb. To dis-
719	suade Setne from taking the book Ahure tells him
720	their own sad story.
721	Ahure's Story.
722	The missing part of this may perhaps be restored somewhat
723	as follows :-[And she said, ' It happened in the time of Pharaoh
724	Mernebptah (?) that the king grew old and he had no child but
725	myself, whose name is Ahure, and Neneferkaptah, my elder brother,
726	who is beside me!. And the king desired that there should be
727	1 The name Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah means " Beautiful is the Bull of Ptah,'
728	doubiless referring to the Apis bull, which was entitled 'Renewal of Life
729	of Ptah.' Ne-nefer is the demotic verb from nfr; in older Egyptian
730	it would be nfr alone, and Neneferkaptah would have been Neferkaptah.
731	Ka means both 'bull' and 'ka, or 'double' The old royal name
732	Nefer-ka-Ra, which is common at the end of the Old Kingdom, and
733	reappears in the twenty-fifth dynasty, probably means •Beautiful is the
734	ka of Ra:'Neneferkaptah is evidently a name of the same form.
735	Ahure, or Ahhere (?), is a name otherwise unknown, and the name of
736	the king Mer-neb (?)-Ptah (?), father of Neneferkaptah (iv. 6), cannot yet
p. 35
737	CH. II] AHURE'S STORY 17
738	a child to his children, and he commanded that a feast should
739	be made before Pharaoh after three (?) days, and that the sons of
740	the generals and the daughters of the generals should be bidden.
741	But my elder brother Neneferkaptah and I loved each other
742	exceedingly, and I feared that the king would take me and give
743	me in marriage to the son of a general and would marry Nene-
744	ferkaptah to the daughter of another general in order that the
745	family might be enlarged, and that so we should be separated.
746	Now the king had a steward, an aged man, who loved Nenefer-.
747	kaptah and me exceedingly, and when he saw that we loved
748	each other he spake to me on the second (?) day and said, " Dost
749	thou not love thy brother Neneferkaptah ?" and I said, " Speak
750	to the king that he may marry me with Neneferkaptah, and
751	that he do not separate us." And he said, " I will go and speak
752	to the king, for it is right that the son of the king should marry
753	the daughter of the king": and my heart was glad exceedingly.
754	And he went to the king and returned. And he said, "I went
755	to the king and spake with him, saying, 'My great lord the
756	king, may he accomplish the duration of Ra! Is it not meet
757	that the king should follow the law of Egypt and that he should
758	marry Neneferkaptah with Ahure that a son may be born in
759	the family of the king?' And the king was silent, and his
760	heart was troubled exceedingly. And I said unto him, ' What
761	is it that troubleth the king?' (Here the papyrus begins with
762	the third page of the original MS.)
763	•"And he said to me] ' Thou art he that wrongeth (?) me. If III. r
764	be read with certainty. A very old man tells Setne (vi. 12-13) that his
765	great-grandfather had said that his own great-grandfather had said that
766	the tomb of Ahure and Merab was in a certain place. Supposing the old
767	man to have been ninety years old, and allowing 156 years to the six
768	preceding generations of narrators, the first telling would have taken
769	place some 250 years before the date of Setne's inquiries. This would
770	take one back from the time of Rameses Il to the beginning of the
771	eighteenth dynasty. At that time, however, the tomb is said to have
772	been already built over, and probably it is meant to be considered as far
773	older, perhaps even as belonging to the Old Kingdom. We must not look
774	for history here. No king's name compounded with 'Piah' occurs
775	earlier than the nineteenth dynasty, and presumably all the names in
776	Ahure's story are fictitious.
777	1. 1. This is usually taken to be a speech of the queen to the king.
778	But the queen is never referred to in the rest of Ahure's story, which would
779	GRIPFITI. C
p. 36
780	18 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS
781	IIl. it be that I have not a child beside two children, doth custom
782	make one marry with the other of them? I will make
783	a Neneferkaptah marry with the daughter of a general, [ will
784	make Ahure marry] with the son of another general. May it
785	be for the abounding of our family!'"
786	"The hour came, the éoprý was set before Pharaoh ; I was sent
787	3 for and taken to the éoprń [named, and it came to pass that]
788	my [heart was] sad exceedingly, my demeanour not being as
789	the day before.
790	'Said Pharaoh to me, " Ahure, didst thou send to me in these
791	4 anxious (?) affairs, saying, ' Marry me with [Neneferkaptah, my]
792	elder [brother]?'" I said to him, "Let me marry with the son
793	of a general, let him marry with the daughter of another
794	general: may it be for the abounding of our family!" I laughed,
795	Pharaoh laughed.
796	3 ...... Pharaoh [said], " O steward of the king's house! let
797	Ahure be taken to the house of Neneferkaptah to-night, and
798	let all beautiful things be taken with her." So I was taken
799	as wife to the house of Neneferkaptah.
800	hardly have been the case if she were permitted to use such authoritative
801	language in regard to the disposal of the children. Not only in the age
802	of the Ptolemies, but long before, marriage of brother and sister was
803	unquestionably frequent in the royal house, where it was desirable to
804	keep pure the strain of the descendants of Ra: whether the practice
805	was admitted in private families is less certain (see W. M. MüLLER,
806	Liebespoesie der allen Aegypter, Einleilung, esp. p. 9). In the present
807	instance the king fears to marry his only children together lest progeny
808	should fail.
809	1. 2. Brugsch, &c., translate, •It hath happened thus often in our
810	family,' but the construction seems against this meaning.
811	hrwl-t=éopmn, as SPIEGELBErG has pointed out, apparently with the
812	signification 'banquet': see also the philological note.
813	1. 3. The restoration is of course uncertain.
814	1.4. For the restoration note that Neneferkaptah is called her 'elder
815	brother' also in iv. 3. Ahure's reply, quoting the king's own words
816	to the messenger, must be intended as an indirect admission that the
817	envoy was from her, and the king gives way to her evident wishes.
818	1. 5. If the éopr took place early in the day the marriage might have
819	been celebrated the same evening; but we have no knowledge of the
820	marriage customs to guide us in attempting the restoration. We might
821	restore, ['Came the morning of the next day, said Pharaoh'], or ['His
822	heart was exceeding glad, said Pharaoh'], or ['Pharaoh sent for the
p. 37
823	CH. 1I] AHURE'S STORY I9
824	•[There came the morning of the next day (3), and Pharaoh 111.6
825	caused] to be brought to me a present of silver and of gold, and
826	all the household of Pharaoh caused themselves to be brought
827	to me; and Neneferkaptah made a good day with me, and he
828	entertained all the household of Pharaoh. And in that same
829	night he slept with me, and lo! he found me [pleasing (?). And 7
830	it came to pass that he did not (?)....••] with me, ever, ever;
831	and lo! each of us loved his fellow.
832	• And when there came my time of making purification, I made
833	not purification again: report of it was made to Pharaoh; his
834	heart was glad exceedingly, and he caused much stuff to be
835	taken [immediately (?) to me]; he caused to be carried to me 8
836	a present of silver and gold and royal linen, beautiful exceed-
837	ingly. And when my time of bearing came, I bore this child
838	that is before thee, who is named Merab; and they caused it
839	(or him) to be recorded in the House of Life.
840	steward of the king's house, and said unto him'] The third alternative
841	seems preferable, since it is unusual for a person to be addressed in
842	a story without first being specifically introduced on the scene, though
843	perhaps one instance occurs in Hisl. Rom. G [15].
844	W. Mıx MüLLer has collected a variety of evidence on Egyptian
845	marriage customs and kindred subjects from the available documents
846	of all periods, in the Introduction to his Liebespoesie der alten Aegypler.
847	In demotic there exists a great number of documents bearing on the
848	subject which require careful study, and which unfortunately were
849	accessible to him only in imperfect copies. In regard to his interpre-
850	tation of the account of Ahure's marriage (ib., p. 4) there are several
851	points in which I differ from him.
852	1.6. If 'made a good day' can apply to an evening entertainment,
853	this again might be on the same day as the éopt. But such extreme
854	haste in a royal marriage seems very improbable.
855	The last words of the line may mean ' and behold the marriage was
856	consummated.'
857	1. 7. Whatever the restoration may be, some negative is probable: see
858	the philological note.
859	1. 8. 'Royal linen' or 'royal thread' was the name of the fine material
860	called Aúrros by the Greeks.
861	The 'House of Life' is apparently the name-Saile and later-
862	of the college of sacred scribes, irpoypapuareis (in demotic, 'scribes of the
863	House of Life'), who practised hieroglyphic and hieratic writing (whence
864	hieroglyphic is called 'writing of the House of Life,' Can., 1l.18-37), and
865	were learned in all the wisdom of the Egyptians, including medicine (?)
p. 38
866	Ill.g
867	I0
868	20 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
869	*[It came to pass that my brother Nenefer]kaptah had no
870	pursuit on earth but to walk on the necropolis hill of Memphis
871	reading the writings that were in the tombs of the Pharaohs
872	and on the tablets of the scribes of the House of Life, and the
873	writings that were on [the temples (P), and his zeal] concerning
874	writings was great.
875	• After these things it befell that there was a procession in
876	honour of Ptah, and Neneferkaptah went unto the temple to
877	worship; and it chanced that he was walking behind the
878	procession reading the writings that were upon the shrines of
879	the gods. [But a certain priest perceived him, greater (?) in age]
880	than he, and laughed. And Neneferkaptah said unto him,
881	"Wherefore laughest thou at me?"
882	' And he said, "I laugh not at thee, but laugh thou and read
883	that of which no [man upon earth] hath [the like (?). If it be
884	that] thou seekest to pronounce a spell, come to me that I may
885	cause thee to be taken to the place wherein is the book which
886	Thoth wrote with his own hand when he went down following
887	the gods. (There are) two formulae in writing that are upon it,
888	and when thou [readest the first formula thou wilt] enchant the
889	heaven, the earth, the underworld, the mountains, the seas;
890	thou wilt discover all that the birds of heaven and the creeping
891	things shall say; thou wilt see the fish of the deep, there being
892	[power of God resting in water] over [them]. If thou read the
893	second formula, though thou be in Amenti, thou shalt take
894	again thy form upon earth; thou wilt see Ra shining forth in
895	(SCHÄFER, A. Z., 1899, 72), and magic (II Kh. vi. 7). The meaning of
896	the present context is probably that the birth of the king's grandson was
897	formally entered in the sacred register.
898	1. I1. The passage evidently implies 'You will laugh at yourself and
899	your inscriptions when you read the spells of Thoth, which reveal all the
900	secrets of the universe?
901	1. 12. The allusion is obscure;possibly it means it (the book)
902	fetcheth the gods.?
903	1. 13. With the following passage compare Il. 36 et seqq., where the
904	spells are divided more clearly as follows: the first gives magic power to
905	know all that is going on in earth, sky, and water among the creatures
906	that inhabit them; the second gives power to see the celestial gods
907	themselves in their courses, and the divine government of the depths of
908	the sea.
909	1. 14. "Amenti,' the Egyptian Hades.
p. 39
910	CH. II] AHURE'S STORY 21
911	heaven with all the gods of his company, and the moon rising
912	[in] its wise......"
913	'[And Neneferkaptah said unto him], "O king, live for
914	ever! let there be told unto me some good thing that thou
915	seekest, and I will cause it to be done unto thee, that thou
916	mayest direct me to the place in which this book is."
917	'And the priest said unto Neneferkaptah, "If it be that [thou]
918	seekest to be directed to [the place where this book is], thou
919	shalt give unto me a hundred teben of silver for my burial, and
920	thou shalt cause to be given to me two priestly offices (?)
921	without fee (?)."
922	• Neneferkaptah called a youth, and caused to be given unto
923	the priest the hundred teben of silver ; he caused ...... two
924	••••••to be made, he caused them to be given [to him
925	without fee (?).
926	• And the priest said unto] Neneferkaptah, "The book named,
927	it is in the midst of the Sea of Coptos, in a box of iron, the
928	box of iron being [in] a box [of bronze, the box of bronze] in
929	1. 15. Lit. 'O king, may he livel' an address of humorously exaggerated
930	respect.
931	1. I6. Leben. The name of the weight formerly read ulen is really to
932	be read teben (dbn, 1bn), (SPIEGELBERG, P. S. B. A., xV. 315). 1 lbn =
933	10 KITE = 5 staters or (Attic) tetradrachms of 270 grains. 100 lbn =
934	500 staters = 2000 drachmae=} talent (300 oz. approximately), and
935	thus corresponds precisely to the jvâs cikoo (20 minae), which Diodorus
936	(i. 91) states to be the cost of the medium style of embalmment, the best
937	style costing a whole talent. The last item of the bargain is very obscure,
938	owing to lacunae and unknown words in the text.
939	1.17. "The Sea of Coptos' It takes three days and three nights to
940	row from the shore to the middle of the 'Sea of Coptos' (l.30), and the
941	"sea' comprised one schoenus (six miles?) of groundswarming with
942	reptiles surrounding the Book of Thoth. Its name and apparent size
943	suggest the Red Sea, which was generally approached from Egypt by
944	the Coptos road; but the identification seems impossible, since it is
945	evident from the narrative that its shore was close to the city of Coptos,
946	and that a ship could easily be brought to it from the Nile. More
947	probably the 'Sea of Coptos' was a sacred lake, perhaps that of the
948	temple of Coptos, or part of the Nile near Coptos, magically extended
949	when the safety of the Book of Thoth was in question.
950	Inthe description of the nesting of the boxes it is evident that the
951	scribe has reversed the order of things. He should have wrilten, 'in
952	III.
p. 40
953	22 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
954	Ill. a box of kete-wood, the box [of ] kete-wood in a box of ivory and
955	19 ebony, the box of ivory and ebony in a [box of silver, and the
956	box] of silver in a box of gold, wherein is the book: there
957	[being a schoenus] of every kind of serpent, scorpion, and
958	20 reptile around the box wherein is the book, there being [an
959	endless snake about] the box named."
960	• Now when the priest told these things [unto] Neneferkaptah,
961	Neneferkaptah knew not in what place on earth he was. He
962	ai came forth from the temple, he told [unto me all] that had
963	befallen him, all. He [said] unto me, "I will go to Coptos,
964	I will bring this box and return without delay to the north."
965	•It came to pass that I reproached (?) the priest, saying, " May
966	Amen (?) curse (?) thee in that thou hast related unto him these
967	* [ill-omened things! Thou hast prepared (P) for me the] battle,
968	the box of iron is a box of bronze, in the box of bronze is a box of
969	silver,' &c. For the restoration compare Il. 34 et seqq. This elaborate
970	packing of the book by Thoth suggests 'Hermetic sealing'! and the
971	apparent connexion may not be wholly accidental.
972	1. 19. 'Schoenus' Compare P.S. B. A. xviii. 104, and the references
973	there given. The length of this measure is very uncertain: some reckon
974	it at 12,000 cubits, at any rate it appears to exceed a mile.
975	1. 20. 'Endless snake' Lit. snake of zl, which may mean ' of eternity,'
976	referring to its supposed partial immunity from death (l. 32); or it may
977	indicate that it was of the species &t, apparently the viper (Hieroglyphs,
978	p. 34). Or it may be some serpent known only in mythology. It is
979	perhaps worth noting that Horapollo says that of the three sorts of
980	snakes the uraeus alone is immortal (i. I). The expression also suggests
981	a snake forming a complete ring round the box; and the idea of a snake
982	with its tail in its mouth was probably not unfamiliar to the Egyptians
983	(Piankhy Stele, 1.5), though it is not known to have been connected by
984	them with eternity.
985	1. 21 ad fin. I. 22. The passage is difficult and imperfect. The priest
986	may have figured already in the lost pages. "The battle' and ' the
987	quarrel' can hardly mean the strife to prevent Neneferkaptah from going
988	1o Coptos; it might rather refer to some warfare with the divine powers
989	of Upper Egypt to which Ahure or her family had been doomed in the
990	missing part of Ahure's tale. Or the priest may have had earlier dealings
991	with Neneferkaptah, and the sense may be, 'I blamed the priest saying
992	(to Neneferkaptah), " Amen is against thee in that thou didst relate to him
993	(the priest) these [affairs of ours]," &c. For'cruel' restore perhaps 'fatal,'
994	i. e. the fulfilment of her doom is to take place there; or there may be
995	- a reference here to some past misfortune.
p. 41
996	CH. 11] AHURE'S STORY 23
997	thou hast brought to me the quarrel. (As for) the Thebaid, I1l.
998	I have found it [cruel (?)."
999	"I did all] in my power with Neneferkaptah that he should
1000	not go to Coptos, but he hearkened [not] unto me. He
1001	went into the presence of [haraoh, and told before] Pharaoh a3
1002	of everything that the priest had told him, all; and Pharaoh
1003	said unto him, "What is it that [thou desirest]?" He said unto
1004	him, " Let the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh be given unto me with
1005	its equipment, and I will take Ahure [with Merab, her chfild, 24
1006	with me to the south and bring the book straightway."
1007	*There was given unto him the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh with
1008	its equipment; we went up on board thereof, we made sail, we
1009	reached [Coptos. Report] of it [was made] unto the priests of 25
1010	Isis of Coptos and the chief priest of Isis: they came down to
1011	meet us ; they came forthwith to meet Neneferkaptah; and their
1012	women also came down to meet me. [We went up from the a6
1013	shore, we went into] the temple of Isis and Harpochrates. And
1014	Neneferkaptah caused to be brought ox, goose, wine, and made
1015	offering and libation before Isis of Coptos and Harpochrates.
1016	They took us to a house beautiful exceedingly ...... and a7
1017	Neneferkaptah spent four days making holiday with the priests
1018	of Isis of Coptos, the women also of the priests of Isis making
1019	holiday with me.
1020	• And when the morning of our next day came, Neneferkaptah
1021	1. 22. 1š n Ne, 'nome' or 'province of the City (i. e. Thebes)' is the
1022	demotic name of the Thebaid, which, according to Strabo and the
1023	Revenue Papyrus, commenced at the Hermopolite nome (xv-xvi) and
1024	included all Egypt above it, as far back, at least, as the reign of Ptolemy
1025	Philadelphus (MaHarry in GRENFELL, Revenue Laws, p. xlvi).
1026	Amen is here introduced apparently as the representative god of the
1027	Thebaid.
1028	Il. 25,26. It is noteworthy that the ithyphallic god Min, the local god
1029	of Coptos in Pharaonic times, is not mentioned here, or in the corre-
1030	sponding passage (vi. 7), though he was of importance even in Roman
1031	times(see the inscriptions in PETRIE, Koplos, and those of the Hammamat
1032	road, L., D., vi. 69). Already in the New Kingdom, however, Isis was
1033	a leading figure at Coplos. The Coptic Min is, by his titles, a form
1034	of Horus. Isis and Harpochrates are both mentioned in a Plolemaic
1035	inscription (see Koplos, PI. XX, right-hand columns, also BR., Dicl. Géos.,
1036	831), and Harpochrates was perhaps the young and respectable form
1037	of Min.
p. 42
1038	24 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
1039	III. :8 caused [to be brought] unto him [much wax] and pure, and
1040	(thereof) he made a boat manned with its rowers and its
1041	navigators (?). He read a spell to them and made them to
1042	live; he gave them breath and launched (?) them upon the sea.
1043	And having filled (?) the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh with sand,
1044	39 [and made it fast to the magic vessel (?)], he went on board.
1045	As for me, I sat over against the Sea of Coptos, saying, "I will
1046	find what shall become of him."
1047	' And he said, "Row on, O rowers! with me to the place
1048	3o where[in] is this book." [And they rowed on with him, at
1049	night] as at midday. And lo! on the third day he reached it.
1050	He cast sand before him, and the waters were divided. And
1051	1o! he found a schoenus of every kind of serpent, scorpion, and
1052	3ı reptile around [the place] wherein [the book was]; and lo! he
1053	found an endless snake around the box named. He pronounced
1054	a spell against the schoenus of every kind of snake, scorpion,
1055	and reptile that was around the box; he suffered them not to
1056	3a rise up. [He came to the place] in which was the endless [snake].
1057	He fought with it, he slew it; it lived, it made its form again.
1058	He fought with it again a second time; he slew it, it lived
1059	33 again. He [fought with it again] a third [time]; he cut it in
1060	twain and put sand between the one piece and its fellow ; [it]
1061	died, it became not itself again, ever.
1062	•Neneferkaptah came unto the place wherein the box was,
1063	34 [and found that it was a box of] iron. He opened it and found
1064	a box of bronze. He opened it and found a box of kete-wood.
1065	35 He opened it and found a box of ivory and ebony. [He opened
1066	it and found a box of] silver. He opened it and found a box
1067	of gold. He opened it and found the book in it. He took up
1068	1.28. For the restoration compare II Kh. v. 19. Magic images were
1069	regularly made of wax in the Middle (Westcar Papyrus) and New
1070	Kingdom (Pap. Judiciaire); strange to say there seem to be no such
1071	references in the demotic magical papyri.
1072	l.a9. It is not clear what happened tothe pleasure-boat of Pharaoh.
1073	As Setne threw out sand when he arrived at his destination, probably he
1074	had taken the royal dahabiyeh with him laden with sand and towed by
1075	the magic boat. Possibly the 'filling with sand' was intended to sink the
1076	dahabiyeh, and the voyage may have been submarine.
1077	1. 30. "The walers were divided,' lit. 'there became a gap (or absence)
1078	of stream.'
p. 43
1079	сH. 11] AHURE'S STORY 25
1080	the book out of the box of gold; he read from it a formula of IIl.
1081	writing; [he enchanted heaven, earth, the underworld, the] moun- 36
1082	tains and the seas; he became aware of all that the birds of the
1083	heaven, the fishes [of] the deep, and the beasts of the mountains
1084	spake of. He read another formula of writing; he saw [Ra 37
1085	shining forth in heaven with all his divine cycle, and the moon
1086	rising and the stars in their forms]; he saw the fishes of the
1087	deep, there being divine power resting in water over them.
1088	• And Neneferkaptah read a spell to the [water; he caused it to 38
1089	become as it had been (?). He went on] board ; he said to the
1090	rowers, "Row on with me to the place which ......" And they
1091	rowed on with him at night as at midday. And lo! he arrived
1092	at the place wherein I was ; [he found me sitting] over against 39
1093	the Sea of Coptos, not having eaten nor drunk, nor had I done
1094	anything on earth, but I was as one who has reached the Good
1095	House.
1096	' I said unto Neneferkaptah ...... "let me see this book for 4o
1097	which we have thus.....toiled." He put the book in my hand.
1098	I read in it a written formula; I enchanted the heaven, the IV.r
1099	earth, the underworld, the mountains, and the seas ; I discovered
1100	the things that the birds of the heaven, the fishes of the deep,
1101	and the animals say, all. And when I read another formula of a
1102	writing, I saw Ra shining in heaven with all his divine cycle;
1103	I saw the moon rising with all the stars in heaven, and their
1104	procedure; I saw the fishes in the deep, there being power of 3
1105	God resting in water over them.
1106	'But I was no scribe—I mean as compared to my elder
1107	brother Neneferkaptah, who was a good scribe and a learned man
1108	exceedingly. He caused to be brought unto him a piece of
1109	new papyrus; he wrote (thereon) every word that was before 4
1110	him on the roll, all. Having caused it to be soaked with beer,
1111	1. 37. There is not space for all this restoration, which is here supplied
1112	from different corresponding passages, ili. 14, iv. I.
1113	1.39. Ahure had been starving for a week, besides enduring sleepless
1114	anxiety, and was, naturally, in an exhausted condition. The 'Good
1115	House' is the place of embalmment, not the grave itself (compare iv, l. 35):
1116	when taken to the 'Good House' the corpse was far more ghastly than
1117	when carried to the grave as a mummy.
p. 44
1118	26 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
1119	Iv. he dissolved it in water, he made certain that it was dissolved,
1120	he drank it, he knew according to that in which it was.
1121	5 'We returned to Coptos that same day. We made a good
1122	day before Isis of Coptos and Harpochrates. We embarked,
1123	we travelled down stream, we reached (a place) one schoenus
1124	to the north of Coptos.
1125	6 'But behold! Thoth had learned all that had become of
1126	Neneferkaptah concerning the book. Thoth tarried not; he
1127	pleaded before Ra, saying, "Know my right and my cause
1128	with Neneferkaptah the son of Pharaoh Mer-neb (?)-Ptah (P)!
1129	7 He went to my chamber and plundered it, he took my box
1130	containing my book (P), he slew my guard that kept it." It was
1131	said unto him, "He is before thee, with every person that
1132	belongeth to him, all."
1133	8 'There was sent down a Power of God from heaven, with the
1134	command, " Suffer not Neneferkaptah to come safe to Memphis,
1135	him and every person belonging to him, all."
1136	• At a certain moment Merab the child came out from beneath
1137	o the awning of the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh; he fell into the
1138	river, he fulfilled the will of Ra. All who were on board, all
1139	1. 4. The last phrase is difficult: and I do not know how to
1140	render it. It can hardly be 'according to (the circumstances) in which
1141	he was. The general meaning is clear. In Muhammedan countries
1142	medical patients are often made to absorb the virtues of a magic formula
1143	by drinking: sometimes the formula is inscribed on the inside of a
1144	drinking bowl, sometimes it is washed off into the potion from the paper
1145	on which it has been written for the purpose. Of course beer, the national
1146	drink of the Egyptians, is presumably not allowed by Muhammedan
1147	doctors.
1148	1. %. 'It was said unto him? This impersonal form is usual in reference
1149	to acts of the divine courts of justice, cf. Il Kh. ii. II, 13; vil. I.
1150	Collectively or singly, 'Divine Powers' are often referred to in
1151	demotic; they seem to correspond to 'angels,' and are evidently to be
1152	connected with the Gnostic Suvápeeis. The non-personified 'power of
1153	God' upon the water, several times referred to in the story, is a different
1154	form of the word 'power' It is remarkable that throughout this story
1155	the 'powers of God' work in the rivers and seas, as if the writer was
1156	especially impressed with the mysteriousness of water.
1157	1.8. The command given to the power just reverses a prayer for
1158	a safe return commonly found in demotic graffiti.
1159	"The awning,' lit. 'the shade?
1160	1. 9. The word here used for 'will' or 'pleasure' of Ra is archaic;
1161	the expression probably refers to the decree of Ra pronounced in 1.7.
p. 45
1162	CH. 11] AHURE'S STORY 27
1163	uttered a cry. Neneferkaptah came forth from under his IV.
1164	awning ; he spake a written spell to him, he made him rise
1165	up, there being power of God in water, resting over him. He 1o
1166	spake a written spell to him, he caused him to relate all that
1167	had become of him, all, together with the accusation that Thoth
1168	had made before Ra.
1169	• We returned to Coptos with him, we caused him to be taken 11
1170	to the Good House, we caused them to wait (?) about him, we
1171	caused him to be embalmed after the manner of a prince and
1172	a noble, we caused him to rest in his sarcophagus in the
1173	necropolis-hill of Coptos.
1174	'And Neneferkaptah, my brother, said " Let us go down stream, 1=
1175	let us not tarry; lest Pharaoh hear the things that have befallen
1176	•
1177	us, and his heart be grieved because of it."
1178	•We went up on board, we travelled down stream, we went
1179	without delay one schoenus to the north of Coptos, the place 13
1180	where Merab the child fell into the water. I came out from
1181	under the awning of the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh, I fell into
1182	the river, I accomplished the will of Ra. All they who were 14
1183	on board uttered a cry, all.
1184	• It was told unto Neneferkaptah, and he came forth from under
1185	the awning of the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh. He spake a spell
1186	to me, he caused me to rise up, there being power of God resting
1187	in water above me. He caused me to be taken up, he spake 1s
1188	a spell to me, he caused me to tell before him all that had
1189	become ofme, all, together with the accusation that Thoth
1190	had made before Ra.
1191	• He returned with me to Coptos, he caused me to be taken to 16
1192	the Good House, he caused them to wait about me, he caused
1193	me to be embalmed according to the embalmment of a prince
1194	and a great noble, he caused me to rest in the tomb in which
1195	Merab the child rested.
1196	1. 1o. The working of this 'power of God' described as 'resting on
1197	the water,' and repeatedly mentioned in this story in connexion with the
1198	fishes and the raising of the bodies of the drowned, is not very intelligible:
1199	apparently the divine "power' was in both cases constrained by magic.
1200	1. 11. "To wait (?) about him;' perhaps a reference to the unpleasant
1201	operations carried out by the embalmers (cf. DioD. i.g1), or to watchers
1202	by the dead.
p. 46
1203	28 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
1204	IV.17 'He went on board, he travelled down stream, he went without
1205	delay one schoenus to the north of Coptos, to the place where
1206	we fell into the river.
1207	*(And there) he spake with his heart saying, "Can I go to
1208	18 Coptos and there abide? Otherwise, if I shall have gone unto
1209	Memphis, when Pharaoh shall ask me of his children, what is
1210	it that I shall say to him? (How) can I say unto him, 'I took
1211	19 thy children to the Thebaid and, living, let them die ; and 1 came
1212	to Memphis still alive?'"
1213	• He caused to be brought unto him a strip of royal linen
1214	and made it as a bandage. He bound the book, he put it
1215	20 on his body and made it firm. And coming forth from under
1216	the awning of the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh, he fell into the
1217	river, he accomplished the will of Ra. All they who were on
1218	2 board uttered a cry, all, saying, " Great woe! Grievous woe! hath
1219	he returned, the good scribe and learned man whose 'equal there
1220	hath not been?"
1221	• The pleasure-boat of Pharaoh travelled down stream, none on
1222	earth knowing the place where Neneferkaptah was.
1223	32 "And when they reached Memphis report of it was made before
1224	Pharaoh. And Pharaoh came down to meet the royal pleasure-
1225	boat wearing mourning apparel, the people of Memphis wearing
1226	mourning apparel, all; together with the priests of Ptah, the
1227	a3 high priest of Ptah, and the council and the household of
1228	Pharaoh, all.
1229	' And lo! they perceived Neneferkaptah grasping the rudders
1230	of the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh by his art of a good scribe.
1231	Il. 17-18. These questions imply that neither in Coptos nor in
1232	Memphis was life any longer bearable for him.
1233	1. 21. 'Returned,' i.e. probably ' gone home, 'died.'
1234	By his magic Neneferkaptah had recovered the drowned bodies of
1235	his wife and child, but when he himself was dead his companions could
1236	do no better than return to Memphis.
1237	1.22. Cf. DIOD. i. 91 oûTe éoOnras daumpàs TepBáddovrau, of the Egyptians
1238	during the mourning before burial: and i. 72 GeSóves ÜTOKáTO TâV MUoTEON
1239	are the garmentsof thepublic mourning for kings.
1240	1. 23. He guided the ship safely to Memphis holding the rudder-
1241	paddles under the water (?). "The art of a good scribe,' is of course the
1242	practice of magic: cf. vi, l.4.
p. 47
1243	CH. 11] AHURE'S STORY 29
1244	They took him up, they saw the book on his body. And Iv.
1245	Pharaoh said, "Let this book which is on his body be hidden 34
1246	away." And the council of Pharaoh, together with the priests of
1247	Ptah and the high priest of Ptah spake before Pharaoh saying,
1248	"O our great lord, the king, may he accomplish the duration
1249	of Ra! Neneferkaptah was a good scribe and a learned man
1250	exceedingly."
1251	•And Pharaoh caused to be given to him entry to the Good 25
1252	House of (?) sixteen days, wrapping of (?) thirty-five, coffining
1253	in seventy days, and he was laid to rest in his sarcophagus, in
1254	his house of rest."
1255	(Here ends Ahure's tale.)
1256	1.24. 'Hidden away' as the cause of all the trouble: it was, in fact,
1257	buried with Neneferkaptah.
1258	1. 25. Apparently the '7o days' included the '16' and the '35"
1259	Throughout the Piolemaic period the standard interval from death, or
1260	perhaps, rather, from the beginning of the undertaker's work, to interment
1261	was yo days, during which time the mourning lasted. This is proved by
1262	the records for Apis bulls and for priests in the stelae of the Serapeum.
1263	In practice the time was often extended by one or two days. For priests,
1264	see Br., Thes. 912-3, cf. 931, 939, and for a layman in high local
1265	position, Rh. Bil. Pap. v; in PıeHı, Insc. i. 36, a certain priest has 80 (?)
1266	days of embalming. Diod. i. 72 gives 72 days as the total duration of
1267	mourning for a king. For Apis bulls see A. Z., 1884, 104 and 125,
1268	insc. No. 6; Rev. Eg. iv. 113. Some of these references are indicated
1269	in WIEDEMANN's note to HDT. ii. 86.
1270	For earlier times we have to rely chiefly on foreign accounts. Hdt.
1271	in the passage just mentioned, says that in all cases the body was salted
1272	in natron for yo days, but he seems to be in error in saying that in the
1273	case of the rich this was exclusive of the time needed for the previous
1274	elaborate preparation of the body, and for the subsequent wrapping; it
1275	would rather be inclusive. A much earlier authority, the Yahvist in
1276	Gen. 1. 3 (c. B.c. 850?), assigns 40 days for the embalming of Jacob, but
1277	70 days for the mourning in Egypt. For the Apis bull also the 7o days
1278	before entombment seem implied for Pharaonic times by an inscription
1279	in the reign of Rameses II (nineteenth dynasty, Rec. de Trav. xxi. 73),
1280	and another in the reign of Aahmes II (twenty-sixth dynasty, ibid. 63).
1281	There may also be some sort of rule in the times assigned to the
1282	different operations upon the corpse; but it is not very clear. The
1283	35 days in the case of Neneferkaptah, and the 36 of Rh. Bil. Pap. v, must
1284	correspond to the ' 1o days' of Genesis, and the 'more than 3o' of DIoD.
1285	i. 91. But 35 days do not correspond to any period mentioned in the
1286	inscription of Anemher (BB., Thes. 893, correcting A. Z., 1886, 36),
p. 48
1287	30 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
1288	IV. "I have told them, the evils that befell us because of this book
1289	a6 whereof thou hast said " Let it be given unto me!" Thou hast
1290	no lot in it, whereas our term of life on earth was taken for it.'
1291	But Setne said, 'Ahure, let there be given unto me this book
1292	that I saw between thee and Neneferkaptah, else will I take it
1293	by force'
1294	a; Neneferkaptah raised himself on the couch, he said, 'Art thou
1295	Setne unto whom this woman hath spoken these vain words,
1296	and thou hast not hearkened unto her words? The book named
1297	which runs as follows: •They made for him a burying from the 28th
1298	Pharmuti, which was his 4th day (he died on the 24th), according to that
1299	that comes in writing, unto thegth Epiphi, his yist day, making for him
1300	every necessary and suitablethingthat is customarytherein according to
1301	that that comes in writing. The zoth Payni to the 29th (?) they cooked
1302	unguents; they bound on him the bandages and cloths of byssus, and the
1303	amulets that are proper for the nobles of Egypt. They made for him
1304	every purification, every cleansing (?); they made for him a great and fine
1305	coffn according to that that comes in writing, from the 6th Epiphi to the
1306	end of the mourning, he having entered his house of rest in which his
1307	father lay! Comparing these details with the numbers in the Setne story
1308	they seem to show a different division of the time elapsing between death
1309	and burial:-
1310	AN-EM-HER.
1311	death 24 Pharmouti days from death. days of embalming.
1312	embalming, &e. 28 Pharmouti 4
1313	(Pachons)
1314	wrapping, &c. 129 Payni / 20 Payni 56 52
1315	coffining (gs./) 16 Epiphi 72 68
1316	9 Epiphi
1317	burial 9 Epiphi 75
1318	NENEFERKAPTAH.
1319	days from death at Coptos or
1320	from arrival at Memphis (").
1321	enters Per-nefer 16 (?)
1322	wrapping begins 35 (г)
1323	(I6+35=51, cf. 52 above)
1324	coffining 70
1325	1. 27. Possible reading, 'to whom this woman hath told these
1326	misfortunes none of which thou hast suffered at all! Neneferkaptah
p. 49
1327	CH. II] THE STRUGGLE FOR THE BOOK 3I
1328	wilt thoube able to take it by power of a good scribe or by IV.
1329	prevailing over me in playing draughts? Let us play for it at a8
1330	the game of fifty-two points'
1331	And Setne said, 'I am ready'
1332	They set before them the gameboard with its pieces, they
1333	played at the game of fifty-two and Neneferkaptah won one
1334	game from Setne. He pronounced a speil to him, he supple- 29
1335	mented (?) it with the draftboard that was before him, he caused
1336	him to sink into the floor to his feet. He did the like by the
1337	second game, he won it from Setne; he caused him to sink into 30
1338	the floor as far as his middle. He did the like by the third
1339	game; he caused him to sink into the floor as far as his ears.
1340	After these things Setne was in great straits at the hand of
1341	Neneferkaptah. Setne called to Anherru, his brother by (P) 3t
1342	Menkh (?)-art, saying, 'Delay not to go up on earth and relate
1343	challenges Setne Khamuas to a contest of magic, or of draught-playing,
1344	to settle the fate of the book.
1345	I. 28. 'Fifty-two points.' For the little that is known of Egyptian
1346	games of draughts see WIEDEMANN, Actes du X Congrès des Orientalisles,
1347	Genève, 1894. In the present instance the number fifty-two, hitherto
1348	unexplained, taken in conjunction with the events that follow, points
1349	1o four games of thirteen points each (compare, perhaps, the fact that
1350	modern packs of cards contain fifty-two in four packs of thirteen each).
1351	Neneferkaptah wins from Setne three games in succession, and after
1352	each game drives him by magic into the ground. Obviously, if Setne
1353	had lost the fourth game he would have been completely buried: he
1354	avoids playing it and saves.himself by counter-magic. The battle of
1355	the clans in Krall's fragmentary Hist. Rom., p. 36, is also arranged 'at
1356	fifty-two;' see also below, iv. 39. Prof. Petrie suggests a connexion
1357	with the number of weeks in a year. Perhaps we may trace here the
1358	effect of a foreign (Jewish ?) calendar on Egyptian type-numbers.
1359	•Pieces,' lit. 'dogs' : compare lalrunculi. No dog-shaped Egyptian
1360	draughtsmen are known; in old Egyptian the pieces were called ' dancers'
1361	1. 29. 'Supplemented (?) it'—possibly Neneferkaptah pressed or struck
1362	Setne down with the board, butthe meaning is very doubtful. Brugsch
1363	and Hess.translate "he protected himself with the box for the draughts,
1364	the expression translated 'box for the draughts' being literally ' the fort
1365	(or enclosure) of playing draughts.'
1366	1. 30. i.e.his upturned face only would be free.
1367	1. 31. No such name as Anherru is yet known among the sons of
1368	Rameses II. The first part of the mother's (?) name is doubtful, so also
1369	is the previous phrase to some extent. Menkh-art might be a reminiscence
1370	of Nefert-ari, the second (?) principal wife of Rameses II, menkh being
p. 50
1371	32 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT.I
1372	IV. before Pharaoh all that is befalling me, and bring thou the
1373	зa amulets of Ptah my father, and my books of magic.'
1374	Anherru delayed not to go up on earth and to relate before
1375	Pharaoh that which was befalling Setne. And Pharaoh said,
1376	"Take unto him the amulets of Ptah and his books of magic'
1377	33 Anherru delayed not to go down to the tomb; he put the
1378	amulets on the body of Setne, and immediately Setne sprang up
1379	high, and reaching forth his hand for the book he took it.
1380	34 It came to pass that as Setne came up out of the tomb the
1381	light walked before him and the darkness walked behind him.
1382	And Ahure wept for (?) it, saying, 'Hail King Darkness!
1383	35 Farewell (?) King Light! Every power hath gone that was in
1384	the tomb, all!'
1385	But Neneferkaptah said unto Ahure, 'Be not grieved in
1386	heart, I will cause him to bring this book hither, a forked stick (P)
1387	36 in his hand, and a censer (?) of fire upon his head."
1388	Setne came up from the tomb, and fastened it behind him
1389	as it had been. He went into the presence of Pharaoh, he
1390	related before him what had befallen him concerning the book.
1391	37 And Pharaoh said unto Setne, 'Take this book to the tomb
1392	of Neneferkaptah like a learned (?) man, otherwise he will cause
1393	thee to take it, a forked stick (?) in thy hand, and a censer of fire
1394	upon thy head.'
1395	38 But Setne hearkened not to him. It came to pass that
1396	Setne did no other thing on earth but unroll the book that
1397	he might read from it before every one.
1398	After these things, it fell on a day as Setne was walking on
1399	equivalent in meaning to neferl. Khamuast was son of the first (?)
1400	principal wife, Ast-nefert.
1401	1. 32. "Books of magic,' lit. 'of taking pledge' "Pledge' seems to
1402	imply either protective magic (as Hess) or magic that constrains the gods
1403	to appear under pain of some kind of forfeiture.
1404	1. 34. With regard to this light and darkness cf. note to vi. 2.
1405	'Wept for it,' or perhaps '(cried out) weeping after him"
1406	1. 35. Or translate, 'a fork and staff! The fork might be for holding
1407	a criminal by the neck, or by the feet for the bastinado, and the staff and
1408	brazier (?) would be the instruments of torture by beating and burning.
1409	This curious penance (?) may have been a recognized one, but no
1410	other instance of it is recorded.
1411	1. 37. 'Like a learned (?) man ;' or 'in prudence, ' in politeness.'
p. 51
1412	сH. 11] EPISODE OF TABUBUE 33
1413	the dromos of the temple of Ptah that behold! he saw a woman IV.
1414	beautiful exceedingly, no woman having been like unto her for 39
1415	beauty (P). She was beautiful (sic), and many ornaments of gold
1416	were upon her, damsels walked after her, and fifty-two house-
1417	hold (?) persons belonged to her. And when he beheld her V.I
1418	Setne knew not where on earth he was. Setne called to his
1419	attendant slave saying, ' Delay not to go to the place where this
1420	woman is and learn what hath come under (?) her command.' a
1421	The attendant slave delayed not to go to the place in which
1422	the woman was; he called to the slave handmaid who was walk-
1423	ing behind her, he questioned her saying, ' What person is this?'
1424	She said to him, 'She is Ta-bubue, the daughter of the 3
1425	prophet of Bast, mistress of Ankh-taui; and behold! she hath
1426	come hither to pray before Ptah the great God.?
1427	The slave returned to Setne, he related to him everything
1428	that she had said to him, all.
1429	And Setne said to the slave, ' Go and speak to the slave girl 4
1430	saying, "Setne Khamuas, the son of Pharaoh Usermara, he it
1431	is that sent me saying, I will give thee ten pieces of gold: pass
1432	1. 39. In the light of the sequel it would seem that the whole of the
1433	Tabubue episode was an hallucination produced by the magic of
1434	Neneferkaptah.
1435	The number fifty-two seems here independent of the game played
1436	by Setne, above, 1. 28.
1437	1. 2. 'Under her command,' possibly 'what is her mission' or 'business."
1438	1. 3. Ta-bubue, 'she of splendour (?);' but bubue looks much like
1439	a demotic transcript of Baußés the nurse(?) of Demeter, in imitation of
1440	whom the women made indecent gestures at the festival of Demeter.at
1441	Eleusis. According to HEroDoTts (ii. 59, 60) the festivals of Bast-
1442	whom he identifies with Artemis-at Bubastis were accompanied by
1443	much licentiousness, and it would be not unreasonable that a name
1444	associated with the Eleusinian mysteries should be found in connexion
1445	with Bast. Tabubue occurs as a woman's name on a Roman ostracon
1446	from Thebes (BR., Thes. 1055)-
1447	"Mistress of Ankh-taui,' 'mistress of the Life of the Two Lands'
1448	This is a title especially attached to Bast at Memphis; cf. BR., Dich.
1449	Géog., pp. 127, 1151; 'Per-Bast' (below, l. g.) is therefore not Bubastis,
1450	as usually, but a suburb of Memphis sacred to the goddess, as REVILLOUT
1451	first observed. Probably •Bast,' the Cat goddess, is here identical with
1452	the feline-headed Sekhemt, wife of Prah.
1453	1. 4. "Ten pieces of gold! The Egyptian gold unit is difficult to
1454	determine. The weighis marked as standards for gold from the tweifth
1455	GRIFFITH. D
p. 52
1456	34 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS IPT. I
1457	V.g an hour with me; or, hast thou a complaint of wrong which I
1458	shall cause to be settled for thee. I will cause thee to be taken
1459	to a place well concealed, and no one on earth shall find thee."
1460	The slave returned to the place in which Tabubue was, he
1461	6 called to her slave handmaid and spoke with her, but she
1462	answered him with railing (?) as though it were blasphemy (?)
1463	that he had spoken. And Tabubue said to the slave, 'Cease
1464	y arguing (?) with this foolish slave, come [hither] and make
1465	speech with me'
1466	The slave hastened to the place where Tabubue was, and said
1467	to her, 'I will give ten pieces of gold : pass an hour with Setne
1468	8 Khamuas, the son of Pharaoh Usermara. Hast thou complaint of
1469	wrong? He will settle it besides. He will cause thee to be taken
1470	to a place well concealed, and no one on earth shall find thee!
1471	• Said Tabubue,' Go speak to Setne saying, "I am a priestess (?),
1472	no mean person am I. If it be that thou seekest to do that
1473	which thou desirest with me, thou shalt come to Per-Bast to
1474	my house. Therein are all things made ready, while thou doest
1475	that which thou desirest with me, and none on earth shall find
1476	1o me, while moreover I shall not do as doth a mean woman in the
1477	face (?) of the street."
1478	The slave returned to Setne, and related before him every-
1479	thing that she had said to him, all. Said he, 'That is well"
1480	Scandalized (P) was every man that was about Setne.
1481	Setne caused a boat to be brought to him; he went up on
1482	board it, he delayed not going to Per-Bast, he came to the west
1483	12 of the Qemy. And lo! he found a house exceeding high, an
1484	to the eighteenth dynasty vary much, but they seem to be multiples or
1485	sub-divisions of 190 to 210 grs. (P. S. B. A. xV. 313).
1486	1. 5. 'Or hast thou a complaint of wrong, &c. This, which seems to
1487	be in reality a corrupt offer to help her in the law-courts, has been
1488	understood to be a threat of violence if she does not comply, followed
1489	by imprisonment in an inaccessible place; Setne asks rather for an
1490	assignation.
1491	1. 10. 'Scandalized (?)' Although Setne's reckless manner of approach
1492	was doubtless scandalous even in Egypt, it was probably more in con-
1493	formity with the marriage customs of the time than we might suppose.
1494	Setne was already married, and had children, below,1.21.
1495	1. I1. Qemy was the name of part of the necropolis of Memphis, near
1496	the Serapeum (BR., Dict. Géog.836), but it seems improbable that the
p. 53
1497	CH. 11] EPISODE OF TABUBUE 35
1498	enclosure wall being round about it and a garden on the north, V.
1499	a diwân (?) being in front thereof. Setne asked, saying, ' This
1500	house, whose house is it?' They said unto him, 'It is the
1501	house [of] Tabubue.' 13
1502	Setne went inside the enclosure wall, and lo! he directed his
1503	attention (in wonder ?) to the garden kiosque. Report of it was
1504	made to Tabubue; she came down, she took the hand of Setne, 14
1505	she said unto him, "By the prosperity of the house of the
1506	prophet of Bast, mistress of Ankh-taui, at which thou hast
1507	arrived, I am exceeding glad (?). Come up from where thou art
1508	with me'
1509	Setne ascended the steps of the house with Tabubue. And 15
1510	lo! he found the upper story of the house swept and garnished,
1511	the floor (?) thereof being adorned with true lapis lazuli and true
1512	turquoise. Many couches were there, furnished with royal 16
1513	linen, and upon the dresser cups of gold in large number.
1514	A cup of gold was filled with wine and given into the hand
1515	of Setne. She said unto him, ' Let it be that thou eat? He 17
1516	said unto her, 'There is no (eating) that I could do'
1517	They put fragrant gums on the censer, and unguents of the
1518	kind that Pharaoh useth were brought before him. Setne made 18
1519	holiday with Tabubue, he had not seen her like ever before, ever.
1520	Setne said unto her,' Let us accomplish that for which we came
1521	hither.'
1522	She said to him, "Thou shalt come to thine house, that in 1g
1523	which thou art. I am a priestess, I am no mean person; if it
1524	be that thou seekest to do that which thou desirest with me,
1525	thou shalt make a writing of maintenance and a compensation ao
1526	priest's house should lie out in the desert west of this. "The Qemy'
1527	would seem to be some other locality.
1528	1.15. "True lapis lazuli, &c., i.e. not the coloured glass or poltery
1529	called by the same name. "Turquoise' was really a green felspar, or
1530	perhaps malachite.
1531	1. 17. Or perhaps, 'Be it that thou shalt make thy choice of food.'
1532	1. 19. Evidently a proverbial expression meaning. ' Thou shalt indeed
1533	have that which is thine already,' or translate, ' wilt thou invade thine own
1534	house, that in which thou art (already)?'
1535	• A writing of maintenance and a compensation in money! Ptolemaic
1536	marriage-contracts contain provisions for maintenance and a making
1537	over of all possessions, present or acquired, to the children, hesides
1538	D 2
p. 54
1539	36 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
1540	V. in money with regard to everything and all goods that belong
1541	to thee, all'
1542	He said unto her, 'Let the scribe of the school be brought."
1543	He was brought forthwith, and Setne caused to be made for
1544	her a writing of maintenance and a compensation in money, for
1545	everything and all goods belonging to him, all.
1546	a1 And at a certain hour it befell that announcement was made
1547	before Setne saying, 'Thy children are below.' He said, 'Let
1548	them be brought up.'
1549	Tabubue arose, she put a garment of royal linen upon her,
1550	23 Setne saw every part of her in it, while lo! his desire increased
1551	beyond what it was before. Setne said, Tabubue, let me
1552	ag accomplish that for which I came hither' She said to him,
1553	•Thou shalt reach thine house, that in which thou art. I am
1554	a priestess, I am no mean person; if it be that thou seekest
1555	to do that which thou desirest with me thou shalt cause thy
1556	24 children to write under my deed. Do not allow them to quarrel
1557	with my children concerning thy goods.'
1558	He caused his children to be brought, he caused them to
1559	write under the deed. He said unto Tabubue, ' Let me accom-
1560	a5 plish that for which I have come hither.' She said unto him,
1561	"Thou shalt reach thine house, that in which thou art. I am
1562	a priestess, I am not a mean person; if it be that thou seekest
1563	to do that which thou desirest with me thou shalt cause thy
1564	aб children to be slain ; allow them not to make quarrel with my
1565	children concerning thy goods."
1566	Setne said, ' Let there be done unto them the abomination
1567	that hath come to thy heart.'
1568	ay She caused his children to be slain before him, she caused
1569	them to be cast down from the window unto the dogs and the
1570	cats. They ate their flesh, he hearing them, while he drank
1571	with Tabubue.
1572	28 Setne said, 'Tabubue, let us accomplish that for which we
1573	a reference to a payment of money. The reference here is to a valuation
1574	of property and agreement to compensate for the dowry, &c., in case
1575	the parties separated; vid. note, p. 128.
1576	1.20. The figy, or schoolmaster, is usually employed in modern Egypt
1577	to write the marriage-contract.
1578	1. 27. " The dogs and the cats;' the cats may be a touch of local
1579	colour having reference to the sacred animal of Bast.
p. 55
1580	CH. 11] EPISODE OF TABUBUE 37
1581	came hither. Everything that thou hast said I have done for V.
1582	thee, all.'
1583	Tabubue said unto him, 'Come up from where thou art to
1584	this chamber' And Setne went unto the chamber, he lay
1585	down upon a couch of ivory and ebony, his desire receiving 29
1586	gold.
1587	Tabubue lay down by the side of Setne; he put forth his
1588	hand to touch her, but she opened her mouth wide in a great cry. 3o
1589	And lo! Setne awaked (?) being in a burning heat (?), his
1590	phallus being in a......, nor were there any clothes on earth
1591	upon him.
1592	At a certain time it came to pass that Setne perceived 3r
1593	a noble person riding in a litter (?), many men running at his
1594	feet, he being like a Pharaoh. And Setne was about to rise, but зa
1595	for shame he could not rise because there was no clothing
1596	upon him.
1597	(The) Pharaoh said, 'Setne, what makest thou in this guise
1598	in which thou art?' He said, 'Neneferkaptah is he who hath
1599	done these things to me, all.'
1600	(The) Pharaoh said, ' Go thou to Memphis; as for thy children 33
1601	they are seeking thee, they are standing before Pharaoh in their
1602	due order.'
1603	Setne said before (the) Pharaoh, 'My great lord the King,
1604	may he accomplish the duration of Ra! In what wise can I go 34
1605	to Memphis, there being no clothing on earth upon me?'
1606	(The) Pharaoh called to a slave who was standing by and
1607	caused him to give clothing to Setne. (The) Pharaoh said,
1608	•Setne, go thou to Memphis. Thy children, they are alive, 35
1609	they are standing in their due order before Pharaoh.'
1610	1. 29. 'Receiving gold'; evidently an idiom to express that expecta-
1611	tion is on the point of being realized.
1612	1. 30. Lit. 'opened her mouth downward, &c., i.e. let the lower jaw fall.
1613	1.31. The timely comfort broughtto Setne is something in the nature
1614	of a vision; perhaps Neneferkaptah, having successfully broken his spirit,
1615	himself now came to the rescue (compare vi. Il. a note, 10, 11). It
1616	would almost seem that Setne, far from being in the house of Tabubue
1617	as he had imagined, was lying in the open. Instead of 'awakened' we
1618	may read 'started up.'
1619	Litter (?) or chariot (?). It is curious that no word for chariot has yet
1620	been recognized in demotic.
p. 56
1621	38 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
1622	Setne came to Memphis, he embraced his children, he found
1623	them alive.
1624	3ó Pharaoh said, 'Is it drunken that thou hast been?' And
1625	Setne related everything that had befallen him with Tabubue
1626	and with Neneferkaptah, all. Pharaoh said, 'Setne, I did what
1627	37 I could for thee before, saying, " They will slay thee if thou take
1628	not this book to the place whence thou broughtest it," and until
1629	this time thou gavest no heed. Let this book be taken to
1630	38 Neneferkaptah, a fork and stick in thine hand, and a censer of
1631	fire on thine head.'
1632	Setne came out from the presence of Pharaoh, a fork and
1633	39 stick in his hand, a censer of fire on his head.
1634	He went down to the tomb in which was Neneferkaptah.
1635	VI. 1 Ahure said to him, 'Setne, the great god Ptah is he that hath
1636	brought thee safe.?
1637	• '(But) Neneferkaptah laughed, saying, " This is that which I
1638	said to thee before."
1639	Setne made salutation (?) to Neneferkaptah: he found it to
1640	be as though it were (?) the Sun that was in the whole tomb.
1641	3 And Ahure and Neneferkaptah made salutation (?) to Setne
1642	exceedingly.
1643	Said Setne, 'Neneferkaptah, is there anything that is dis-
1644	graceful? Neneferkaptah said, 'Setne, thou knowest that
1645	4 Ahure with Merab her child, they are in Coptos, (albeit, they
1646	are) also here in this tomb by the craft of a good scribe.
1647	Let it be laid upon thee to undertake the task that thou go
1648	to Coptos and that thou bring them hither.'
1649	1. 2. Neneferkaptah's laughter probably implies that Ahure's pious
1650	explanation of Setne's safety is not the correct one, and that he himself
1651	had planned the whole course of the episode.
1652	' As though it were the sun' may refer to the return of light to the tomb
1653	along with the book; cf. iv. 34, but the whole of this paragraph is difficult.
1654	L. 3. 'Disgraceful (?)' Though Setne seems to be apprehending the
1655	imposition of a further penalty and asking whether it is to be dishonour-
1656	able, perhaps he is inquiring whether Neneferkaptah has any complaint
1657	to make of unsuitable burial disturbing to his ghostly rest.
1658	1. 4. The Book of the Dead is a collection of magic formulae, some
1659	of which were intended to enable the deceased to travel whither he would.
1660	It was by the use of such formulae that Neneferkaptah, the exceptionally
1661	skilful scribe, i.e. magician trained in the use of formulae, succeeded in
p. 57
1662	сH. u] NENEFERKAPTAH REAPS ADVANTAGE 39
1663	Setne came up from the tomb, he went into the presence of VI. 5
1664	Pharaoh, he related before Pharaoh everything that Nenefer-
1665	kaptah said to him, all.
1666	Pharaoh said, 'Setne, go to Coptos, bring Ahure with Merab 6
1667	her son.'
1668	He said before Pharaoh, 'Let there be given to me the
1669	pleasure-boat of Pharaoh with its equipment.' The pleasure-
1670	boat of Pharaoh was given him with its equipment.
1671	He went on board, he made sail, he delayed not, he reached z
1672	Coptos. Announcement of it was made before the priests of
1673	Isis [of] Coptos and the high priest of Isis. They came down
1674	to meet him, they handed him to the shore. He went up
1675	from thence, he went into the temple of Isis of Coptos and 8
1676	Harpochrates, he caused ox, goose, wine to be brought, he made
1677	offering and libation before Isis of Coptos and Harpochrates.
1678	He went to the necropolis hill of Coptos with the priests of
1679	Isis and the high priest of Isis. They spent three days and 9
1680	three nights seeking in all the tombs which were on the necropolis
1681	hill of Coptos, turning over the stelae of the scribes of the House of
1682	Life,and reading the writings that were upon them. But they found
1683	not the resting-places in which were Ahure with Merab her son. 10
1684	Neneferkaptah found that they had not found the resting-
1685	place of Ahure with Merab her son. He arose (from the dead) as
1686	an old man, a priest great of age exceedingly, and came to meet i
1687	Setne.
1688	Setne saw him; Setne said to the old man, 'Thou art in the
1689	likeness of a man that is great of age; knowest thou the resting-
1690	place in which are Ahure with Merab her child?' 13
1691	The old man said to Setne, 'The father of the father of my
1692	father told it unto the father of my father, saying, "the father (of
1693	the father) of my father told it unto the father of my father, 13
1694	saying, The resting-place of Ahure and Merab her son is by
1695	the southern corner of the house of the .... priest (?)...."'
1696	bringing the ghosts(?) of his wife and child to his own tomb in Memphis,
1697	while their bodies remained at Coptos.
1698	" Let it be laid upon thee'; i.e. by the king, or as a duty ?
1699	1. g. "Turning over the stelae'; presumably because a large number
1700	of the tomb-stones would be found fallen down on their faces.
1701	1.13. "Of the father' was omitted in passing from the last line. See
1702	the note on the date of King Merneb (?) Prah (?). pp. 16-17.
p. 58
1703	40 FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT.1
1704	VI. 14 Said Setne to the old man, 'Perchance 'tis on account of
1705	cheating (?) that the....priest did to thee, that thou goest
1706	about to cause his house to be pulled down.'
1707	The old man said to Setne, Let a watch be placed over me,
1708	15 and let the house of the......priest be destroyed, and if it be
1709	that they find not Ahure with Merab her son under the south
1710	corner of his house, let abomination be done to me.'
1711	16 They set a watch over the old man, they found the resting-
1712	place of Ahure with Merab her son under the south corner
1713	[of the] house of the ...... priest. And Setne had them
1714	bring those great people on board the pleasure-boat of
1715	17 Pharaoh, and caused the house of the .....• priest to be built
1716	according as it was at first.
1717	And Neneferkaptah caused Setne to discover the fact that it
1718	was he that had come to Coptos to cause them to find the
1719	18 resting-place in which was Ahure with Merab her son.
1720	Setne went up on board the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh, he
1721	went down-stream, he delayed not, he reached Memphis with
1722	the people that were with him, all.
1723	19 Announcement of it was made before Pharaoh, he came
1724	down to meet the royal pleasure-boat. He had these great
1725	people brought to the tomb in which was Neneferkaptah, and
1726	a0 caused a filling (?) to be made above them, in one manner.
1727	Colophon.
1728	A complete writing is this relating of Setne Khamuas and
1729	Neneferkaptah, and Ahure his wife, and Merab her child. This
1730	а1 copу (?) was written ..•••• year 15, first month of winter
1731	(Lybi).......
1732	1. 15. "Let abomination be done' seems a periphrasis for ' put to death' ;
1733	compare I1 Kh. iv, 1. 4; vi, l. 24.
1734	11.19-20. The last clause of the story is very doubtful: emphasis is
1735	probably to be laid on 'one' Or the meaning might be 'he caused a
1736	covering building to be erected over them of a certain kind'(?).
1737	1. 20. KRALL, El. déd. à Leemans, p. 63, read at the end the name of
1738	the scribe Ze-Her-pa-ta, but this is probably incorrect.
1739	1. 21. 'Year 15'; hitherto wrongly read as "year 35, and opinions as to
1740	the age of the MS. have been founded on this exceptionally high regnal year.
p. 59
1741	CHAPTER III
1742	THE TALE OF KHAMUAS AND HIS SON SI-OSIRI.
1743	THe demotic text of our second story would appear
1744	to be considerably later than that of the first: this is
1745	indicated by the debased hand and spelling, which are
1746	far removed from all that we know as Ptolemaic, and
1747	would lead one to suspect a very late date for it. But
1748	I do not know any second or third century text of this
1749	style. On the other hand the bilingual sale-contracts of
1750	the time of Tiberius and Claudius show strange varieties
1751	of hand which may be compared with it. Moreover,
1752	the date of the Greek accounts on the recto', which
1753	fixes the earlier limit of age at the middle of the first
1754	century, is strong evidence for attributing the demotic
1755	text to some time within thirty years from that date.
1756	The writing is poor and incorrect?; careless omissions
1757	make gaps in the narrative: there are iterations, also,
1758	and substitutions of false words, besides endless mis-
1759	" See below, pp. 67-8.
1760	In place of the regular hand and uniform spelling of I Kh., here, all
1761	is at random, much as in the 'Historical Tale' of Vienna. The sign
1762	for p', 'the,'serves also for strong final / and for fr, and often il cannot
1763	be distinguished from e. Meaningless variation in spelling is the rule.
1764	" Instances of such omissions are in iv. 4-8, 14; V. 37-vi. 1.
p. 60
1765	42 SECOND TALE OF KIAMUAS [PT. I
1766	spellings. Probably many of the difficulties found by
1767	•the translator are due in reality to mistakes of the scribe,
1768	whose lack of skill has throughout produced so strong
1769	a contrast to the neatness of the previous text. In
1770	the tale of Khamuas and Neneferkaptah, especially in
1771	the speeches, there are marked instances of a kind of
1772	inversion in which the subject, object, or other noun is
1773	taken out of its sentence and then resumed in the sen-
1774	tence itself by a pronoun. In the present tale these
1775	grammatical figures are piled up unendurably to a reader,
1776	though, accompanied by proper emphasis and gesture,
1777	these blemishes of writing may have appeared as beauties
1778	of rhetoric to an audience.
1779	Since the pages of the papyrus are not numbered it is
1780	impossible to say how many are lost from the beginning.
1781	One whole page at least must have disappeared, for no
1782	reasonable opening of the story could have been con-
1783	tained in the missing portion of the line that heads the
1784	first fragmentary page. On this page about two-thirds
1785	of the upper lines exist, but of the lower part of the
1786	page scarcely anything is left. The main thread of
1787	the story in the last leaf or leaves may be restored in
1788	a few words :-
1789	[Setme Khamuas, the son of Pharaoh Usermara, took to wife
1790	his sister (?) Meh-wesekht', whom he loved extremely; but they
1791	had no child and their hearts were grieved because of it. It
1792	• befell that one night as she slept she dreamed a] dream, they
1793	: The name Meh-wesekht, as that of the wife of Khamuas, is not found
1794	in the first story nor in history. It occurs, however, as the name of a
1795	princess who was grandmother of Sheshong, founder of the twenty-second
1796	dynasty. In conversation Khamuas and Meh-wesekht call each other
1797	'brother and sister' (iil. 9, 10), but perhaps the words are used merely
1798	as common terms of endearment between lovers or between husband
1799	and wife, and without reference to previous relationship (cf. MÜLLER,
1800	Liebespoesie, pp. 8,9 for their use).
1801	The restorations throughout thispage of thepapyrus are largely
1802	without clear warrant.
p. 61
1803	сH. I11] THE BIRTH OF SI-OSIRI 43
1804	speaking with her [saying, ' Art] thou Meh-wesekht [the wife] I.
1805	of Setme, who lieth [in vain seeking] to obtain healing [for
1806	thyself and thine husband (?). When the morning of to-morrow a
1807	hath] come, go to the entrance of the lavatory (?) of Setme thine
1808	husband; thou shalt find a melon-vine that groweth there......3
1809	and its gourds, and thou shalt put it back (?). [It shall be to
1810	thee (?)] for medicine, and thou shalt give [of it to Setme thine
1811	husband (?) Thou shalt lie with him and thou shalt conceive 4
1812	seed] of him the same [night]'
1813	Meh-wesekht awoke [from] the dream, this being what she
1814	had seen; she did according to all things [that had been told 5
1815	her by dream. She lay down by] the side of [Setme] her
1816	husband, and she conceived seed of him.
1817	There came her [time of making purification, she made] the
1818	sign [of women who are pregnant. Setme made announcement 6
1819	of it before Pharaoh, his] heart [being glad] because of [it]
1820	exceedingly. He bound [on her] amulets, he read to her magic
1821	writing.
1822	Setme laid [him] down one night [and dreamed a dream, ?
1823	they speaking] with him saying, 'Meh-wesekht thy wife hath
1824	con ceived seed in the night (?)]. The child that shall be born,
1825	he [shall be named] Si-Osiri; many [are the marvels that he 8
1826	shall do in the land of Egypt (?)'
1827	Setme awoke] from the [dream], having seen these things.
1828	[His heart was glad] exceedingly.
1829	1. 1. For another dream beginning with the question, 'art thou ...?'
1830	see below,v.1o.
1831	II. 5-6. For the general sense cf. I Kh. ili. 7.
1832	1. 7. Si-Osiri, 'Son of Osiris,' a title occasionally given to Horus, though
1833	- usually he was called ' Son of Isis.' A neat restoration of these dreams
1834	would be to make Isis nursing Harpochrates appear to Meh-wesekht,
1835	and Osiris to Selme,—note the plural in Il. 1, 7, 'they speaking,' which
1836	may, however, be only the indefinite form =' words being spoken? The
1837	fragments would quite well admit of this restoration which would also
1838	agree with the style of Egyptian tales; but there is no certainty. The
1839	end of the story in which it is shown that Si-Osiri is really Hor son
1840	of Paneshe, who had obtained from Osiris leave to revisit earth, suffi-
1841	ciently accounts for the name given to the child. As for the words
1842	heard in the vision, they may have been an inspiration from Hor son
1843	of Paneshe,himself, and need not have been communicaled by any
1844	definite personage.
p. 62
1845	44 SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
1846	1. [She (?)] made [her months (?) of] pregnancy, she divided (?)
1847	9..... .• •C
1848	[There came her time of bearing], she bore a male child. It
1849	was made known to (P)] Setme, [and he named him] Si-Osiri,
1850	according to that which was said by dream .......
1851	.....•.••••.and they nursed him.
1852	It came to pass that when the child [Si-Osiri was in his first
1853	year, one] would have said, 'he is two years old,' and when he
1854	was in his second [year] one would have said, 'he is three years
1855	"1 old.' ••.••. [And it came to pass that Setme never passed an
1856	hour] without looking at the child Si-Osiri, great being the love
1857	[that he had for him] exceedingly.
1858	The child grew big, he grew strong, he was sent to the
1859	1a school (?)...•.. He rivalled the scribe that had been appointed
1860	to teach him. The child [Si-Osiri] began to speak ..... • with
1861	13 the scribes of the House of Life, in [the temple of Ptah (?) ; all
1862	who heard him were] lost in wonder at him.
1863	And it was Setme's delight to have him made ready and
1864	14 taken to the éoprý before Pharaoh, that [the nobles might see his
1865	cleverness and their hearts be pleased thereat;] and that he
1866	should make for himself honour(?) with them all.
1867	[And on a certain day it happened that] Setme [was]
1868	made ready for éoprń according to (?) [his custom (?) in] his
1869	15 [own (?)] dwellings...••. the child [Si-Osiri was brought for
1870	the] éopтń (to be held) in [his] presence.
1871	[At a] certain moment behold! Setme heard the voice of
1872	Io a wailing, ••.... and he looked [from the upper chambers]
1873	of his dwelling [and behold! he saw a rich man] whom they
1874	were carrying out to the desert-necropolis, the wailing being
1875	"7 Lloud exceedingly]. ...•.• [his condition] being more (?)
1876	glorious than his own (?). He gazed [again] he [looked] at his
1877	18 feet (?), behold! he saw [a poor man being carried out from
1878	1. r3. 'Made ready,' lit. 'purified, including the whole process of
1879	bathing, anointing, and clothing for the banquet.
1880	1.14. Or, 'and that he shouldsurpass(?) them (schoolfellows or
1881	disputants ?) all!
1882	Il.17,18. The evil lot of this rich man in Hades is shown in il.13-14,
1883	and the happy lot of the poor man, ibid., II.10-12.
p. 63
1884	CH. 1II] VISIT TO HADES 45
1885	Memphis to the cemetery]...... he being wrapped [in] a mat, I.
1886	there being •..... and [none] walking [after him.
1887	Said] Setme, 'By [Ptah, the great god, how much better it 19
1888	shall be in Amenti for great men (?)] for whom [they make
1889	glory (7) with] the voice of [wailing] than for poor men whom
1890	they take to the desert-necropolis [without glory of funeral]!'
1891	[But Si-Osiri said, ' There shall be done unto thee in Amenti] ao
1892	like [that which] shall be done to this poor man in Amenti;
1893	[there shall not be done unto thee that which shall be done to at
1894	this rich man in Amenti]. Thou shalt [go (?)] into Amenti
1895	[and thou shalt see ... ...
1896	(The scraps of the thirteen succeeding lines seem to
1897	show that Setme was much troubled at the prediction;
1898	some dialogue follows, Setme asking a question. Prob-
1899	ably the banquet was set aside; at any rate we must
1900	suppose that in course of time Setme and his son go to
1901	the necropolis, where Si-Osiri leads his father to the
1902	mystic entrance of Te!. Here they pass through three
1903	halls in succession. As to what they saw in them nothing
1904	can be discovered from these fragmentary lines, and
1905	subsequent parts of the tale contain no clear allusions
1906	to the lost paragraphs.)
1907	[They entered the fourth hall]•.•.••_And Setme saw some 34
1908	men that were scattered and apart, they being also ravenous (?)];
1909	there being others whose food, water, and bread, were hung over II. I
1910	them, and they were hastening to take it down, but others dug
1911	pits attheir feet toprevent their reaching it.
1912	1. 3o. Cf. ii. 15 for reference to this speech.
1913	• How Si-Osiri and Khamuas entered the Tê (Eg. D./) nothing is
1914	left to tell us; ii. 24 seems to imply thattherewas some mystery about it.
1915	Here the Dat or Te is the mystic scene of the judgement of the dead
1916	before Osiris as set forth in the Book of the Dead, and, like Vergil's
1917	underworld, it is also apparently the final dwelling-place of the dead.
1918	ii. 22-3 may imply that every nome was supposed to have its own place
1919	of judgement in the underworld. This idea is paralleled by the local
1920	Razals or tribunals in the Book of the Dead (chap. xx).
p. 64
1921	46 SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
1922	Il.a They entered the fifth hall and behold! Setme saw the noble
1923	spirits standing in their places, and those who had charges of
1924	violence standing at the entrance praying ; [and] one man in whose
1925	3 right eye the bolt of the door of the fifth hall was fixed, he
1926	praying, he uttering great lamentation.
1927	They entered the sixth hall, and behold! Setme saw the gods
1928	4 of the [council (P)] of the dwellers in Amenti, standing in their
1929	places, the attendants (?) of Amenti standing and making
1930	prociamation.
1931	They entered the seventh hall, and behold! Setme saw the
1932	s figure of Osiris the great god, seated upon his throne of fine gold,
1933	and crowned with the atef crown, Anubis the great god being
1934	on his left and the great god Thoth on his right; and the gods
1935	of the council of the dwellers in Amenti were standing to left
1936	6 and right of him. The balance was set in the midst before
1937	them, and they were weighing the evil deeds against the good
1938	deeds, the great god Thoth recording, and Anubis giving the
1939	1. 2. 'Those who had charges of violence,' or injustice; whether as
1940	accusers or accused may be doubted.
1941	1.3. The gods of the council correspond to the Eg. zaza-t of Osiris,
1942	of Kherneter in the book of the Dead.
1943	The word translated ' bolt' is quite uncertain: it might be 'pivot.'
1944	The man thus punished is the rich man of i. 16. In a very ancient
1945	sculpture found by QuiBeLL at Hieraconpolis, a door-socket is in the
1946	form of a man on whose chest (?) the door was pivotted.
1947	1. 5. This account of Hades is founded on the idea of the judgement
1948	so commonly depicted in the vignette of ch.125 of the Book of the Dead.
1949	There we see Osiris enthroned at the inner end of a hall, crowned with
1950	the alef crown, the scales before him, Anubis telling the balance and
1951	Thoth recording; while the Amat monster waits open-mouthed, apparently
1952	to devour the wicked. At the side are the forty-two assessor gods (cf.
1953	]. 22) to each of whom the dead man addresses the disavowal of a sin.
1954	1.6. The balancing of the heart against the feather of Maat (ch. 125
1955	in the Book of the Dead) seems to be for ascertaining the absence of
1956	wickedness; and the accompanying 'Negative Confession' consists of
1957	a denial of having committed the sins which it enumerates. The im-
1958	possibility of such ideal innocence was obvious, butthe belief in the
1959	magic power of words seems to have come to the aid even of the worst
1960	culprit. By denial of sin in correct terms, and by magic adjuration of
1961	the heart not to betray him in the scales, the deceased outwitted the gods
1962	in the formalities of the divine judgement, and obtained the rewards
1963	offered to those found innocent. In the present text a more reasonable
p. 65
1964	CH. I1I] VISIT TO HADES 47
1965	word to his colleague. For he of whom it shall be found that II.
1966	his evil deeds are more numerous than his good deeds is
1967	delivered () to Ama of the Lord of Amenti; his soul and 7
1968	his body are destroyed and she (7) does not permit him to live
1969	again for ever. But as for him of whom it shall be found that
1970	his good deeds are more numerous than his evil deeds, he is
1971	taken among the gods of the council of the Lord of Amenti,
1972	his soul going to heaven with the noble spirits. And he of8
1973	whom it shall be found that his good deeds are equal to his
1974	and moral process of weighing a man's virtuous (?) acts against his
1975	vicious (f) acts is indicated.
1976	In other words the Egyptian moral ideal was high. The Book of the
1977	Dead, with its reliance on magic, embodies the attempts of the priests to
1978	provide with advantage to themselves a way of escape for sinners. On
1979	the one hand, the ideas of the influence of a man's life on earth upon his
1980	future after death were allowed to develop until it seemed that no
1981	salvation was possible for any; on the other, purely mechanical means
1982	were provided, which, as it would seem, the greatest sinner could embrace
1983	with full assurance of bliss. The present text with its much higher,
1984	though still arbitrary and confused, view shows the mark of influences
1985	such as those of Christianity.
1986	The words rendered 'evil deeds' and 'good deeds' may perhaps
1987	mean "virtues' and ' vices,' or perhaps rather 'beneficent deeds' and
1988	'malicious deeds.'
1989	•Am-t, mistress of Amenti, is the tille in LEps., Tdib. of the
1990	monster sitting open-mouthed by the scales. It is usually represented
1991	in vignettes to ch. 125 with a crocodile's head, a lion's body, and the
1992	hind quarters of a hippopotamus. Its name probably means ' devourer,
1993	but apparently its functions are nowhere described, and it is unfortunate
1994	that the present reference is also vague. In the tombs of the kings
1995	(Rameses VI, &c.) there is a curious variant of the scene of the judgement
1996	in which the monster has the form of a pig (RosELLINı, Monumenti del
1997	Cullo, cxvi; WILKINSON, Ancient Egyptians (third ed. by BiRcH), p. 466).
1998	1. 7. 'She does not allow him to breathe ever' ; 'breathe' here means
1999	to live after death; "The Book of Breathings' is the title of a late text
2000	intended to ensure life beyond the grave, and to enable the deceased to
2001	assume any form at pleasure, as a powerful god might do. Thus,
2002	according to the version of the Judgement of the Dead contained in our
2003	text,the wicked were utterly annihilated, soul and body, while the good
2004	man became a god in the Underworld, of the rank of the counsellors of
2005	Osiris, his soul going to heaven along with the noble spirits. In the
2006	Book of the Dead there is a chapter for becoming a sr n s's•6, "noble
2007	of the council (of Osiris)." Il is numbered 79, and is found as carly as
2008	the eighteenth dynasty.
p. 66
2009	48 SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
2010	Il. evil deeds, he is taken amongst the excellent (?) spirits that
2011	serve Sokari-Osiris.
2012	And Setme saw (there) a great man clothed in raiment of
2013	• byssus, near to the place in which Osiris was, he being of
2014	exceeding high position (?).
2015	Setme marvelled at those things which he saw in Amenti.
2016	And Si-Osiri walked out in front of (?) him; and he said to him,
2017	1o "My father Setme, dost thou not see this great man who is
2018	clothed in raiment of royal linen, standing near to the place in
2019	which Osiris is? He is that poor man whom thou sawest being
2020	carried out from Memphis, with no man following him, and
2021	i1 wrapped in a mat. He was brought to the Tê and his evil deeds
2022	were weighed against his good deeds that he did upon earth ;
2023	and it was found that his good deeds were more numerous than
2024	his evil deeds, considering (?) the life destiny which Thoth had
2025	written for him ......considering his magnanimity (?) upon
2026	1.8. In ch. 125 of the Book of the Dead we find a different doctrine—
2027	that the chief hope of the justified was to become a follower or servant of
2028	Osiris; but throughout the texts of that multifarious collection the fates
2029	of tacesod end nti cil to matar af trore caucesr,
2030	hinted at. Moreover, in the present text the division is made on
2031	a different principle and into three classes, viz. the actively virtuous,
2032	the actively vicious, and those whose good and evil acts balanced
2033	each other. Another and contemptible class is described below,
2034	11. 18-21.
2035	1.g. Theseventh hall is apparentlythelast, it is at any rate the last
2036	into which Si-Osiri conducts his father. In the Book of the Dead there
2037	is no such series of halls leading to the place of judgement, but the idea
2038	may have been derived from the seven arreryt or aryl (halls or
2039	entrances?) of ch. 144, which are connected with Osiris (vid. LEps.,
2040	Idib., pl. Ix, Ixi).
2041	Il. to et seqg. To the poor virtuous man is given the funerary outfit
2042	that was buried with the rich wicked man, and he is promoted to close
2043	attendance on Osiris, apparelled in the fine raiment thus provided from
2044	the rich man's wardrobe.
2045	1. r. 'His duration of life that Thoth wrote for him?' In the Rh. Bil.
2046	Pap., ii. 2 (BR., Thes. 898), we have, in the demotic, mention of ' the end
2047	of his life that Thoth had written for him upon his brick of birth, and in
2048	the hieratic 'the end of his life that Asdenu ('Orrávns, vid. MASPERO,
2049	P.S. B. A. xx.140) had engraved for him upon his meskhent! The
p. 67
2050	си. I1I] VISIT TO HADES 49
2051	earth. And it was commanded before Osiris that the burial II.
2052	outfit of that rich man, whom thou sawest carried forth from 1a
2053	Memphis with great laudation, should be given to this same
2054	poor man, and that he should be taken among the noble spirits
2055	as a man of God that follows Sokaris Osiris, his place being
2056	near to the person of Osiris. (But) that great man whom thou 13
2057	didst see, he was taken to the Tê, his evil deeds were weighed
2058	against his good deeds, and his evil deeds were found more
2059	numerous than his good deeds that he did upon earth. It
2060	was commanded that he should be requited in Amenti, and he
2061	[is that man] whom [thou didst see], in whose right eye the 14
2062	pivot (7) of the gate of Amenti was fixed, shutting and opening
2063	upon it, and whose mouth was open in great lamentation. By
2064	Osiris the great god, Lord of Amenti, behold! I spake to thee
2065	on earth [saying, "There shall be done] to thee even as is done 15
2066	to this poor man; there shall not be done unto thee that which
2067	is done to that great man," for I knew that which would become
2068	of him."
2069	Said Setme, ' My son Si-Osiri, many are the marvels that
2070	I have seen in Amenti. In due time let me learn [what hath 16
2071	happened] to these men which are scattered (?) and apart (?),
2072	they being also gluttonous; there being others whose food,
2073	water, and bread is hung above them, they hastening to take
2074	it down while others are digging pits at their feet to prevent 17
2075	their reaching it.?
2076	Said Si-Osiri, It is just, my father Setme. These men
2077	that thou sawest scattered (?) and apart (?), thcy being also
2078	ravenous (P), they are the kind of men on earth who are under 18
2079	the curse of God, and do work night and day for their living,
2080	while moreover their women rob them and they find not bread
2081	to eat. They came to Amenti : their evil deeds were found to be
2082	more numerous than their good deeds; and they found that that 19
2083	which happened to them on earth happened to them in Amenti-
2084	both to them and to those other men whom thou sawest, whose
2085	food, water, and bread is hung over them, they running to take
2086	it down while others dig a pit at their feet to prevent them
2087	birth-brick of Meskhent is usually figured near the halance in the
2088	jurgement scene; cf. also ERM., Wesl. Comm.. p. 63, and Kuf. v. 84.
2089	CRIPFITH. E
p. 68
2090	50 SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
2091	1l. reaching it: they are the kind of men on earth whose life is
2092	before them, but God diggeth a pit at their feet to prevent them
2093	a finding it. They came to Amenti and they found (?) that that
2094	which befell them on earth befell them again [in Amenti];
2095	behold ! their souls were taken into the Tê. Find it at thy
2096	heart, my father Setme, that he who is good upon the earth
2097	a3 they are good to him in Amenti, while he that is evil, they are
2098	evil to him. These things are established (?), [they shall not be
2099	changed] for ever. The things that thou sawest in the Tê in
2100	23 Memphis, they happen in the forty-two nomes in which [are
2101	the assessors (?)] of Osiris the great god, [whose seat is in]
2102	Abydos, the place of Oracle (?), the dwellings of princes, ......
2103	Philae'
2104	Si-Osiri ended these words which he spake before Setme
2105	24 [his father]; he [returned] up from the desert of Memphis, _his
2106	father Setme] embracing him, his hand being in his hand.
2107	Setme asked [him, saying, 'My] son Si-Osiri, is the place by
2108	25 which we descended different from the place whence we came
2109	up?' But Si-[Osiri made] answer to Setme never a word. And
2110	Setme marvelled at the experience in which he was, saying,
2111	• He will be able to become (?) even as the noble spirits and as
2112	26 a man of God, and I shall walk with him saying, "he is my
2113	son." Setme pronounced a [writing from his] book of exorcis-
2114	ing demons, being lost in wonder at [that which] he had seen
2115	a7 in Amenti. And these things weighed [upon] him, for to [none
2116	on earth] could he reveal them.
2117	Now when the boy Si-Osiri had attained twelve years it
2118	came to pass that there was no [good scribe or learned man (?)]
2119	that rivalled him in Memphis in reading writing that compels.
2120	1.21. The wicked appear to be annihilated after the judgement, but
2121	we are now shown the fate of the outcasts and ill-starred wretches who
2122	have lived a contemptible or merely bestial life. In Il. 20, 21, the doctrine
2123	of predestination, already indicated in l. 11, is further developed.
2124	1. 22. 'Tê in Memphis,' or "Tê of Memphis.'
2125	Forty-two is the number of the nomes, of which twenty-two were
2126	in Upper Egypt and twenty in Lower Egypt. According to the Book of
2127	the Dead the assessors at the judgement were forty-two in number, one
2128	representing each nome.
2129	1. 27. ' Writing that compels' is the phrase translated ' books of magic'
2130	in I Kh. iv. 32.
p. 69
2131	cH.m] THE ETHIOPIAN'S CHALLENGE 51
2132	After these things] on a certain day Pharaoh Usermara II. as
2133	went unto the court of the palace (?) in Memphis, and [the
2134	council] of the princes, of the generals, and of the great men of
2135	Egypt [stood] according to their places of standing in the court. a9
2136	One came [to the palace saying], 'This is a communication
2137	that an ate of Ethiopia maketh, on whose body a letter [is
2138	sealed]'
2139	Announcement of it was made [before] Pharaoh. He was 3o
2140	brought to the court, he made prayer (?) [saying, 'Is there any
2141	to] read before Pharaoh this writing that I have brought to
2142	Egypt without spoiling its seal; to read in the writings that are
2143	on it without opening it? If it be that there [be no good scribe 3r
2144	and learned man in] Egypt who is able to read it without
2145	opening it, I will take the humiliation of Egypt to the land of
2146	Nehes, my country.'
2147	At hearing these words Pharaoh [with his princes knew not 3a
2148	the place on] earth in which they were, saying, 'By Ptah, the
2149	great god, it is a feat for a good scribe and learned man to
2150	read writings of which he shall see [their] country! Verily (?) 33
2151	exalted (?) is it to read a letter [without opening it]!'
2152	Said] Pharaoh, 'Let there be summoned to me Setme
2153	Khamuas, my son.'
2154	They ran, they brought him that instant. He bowed him-IIl..
2155	self to the ground, he saluted [Pharaoh]; he [raised] himself,
2156	he stood on his feet making , the blessings ot the salutation
2157	of Pharaoh.
2158	Said to him Pharaoh, •My [son], Setme, hast thou heard the a
2159	words that this ate of Ethiopia hath spoken before me, saying,
2160	"Is there a good scribe and learned man in Egypt who shall be
2161	able to read this letter that is in my hand without breaking 3
2162	1. 28. It is difficult to decide whether the 'court' was an open
2163	courtyard or a hall of assembly. The word is ancient, and in origin
2164	seems to mean "verdant,' as if it might be a cool place of green trees, or,
2165	perhaps better, a shaded pillared court, painted green.
2166	I. 39. 'Man (?) of Ethiopia'; the meaning of ale can only be guessed
2167	from the context :—' foreigner,' ' magician,' "rascal," 'slave, 'captive'?
2168	'On whose body a letter was sealed.' Uncertain and obscure; but
2169	it may mean that the letter was fastened to his body and there sealed.
2170	Il.32, 33. 'It is a feat,' &e. Very uncertain reading and meaning.
2171	E2
p. 70
2172	52 SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT.I
2173	I1l. its seal, and shall know what is written upon it without
2174	opening it?"'
2175	* At hearing these words Setme knew not where on earth he
2176	was, saying, 'My great lord, who is he that shall be able to
2177	read a writing without opening it? After a time let there be
2178	granted unto me ten days of delay that I may see what I shall
2179	s be able to do to prevent the humiliation of Egypt being taken
2180	to the land of Nehes, the country of eaters of gum.'
2181	Said Pharaoh, ' They are (granted) to my son Setme."
2182	6 Apartments for residence (?) were given to the Ethiopian ;
2183	there was made for him every wickedness (P) after the manner of
2184	an Ethiopian. And Pharaoh arose from the court, his heart being
2185	7 grieved exceedingly ; he lay down without drinking or eating.
2186	Setme went to his apartments, not knowing whither on earth
2187	he was going. He gathered himself in his clothes from his
2188	8 head to his feet: he lay down without knowing where on earth
2189	he was. They informed Meh-wesekht, his wife, of it; she came
2190	to the place in which Setme was, she put her hand within his
2191	9 clothes and found no warmth; he lay still (?) in his clothes.
2192	She said to him, 'My brother, Setme, there is no warmth in
2193	the lap; shebay in the flesh, illness (P), sadness of heart?
2194	Said he to her, ' Cease from me, my sister Meh-wesekht ; the
2195	matter on account of which my heart is grieved is not a thing
2196	that it is right to reveal to a woman
2197	i1 The child Si-Osiri came in, he stood over Setme, his father;
2198	he said to him, 'My father Setme, wherefore liest thou in grief
2199	ia of heart? The things that are (?) in thine heart, tell them to me
2200	that I may cause them to cease.'
2201	Said he, 'Cease from me my son Si-Osiri. As for the
2202	things that are in my heart, thou art little of age, thou art not
2203	i3 great; take heed to thyself!'
2204	Said Si-Osiri, 'Tell it unto me that I may cause thy heart
2205	to be refreshed concerning them.'
2206	Said Setme, 'My son Si-Osiri, it is an ate of Ethiopia who
2207	1.5. Egypt was always proud of the abundance of her food products;
2208	here the poverty of Ethiopia is emphasized by calling its inhabitants
2209	'eaters of gum."
2210	1.9. This is probably in the form of a professional diagnosis, a mere
2211	list without construction.
p. 71
2212	CH. III] THE ETHIOPIAN'S CHALLENGE 53
2213	hath come up to Egypt with a letter sealed on his body, and he I1l.
2214	saith, "Is there he that will read it without opening it? If it 14
2215	be that there be no good scribe and learned man in Egypt who
2216	shall be able to read it, I will take the humiliation of Egypt to 15
2217	the land of Nehes, my country." Behold I lay down, my heart
2218	being grieved thereat, O my son Si-Osiri.
2219	When Si-Osiri heard these words he laughed long. Said to 16
2220	him Setme, 'Wherefore laughest thou?' Said he, '1 laugh
2221	because thou art lying thy heart grieved because of such a thing "?
2222	as this small matter. Arise, my father Setme; I shall be able
2223	to read the letter that was brought to Egypt without opening it,
2224	and to find what is written upon it without breaking its seal!" 18
2225	At hearing these words Setme arose suddenly, saying, ' What
2226	is the sign of the things that thou sayest, my son Si-Osiri ?' 19
2227	Said he to him, 'My father Setme, go to the cellars of thy
2228	house: every book that thou takest out of the case I will tell 20
2229	thee what book it is, I will read it without seeing it, standing
2230	above thee in thy cellars."
2231	Arose Setme, he stood on his feet, he did according to all 2x
2232	that Si-Osiri had said to him, all. Setme (Si-Osiri) read every
2233	book that Setme his father brought up to him, without opening «
2234	them. Setme came up from the cellars of his house in all glad-
2235	ness. He delayed not to come to the place in which Pharaoh 23
2236	was, he related before him all the things that the child Si-Osiri
2237	had said to him, all; his heart was glad of it exceedingly.
2238	Pharaoh washed himself for éoprń with Setme; he caused 24
2239	Si-Osiri to be brought to the éoprn before him. They drank,
2240	they made a good day.
2241	Came the morning of its morrow; Pharaoh came forth to 25
2242	the court between his great men. Pharaoh caused the ate of
2243	Ethiopia to be fetched; he was brought to the court, the letter
2244	sealed on his body, and he stood in the midst of the court. The 36
2245	child Si-Osiri came into the midst and stood with the ate of
2246	Ethiopia ; he cried against him, saying, ' Woe ! thou wicked one a?
2247	of Ethiopia: may Amon, his god, smite him. Thou that hast
2248	I. Ig. 'Cellars'; at Tanis, Professor Petrie found the hoards of Roman
2249	papyri in the cellars; apparently documents were kept in underground
2250	chambers for security against fire, the later ones being generally found in
2251	baskets, though the finest papyri were probably kept in jars.
p. 72
2252	54 SECOND IALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
2253	Ill. come up to Egypt, the beautiful pool of Osiris, the throne of
2254	28 Ra-Harakht, the beautiful horizon of the Spirit, saying, " I will
2255	take its humiliation to the land of Nehes ": by the inspiration (?)
2256	of Amon, thy god, which is cast upon thee, the words which
2257	a9 I shall narrate—which are those that are written in this letter
2258	-speak not falsehood of them before Pharaoh thy sovereign."
2259	30 When the ate of Ethiopia saw the child Si-Osiri standing in
2260	the court, he held down his head, he spake, saying, ' Every word
2261	3i that thou shalt say I will not speak falsehood of them.'
2262	The Reading of the Letter.
2263	The beginning of the narrative made by Si-Osiri, which he
2264	related before Pharaoh and his nobles, the people of Egypt
2265	3a attending to his voice. He said, ' This is what is written on the
2266	letter of the ate of Ethiopia who standeth in the midst :
2267	IV.ı •"It came to pass in the days of Pharaoh Menkh-pa-Ra Si-
2268	Amon, he being the beneficent king of the whole land, that
2269	Egypt overflowed with all things in his time; he was lavish in
2270	a giving expenditure and labour in the great temples of Egypt.
2271	•" It befel on a day that the Kwr of the land of Nehes was
2272	3...... the fields of the land of Amon. Behold! he heard the
2273	voices of three ate of Ethiopia [in the] prison-house (?), one
2274	1. 28. 'The Spirit' or 'Ayadodaípwv, Yais, Pshay. Osiris, Ra, and the
2275	Agathodaemon are evidently here the chief deities, but the last is the
2276	Supreme Deity in Kufi. The name occurs frequently in demotic (see
2277	Hess, London Gnost. Gloss. s.v.). Shay is properly 'Fate,' a god of
2278	no great importance in earlier times. One might here translate 'fate,
2279	but the word in demotic corresponds also to Ka in hieroglyphic, and so
2280	is better rendered ' Spirit' Cf. vii. 1I.
2281	1. 1. 'Menkh-pa-Ra' looks like an unetymological version of Men-
2282	kheper-Ra, the prenomen of Thothmes III, which must have been
2283	well remembered, and would be pronounced something like Menekhprê.
2284	In the cuneiform letters of Tell el Amarna the name is transcribed
2285	Manakhbiria. Si-Amon, 'son of Amon, is a name readily invented
2286	for a Theban king, and actually borne by Her-hor, the first priest-king
2287	at Thebes, in the twenty-first dynasty. Menkhpara is once called simply
2288	Si-Amon (iv. 25), and by the statement in vi. 35 heis put 1500years(!)
2289	before Rameses II.
2290	1. 2. Kwr is evidently the title of the ruler of Ethiopia, but whether
2291	as an independent king is not clear. In Il. 3, 4, the Ethiopians speak of
2292	the 'Kur of Egypt' apparently as distinct from Pharaoh, who is mentioned
p. 73
2293	CH.I] THE READING OF THE LETTER 55
2294	of them saying in a loud voice, after other words, May Amon IV.4
2295	not find for me failure (?) nor the Kwr of(?) Egypt cause
2296	abomination to be done to me; for I would cast my magic up to
2297	Egypt and I would cause thepeople of Egypt to pass three 5
2298	days and three nights without seeing other light than that of
2299	kiki-oil (?)."
2300	• Another said, after other words, "May Amon not find for 6
2301	me failure nor the Kwr of Egypt cause abomination to be
2302	done to me; for I would cast my magic up to Egypt and cause 7
2303	Pharaoh of Egypt to be brought to the land of Nehes, and
2304	I would cause him to be beaten with five hundred blows of
2305	the stick (?) in the midst before the Viceroy, and I would 8
2306	cause him to be brought back to Egypt in six hours thither
2307	precisely."
2308	'When the Viceroy heard these words from the voices of the g
2309	three men of Ethiopia, he caused them to be brought before
2310	him; he said to them, "Which of you is he that said, 'I will
2311	cast my magic up to Egypt, I will not allow them to see the 10
2312	light for three days and three nights'?"
2313	' They said, "It is Hor, the son of the Sow."
2314	• Said he, " Which is he that said, I will cast my magic up to i
2315	Egypt, I will bring Pharaoh to the land of Nehes, I will cause
2316	him to be beaten with five hundred blows of the stick (?) in the 13
2317	midst before the Viceroy, I will cause him to be taken back to
2318	Egypt in six hours thither precisely ?"
2319	• Said they, "It is Hor, son of the Negress." 13
2320	'Said he, "Which is he that said, I will cast my magic
2321	up to Egypt, I will not allow the land to be fertile for three 14
2322	years?"
2323	at the same time. This would imply that the Kwr of Egypt was
2324	either a 'governor of Egypt,' or else a 'governor from Egypt' in
2325	Ethiopia, i.e. perhaps Pharaoh's wakil, and the same as the •Keer
2326	of Ethiopia:'
2327	Il. a et seqq. Possibly these Ethiopians were condemned prisoners.
2328	1.5. 'Three days and three nights? Three is a favourite number,
2329	e.g. below, 1. 14, and v. 33, &c.; I. Kh. iii. 30, 33; also in older stories
2330	both of the Middle and New Kingdoms: Pap. d'Orbiney, xiii. 5, Pap.
2331	Westcar (three sons of Ra), Pap. Harris, 500 verso (three fales).
2332	1.10. Note that all the magicians—the three Ethiopians and the
2333	Egyptian alike (v. 3)—are named Hor, Horus:
p. 74
2334	56 SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
2335	IV, 'Said they, "It is Hor, son of the Princess (P)."
2336	•Said the Viceroy (to Hor son of the Negress), "Perform this
2337	is thy feat of magic-writing. By the life of Amon the bull of
2338	Meroe, my god, if the work of thy hand succeed, I will do for
2339	thee abundance of good things"
2340	16 "Hor, the son of the Negress, made a litter of wax for four
2341	runners; he read a writing to them, he gave them breath of
2342	17 respiration (?), he made them live. He commanded them saying,
2343	"Ye shall go up to Egypt, ye shall bring Pharaoh of Egypt up
2344	to the place in which the Viceroy is, and he being beaten with
2345	18 five hundred blows of the stick in the midst before the Viceroy,
2346	ye shall take him back up to Egypt, all in six hours."
2347	19 'Said they, "Yea verily ; nor will we allow aught to fail."
2348	The sorceries of the Ethiopian proceeded up to Egypt by
2349	ao night, they seized Pharaoh Menkh-pa-Ra Si-Amon, they took
2350	him to the land of Nehes, to the placein which the Viceroy was.
2351	He was beaten with five hundred blows of the stick in the midst
2352	a1 before the Viceroy, and they returned him up to Egypt in six
2353	hours thither precisely (?).
2354	23 Now when Si-Osiri had related these things in the midst
2355	before Pharaoh and his princes, the people of Egypt hearing
2356	a3 his voice he said, 'The inspiration of Amon, thy god, is cast
2357	upon thee; the words which I am saying, are they those that
2358	are written according to the letter that is in thy hand?'
2359	24 Said the ate of Ethiopia, 'Read on as thou hast read; every
2360	word that thou sayest is truth, all!
2361	Said Si-Osiri before Pharaoh: 'When these things had
2362	as happened they returned Pharaoh Si-Amon up to Egypt, his
2363	1. 14. The carelessness of the scribe is shown again by this passage.
2364	Three Ethiopians are mentioned, but in Il. 4-8 two only of their speeches
2365	are recorded, though here a third speech is referred to, perhaps only as
2366	an after-thought. There is nothing except the sequel to show which
2367	of the three plans found favour with the Kwr; the deficiency has been
2368	supplied by the Editor between brackets.
2369	1. 15. Meroe, the capital of Ethiopia. There and elsewhere Amon
2370	was worshipped in the ram form, but his title in II Kh. would seem to
2371	imply that Amon of Meroe had also a sacred bull, though the term used
2372	may be only figurative of strength and virility.
p. 75
2373	CH. I1I] THE READING OF THE LETTER 57
2374	hinder partshaving been beaten with a very great beating. IV.
2375	He lay down in the shrine of Per-Hor, his hinder parts having
2376	been beaten exceedingly.
2377	•Came the morning of its morrow; said Pharaoh to the
2378	courtiers, " What is it that hath come upon Egypt until I am
2379	made to depart from it? Shame on the thoughts of the hearts a7
2380	of the courtiers saying, 'Belike the thought of the heart of
2381	Pharaoh hath gone.'"
2382	•Said they, "Thou art in health, thou art in health, O 28
2383	Pharaoh our great lord! Isis the great goddess will cause thy
2384	troubles to cease. What manner of words are these which thou
2385	hast spoken before [us O Pharaoh] our great lord? Thou (art) 29
2386	lying down in the shrine of Per-Hor and the gods protect thee."
2387	'Pharaoh arose, he caused the courtiers to see his back, it 3o
2388	having been beaten with a great beating exceedingly. He said, V.1
2389	"By the life of Ptah the great god, some one took me to the
2390	land of Nehes in the night, some one beat me with five hundred
2391	blows of the stick in the midst before the Viceroy. They took
2392	me back to Egypt all within the space of six hours hither."
2393	•At seeing the hinder parts of Pharaoh that they had been
2394	beaten with a great beating exceedingly, they opened their
2395	mouths with great clamour.
2396	'Now Menkh-pa-Ra Si-Amon had a librarian (?) who was 3
2397	called Hor son of Pa-neshe by name, a learned man exceed-
2398	ingly. He came to the place in which he (Pharaoh) was, he
2399	uttered a great cry saying, "My great lord, these are the +
2400	sorceries of the Ethiopians. By the life of thy......I will
2401	cause them to enter thy house of torment (?) and execution (?)."
2402	' Said to him Pharaoh, "Hasten unto me ; let me not be taken
2403	to the land of Nehes another night." 5
2404	•The librarian (?), Hor son of Pa-neshe, straightway came
2405	forth; he brought his books and his amulets to the place in
2406	which Pharaoh was. He read to him writing, he bound amulets
2407	1. 25. 'Shrine of Per-Hor.' This ' shrine' evidently was not the ordinary
2408	bed-chamber of Pharaoh. He must have fled to it for refuge from the
2409	suffering and terrors of the night.
2410	1. 26. Does Pharaoh's exclamation mean •1 am persecuted until I must
2411	run away'?
2412	1.27. "The thought of the heart of Pharaoh hath gone'; i.e., probably,
2413	'he has lost his wits.'
p. 76
2414	58 SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT.1
2415	v. 6 on him to prevent the sorceries of the Ethiopians from getting
2416	power over him.
2417	' He came out from before Pharaoh, he took with him
2418	offerings and libations, he went on board a boat, he went
2419	, straight to Khmûn. He entered the temple of Khmûn; he
2420	made his offerings and libations before Thoth, the eight times
2421	great, Lord of Khmûn, the great god ; he made prayer before
2422	8 him, saying, "Give heed to me, my lord Thoth. Let not the
2423	Ethiopians take the humiliation of Egypt to the land of Nehes.
2424	Thou art he that made (?) magic in writing, thou art he that
2425	g hanged up the heaven, that establisheth the earth, the under-
2426	world, that placeth the gods with the ...... Cause me to know
2427	how to save Pharaoh from the sorceries of the Ethiopians."
2428	IO Hor son of Pa-neshe lay down in the temple. And in
2429	that same night he dreamed a dream that the figure of the
2430	great god Thoth spake with him, saying, "Art thou Hor son of
2431	11 Pa-neshe (?), the librarian of Pharaoh Menkh-pa-Ra Si-Amon?
2432	When the morning of to-morrow hath come, go into the library
2433	of the temple of Khmûn. Thou shalt find (there) a shrine •
2434	12 closed and sealed : open it. Thou shalt find a box in the
2435	shrine named, and in it a roll of papyrus written with mine
2436	13 own hand. Bring it up, take a copy thereof, and let it rest in
2437	its place again. The Book of Magic is its name; it made
2438	14 protection for me from the enemies, and this it is that shall
2439	1.7. Khmûn (Khemen-nw) meant " the eighth' city, i.e. the eighth in
2440	Upper Egypt going up the river. See P. S. B. A., 1899, p. 279.
2441	"Thoth, eight times great'; the remains of the signs indicate this
2442	reading. The title which here appears for the first time in Egyptian
2443	literature is the equivalent of purpéyuoros, a late epithet first used about
2444	the date of this MS. (see PIETSCHMANN, Hermes Trismegislus, pp. 34 et
2445	seqq.). eo is méyas, which we may represent algebraically by a; c (2a),
2446	a common title of Thoth in late hieroglyphic, is péyas kai uéyas on the
2447	Rosetta stone, but probably represents uéysrros, and 8 o is therefore
2448	тpopéyeттos, i.e. (гa). The famous epithet of Hermes which has
2449	puzzled commentators thus displays its mathematical formation. 6• =
2450	3 (га) would not fill the lacuna on the papyrus, nor would it give the
2451	obviously intended reference to the name of Thoth's city, 'the Eighth,' and
2452	the mythological interpretation of that name. P. S. B. A., loc. cit.
2453	1. 1o. For the prayer and dream cf. above p. 11, § 1o, and the graffiti
2454	of the Abydos oracle, published by SaycE, P. S. B. 1. x. 379.
p. 77
2455	CH.11] THE READING OF THE LETTER 59
2456	make protection to Pharaoh that it may save him from the V.
2457	sorceries of the Ethiopians."
2458	'Hor son of Pa-neshe awoke from the dream, these being
2459	the things which he had seen; he recognized that the 1g
2460	thing that had befallen was divine. He did according to every
2461	word that had been said to him in the dream, he went straight
2462	to the place in which Pharaoh was, he made for him amulets
2463	against sorceries in writing.
2464	•Came the second day. The sorceries of Hor the son of the 16
2465	Negress returned up to Egypt by night, to the place in which
2466	Pharaoh was; (but) they returned to the place in which the
2467	Viceroy was immediately, (for) they could not get power over 1?
2468	Pharaoh because of the amulets and sorceries that the librarian,
2469	Hor son of Pa-neshe, had bound (?) upon him.
2470	• Came the morning of its morrow. Pharaoh told before the 18
2471	librarian, Hor son of Pa-neshe, of everything that he had seen
2472	by night, and of how the sorceries of the Ethiopians had
2473	returned, for that they were not able to get power over him. 19
2474	•Hor son of Pa-neshe caused to be brought unto him much
2475	wax and pure, he made a litter for four bearers, he pronounced
2476	writing upon them, he gave them breath of respiration, he made 2o
2477	them live. He commanded them, saying, " Ye shall go to the
2478	land of Nehes this night; ye shall bring the Viceroy up to a1
2479	Egypt, to the place in which Pharaoh is, he shall be beaten
2480	with five hundred blows of the stick in the midst before
2481	Pharaoh, and ye shall return him to the land of Nehes again,
2482	all in six hours thither."
2483	'They said, " Yea verily, nor will we allow aught to fail."
2484	•The sorceries of Hor son of Pa-neshe travelled under (?) the
2485	clouds of heaven, they went straight to the land of Nehes by 33
2486	night. They mastered the Viceroy, they brought him up to
2487	Egypt, he was beaten with five hundred blows of the stick in
2488	the midst before Pharaoh, and they returned him to the land 24
2489	of Nehes, all in six hours thither.'
2490	These things are what Si-Osiri related in the midst before
2491	Pharaoh and his nobles, the people of Egypt hearing his voice. 25
2492	1. 22. "Under the clouds of heaven' is probably a phrase for 'high in
2493	the air.'
p. 78
2494	бо SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
2495	v. He said, 'By the inspiration of Amon thy god which is cast
2496	upon thee, O enemy of Ethiopia, the words that I am speaking,
2497	26 are they what are written in this letter?
2498	Spake the Ethiopian, his head being held toward the ground,
2499	saying, 'Read on that as thou hast read; every word that thou
2500	sayest is written in this letter.'
2501	a7 Said Si-Osiri, 'All these things having happened, they
2502	having brought back the Viceroy to the land of Nehes, all in
2503	six hours thither, they put him in his place and he lay down.
2504	28 'He arose at morn, having been beaten exceedingly with
2505	blows that had been given him up in Egypt.
2506	* * * * * *
2507	•"beat me with five hundred blows of the stick in the
2508	midst before Pharaoh of Egypt, and returned to the land of
2509	29 Nehes again."
2510	'He turned his back to the princes; they opened their
2511	mouths with great clamour. The Viceroy sent for Hor the son
2512	3o of the Negress. Said he (unto him), "May Amon, the bull
2513	of Meroe, my god, curse thee! Thou who didst go to the
2514	men of Egypt hasten to my help to see what thou shalt do
2515	3ı to save me from the hand of Hor son of Pa-neshe!"
2516	•He (Hor the son of the Negress) made his sorceries; he
2517	bound them on the Viceroy to save him from the sorceries of
2518	Hor son of Pa-neshe.
2519	•Came the night of the second day. The sorceries of Hor
2520	3a son of Pa-neshe travelled to the land of Nehes; they carried the
2521	Viceroy up to Egypt, he wasbeaten with five hundred blows of
2522	the stick in the midst before Pharaoh, he was taken back to the
2523	33 land of Nehes all in six hours thither.
2524	'It happened on this wise to the Viceroy for three days ; the
2525	sorceries of the Ethiopians were not able to save the Viceroy
2526	34 from the hand of Hor son of Pa-neshe. The Viceroy was in
2527	*** The scribe has omitted a part of the story which, on the analogy
2528	of iv. 26-v. I, must have described the condition in which the Viceroy
2529	was found by the princes of Ethiopia, and have contained the beginning
2530	of his account of what had happened.
2531	1. 30. "Thou who didst go to the men of Egypt' (to learn magic), or
2532	perhaps better " Thou (emphatic) hast gone over to the men of Egypt.'
p. 79
2533	CH. II] THE READING OF THE LETTER
2534	anguish exceedingly. He caused Hor the son of the Negress v.
2535	to be brought unto him, he said unto him, "Woe thou wicked
2536	one of Ethiopia ! Thou didst cause me to be humiliated by the
2537	hand of the men of Egypt; thou couldst not save me from 35
2538	their hands. By the life of Amon, the bull of Meroe, my god, if
2539	it be that thou shalt not be able to cause me to be saved from
2540	the aerial cars of the men of Egypt, I will cause thee to suffer 36
2541	an evil death exceedingly."
2542	'Said Hor the son of the Negress, "My master the Viceroy!
2543	let me be sent up to Egypt that I may see him that makes
2544	sorcery there, that I may strive against him, that I may cause 37
2545	him to find the scorn for his hand that is at my heart."
2546	•Hor the son of the Negress was despatched from before the
2547	Viceroy. He came to the place where his mother the Negress
2548	was. ******
2549	• "If thou goest up to Egypt to do sorcery therein, take Vl.r
2550	heed for thyself with the men of Egypt. Thou wilt not be able
2551	to contend with them. Be not caught in their hands so that
2552	thou wilt not return to the land of Nehes for ever."
2553	' Said he, "There is nought of them, these things that thou
2554	sayest. I cannot avoid going up to Egypt and (instead) cast
2555	my sorceries up into it (from Ethiopia)."
2556	• Said to him the Negress his mother, "Whereas it hath come 3
2557	to pass that thou art going up to Egypt, set some signs between
2558	me and thee: be it that thou failest, I will come to thee that
2559	I may see whether I shall be able to save thee." 4
2560	•Said he to her, "If it be that I am overcome, when thou
2561	shalt drink [and eat], any kind of (?) liquid shall turn colour
2562	I. 35. "Aerial cars." The demotic word is the same as that used for the
2563	barks in which the sun (Ra) and the other gods (as stars ?) were sup-
2564	posed to traverse the sky.
2565	***There musthave been a great omission from the copy at the
2566	end of p. v: probably the scribe dropped a section terminating with
2567	"m-f'in it,' and began again in the middle of a speech of the Negress.
2568	It would indeed give a picturesque effect of quick action 10 break off
2569	the narration suddenly and resume with the speech; such a device is not
2570	unknown to Arab story-tellers of to-day. Butthis explanation could
2571	hardly be applied to the parallelcasein v. 28,and we must regard botk
2572	as mere blunders.
p. 80
2573	62 SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS LPT. 1
2574	vI. of blood before thee, the foods that are before thee shall turn
2575	s the colour of flesh (?), the heaven shall turn the colour of blood
2576	before thee."
2577	'Hor the son of the Negress set signs between himself and his
2578	mother. He went up to Egypt, being crammed with sorcery ; he
2579	6 traversed (?) from that which Amon made (?) as far as Memphis,
2580	to the place in which Pharaoh was, hunting for him who was
2581	making sorcery in Egypt.
2582	7 'He came to the court before Pharaoh, he spake, his voice
2583	being loud, saying, "Ho thou that makest sorcery against me in
2584	the court in the place in which Pharaoh is, in the sight of the
2585	people of Egypt! ye two scribes of the House of Life, (or) thou
2586	8 scribe of the House of Life that doest sorcery unto the Viceroy,
2587	bringing him up to Egypt in spite of me!"
2588	• As he spake these words Hor son of Pa-neshe stood in the
2589	9 court before Pharaoh saying, "Ho thou impious Ethiopian, art
2590	thou not Hor the son of the Negress whom I saved in the
2591	10 reeds (?) of Ra, as well as thy companion of Ethiopia that was
2592	with thee, when ye were drowning in the water, being cast down
2593	from upon the hill on the east of On? Didst thou not consider
2594	i the freeing (?) of Pharaoh thy sovereign, thou causing his hinder
2595	parts to be beaten in the place where the Viceroy was, thou
2596	coming up to Egypt saying, Is there he that doeth sorcery
2597	ia against me?' By the life of Atum, lord of On, the gods of
2598	Egypt have put thee on thy back (?) to requite thee in their
2599	13 country ! Entertain thyself (?); I have (?) come unto thee."
2600	• At what time Hor the son of Pa-neshe said these words,
2601	1. 6. "That which Amon made'; cf. iv. 3. Ethiopia (together perhaps
2602	with the Thebaid) seems to be considered the domain of Amon.
2603	1. g. 'Whom I saved (?) out of the reeds' or '(by hiding him) in the
2604	reeds' One need hardly illustrate this by a reference to the episode in
2605	the babyhood of Moses, the great magician of the Hebrews. The
2606	following description of a contest between magicians, dating from the
2607	first century, reminds us that in 2 Tim. ii. 8-9 (Jannes and Jambres),
2608	the writer may refer to some similar detailed story of Moses, current
2609	among the Jews at this very time.
2610	1. 1o. The hill must be Gebel Ahmar, the 'Red Mountain' of the
2611	Egyptians, near the edge of the desert, south-east of Heliopolis. Its name
2612	is due to the hard red quartzite rock of which it is composed, and it has
2613	always been an important quarry—in ancient days for the sculptor, now
2614	only for mill-stones. It is referred to in the 'Gnostic' magical papyri
2615	as the 'hill of On'
p. 81
2616	CH. M]- THE READING OF THE LETTER
2617	Hor the son of the Negress answered him saying, "Is it he to VI.
2618	whom I taught jackal language(?) that doeth sorcery against me?"
2619	•The man of Ethiopia made an effort of written magic, he
2620	caused fire to come out in the court. Pharaoh and the princes 14
2621	of Egypt uttered a great cry, saying, "Hasten to us thou
2622	librarian, Hor son of Pa-neshe."
2623	'Hor son of Pa-neshe made a formula of writing, he caused 15
2624	the sky to make a southern (?) rain upon the top of the flame:
2625	it was extinguished on the instant.
2626	•The Ethiopian made another effort of magic in writing, he 16
2627	made a great darkness (?) over the court, none saw his brother
2628	nor his companion.
2629	•Hor son of Pa-neshe read a writing to the sky, he caused it ry
2630	to desist and to be calm from the evil wind which possessed it.
2631	•Hor the son of the Negress made another effort of written
2632	magic. He created a great vault of stone 200 cubits in length 1s
2633	by fifty cubits. in width above Pharaoh and his princes, which
2634	threatened to make Egypt without a king, the world without
2635	a sovereign.
2636	• Pharaoh looked at the sky, he saw the vault of stone above 19
2637	him, he opened his mouth with a great cry together with the
2638	people that were in the court. Hor the son of Pa-neshe pro-20
2639	nounced a formula of writing. He created an aerial boat of
2640	papyrus, he caused it to carry away the vault of stone. Behold!
2641	it flew with it towards (?) the Mighty Pool, the Great Water of
2642	Egypt. (Then) the man of Ethiopia knew that he was not able a
2643	to contend with (the Egyptian); he made an effort in written
2644	magic to prevent his seeing him in the court, that he might
2645	transport himself to the land of Nehes, his city. 22
2646	1. 13. The jackal (C. aureus), not the fox of Anubis (apparently
2647	C. milolicus), is the animal here referred to, if one may judge from the
2648	use of the name by the early Egyptians. 'Jackal language" would seem
2649	here to be an expression for magic of an inferior sort.
2650	1.15. 'Southern rain': probably referring to the rains of Abyssinia,
2651	or to the occasional storms that visit Upper Egypl.
2652	1.18. Or'Egypt, the land without a superior, to lose its king!'
2653	1. 20. 'The Mighty Pool' is one name of the lake in the Faiyam, Lake
2654	Moeris; v. BR., Dicl. Géog. 769.
2655	1.22. "The land of Nches' seems used as another name for Meroe, the
2656	capital of the country. See also 1. 32.
p. 82
2657	64 SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS LPT. I
2658	vI. "Hor son of Pa-neshe pronounced a writing at him, he caused
2659	the sorcerics of the Ethiopian to be revealed, he made him
2660	a3 visible to Pharaoh and the people of Egypt that were standing
2661	in the court, he being in the form of an evil fox-goose and about
2662	to flee away. Hor son of Pa-neshe pronounced a writing at him,
2663	24 he caused him to fall on his back (?), a fowler standing over him,
2664	the knife in his hand ready to pierce, he being about to do
2665	abomination unto it.
2666	• All these things having happened, the signs which Hor the
2667	a5 son of the Negress had set between himself and his mother
2668	happened before her—all. She delayed not to go up to Egypt
2669	she being in the form of the female goose; she stopped over
2670	a6 the palace of Pharaoh, she wailing with her voice unto her
2671	son, he being in the form of an evil fox-goose, the fowler
2672	standing over him.
2673	•Hor son of Pa-neshe looked at the sky, he saw the Negress
2674	27 in the guise in which she was, he knew her to be the Negress,
2675	the Ethiopian. He pronounced a writing to her, he caused her
2676	to fall on her back, there being a fowler standing over her, his
2677	28 knife being about to put her to death.
2678	•She changed from the form in which she was, she made her
2679	(proper) guise as an Ethiopian woman, she praying, saying,
2680	29 " Make not an end (?) of us, Hor son of Pa-neshe. Forgive us
2681	this evil attempt. If it be that thou givest to us an aerial boat
2682	we will not return to Egypt ever again."
2683	• Hor son of Pa-neshe made an oath by Pharaoh and the gods
2684	30 of Egypt saying, "I will not [let go ?] my effort of sorcery until
2685	ye have made to me oath not to return up to Egypt for any
2686	kind of purpose (P)."
2687	31 "The Negress raised her hand (in oath) not to come up to
2688	Egypt for ever eternally. Hor the son of the Negress made
2689	oath saying, "I will not come up to Egypt until fifteen hundred
2690	years."
2691	32 'Hor son of Pa-neshe withdrew his hand from his feat of
2692	written magic, he gave an aerial boat to Hor the son of the
2693	1. 23. 'Evil" The fox goose, or Egyptian goose (Chenalopex aegypliaca),
2694	may have had this epithet owing to its rusty colour, which would certainly
2695	offend the prejudices of the Egyptians. See Hieroglyphs, p. 3r.
p. 83
2696	CH. I1I] SI-OSIRI VANISHES
2697	Negress and the Negress his mother. They proceeded to the vI.
2698	land of Nehes, their city'
2699	This was the story told by Si-Osiri before Pharaoh, the 33
2700	people of Egypt attending to his voice, Setme his father seeing
2701	everything, the head of the man of Ethiopia being held towards
2702	the ground. And he said, 'By the life of thy face, my great lord, 34
2703	that man that standeth before thee is Hor the son of the
2704	Negress whose words I have been relating and who hath not
2705	repented concerning those things which he did at first; for he
2706	hath come up to Egypt at the end of fifteen hundred years to 35
2707	cast sorceries therein. By the life of Osiris, great god Lord of
2708	Amenti, in whose kingdom I repose, 1 am Hor son of Pa-neshe—
2709	this man-I who stand before Pharaoh; and I that was (?) 36
2710	in Amenti found that the Ethiopian enemy would fling his
2711	sorceries up into Egypt, there being no good scribe or learned
2712	man in Egypt at the time that would be able to contend with
2713	him. I prayed before Osiris in Amenti to let me come forth to VII. r
2714	the world again, to prevent his taking the humiliation of Egypt
2715	to the land of Nehes. It was commanded before Osiris to let a
2716	me forth into the world. I awoke, I flew right up (P) to find
2717	Setme the son of Pharaoh upon the gebel of On and the gebel of
2718	Memphis. I grew as that melon-vine with the intent of return- 3
2719	ing to the body again that I might be born to the world to
2720	make sorcery against this enemy of Ethiopia that stands in the
2721	court.'
2722	Hor son of Pa-neshe, he being in the shape of Si-Osiri, made 4
2723	an effort of written magic against the man of Ethiopia. He
2724	caused the fire to surround him, it consumed him in the midst
2725	of the court, Pharaoh beholding him with the nobles and the 3
2726	people of Egypt.
2727	(But) Si-Osiri passed away as a shade out from the hand of
2728	Pharaoh and Setme his father, nor did they see him.
2729	Pharaoh and his great men marvelled exceedingly at the 6
2730	things they saw upon the court, saying, 'There is not a good
2731	1. 2. "The gebel,' i.e. the necropolis in the desert. In this story also
2732	Khamuas was apparently represented as frequenting the cemeteries in
2733	search of writings: cf. 1 Kh. ili. 9.
2734	I. 3. "That melon-vine,' see i. 1. 3.
2735	GRIPPITH. F
p. 84
2736	66 SECOND TALE OF KHAMUAS [PT. I
2737	VII.y scribe and learned man like Hor son of Pa-neshe, there will not
2738	be his like after him again, ever.'
2739	Setme opened his mouth with a great cry when Si-Osiri had
2740	passed away as a shade, he not having seen him.
2741	8 Pharaoh rose from the court in trouble of heart at these
2742	things that he had seen. Pharaoh commanded that preparation
2743	9 should be made for Setme, to lodge him, because of Si-Osiri his
2744	son, to refresh his heart.
2745	Came evening, Setme went to his apartments, his heart being
2746	1o sad exceedingly. Meh-wesekht lay at his side, she conceived
2747	seed of him in the night named. In due time she bore a male
2748	child, he was called by name Usy-ment-Hor (?).
2749	I1 It came to pass that Setme ceased not from making (?) burnt
2750	offerings and libations before the genius of Hor son of Pa-neshe
2751	on every occasion.
2752	This is the end of this book, written .• •• (blank).
2753	1. 1o. With Usy-ment-(Hor?), cf. the name of the great king Oovuandvas
2754	in DIoDoRus i. 47. The classical historians drew their information about
2755	Egypt from the popular extravagant tales, and so in turn reflect light' on
2756	the demotic stories.
2757	1. I1. 'Genius,' shay, see note on ili. 28. It may be doubted whether
2758	it would be in accord with Egyptian notions, even of a later date, to
2759	translate 'made sacrifice before the Deity for Hor son of Pa-neshe'
2760	The Egyptian ka, symbolized by the human arms, appears to mean the
2761	' working' life principle, informing the body and directed by the soul or
2762	will, ba (Hieroglyphs, p.15). As demotic replaces the obsolete word ka
2763	by that for 'ordainer, "fate,' shay, the conception of it had probably
2764	changed in some degree, so as to include perhaps all that was immortal
2765	in the man. But the connexion between ka, 'vital principle, 'energy,'
2766	and sha, 'fate,' may have been close even in high antiquity.
p. 85
2767	PART II
2768	PHILOLOGICAL
2769	CHAPTER IV
2770	INTRODUCTORY
2771	§ r. Description of the papyri. § 2. Bibliography. § 3. Method of
2772	transliteration. § 4. Language, spelling, and pronunciation of the texts.
2773	§ 5. Specimen of a phonetic rendering. § 6. Hints for studying demotic.
2774	§ 7. List of abbreviations used in the references.
2775	§ I. THe papyrus on which the first tale is written
2776	now measures 41 in. = 1•04 m. in length by 11f in.=
2777	29:5 cm. in breadth. The part lost at the beginning
2778	contained two whole pages and part of the third page,
2779	in all amounting probably to a length of about 24 in.
2780	or 60 cm. The MS. was purchased by Mariette for the
2781	Boulaq Museum in or before the year 1865, along with
2782	two late hieratic and several Coptic papyri. They were
2783	said to have been found together in a Christian tomb
2784	at Thebes, and the statement is given by Mariette for
2785	what it is worth!.
2786	The second tale of Khamuas is written on the verso of
2787	two Greek documents, which have been joined together
2788	into a single roll for the purpose of receiving the
2789	' MARIRTTE, Pap. de Boulag, tome i, p.g, No. 5.
2790	F 2
p. 86
2791	68 DEMOTIC PHILOLOGY [PT. I1
2792	demotic text (Pap. DCIv. in the Department of MSS.
2793	in the British Museum). It is imperfect at one end,
2794	an uncertain amount having been torn away from the
2795	beginning of the verso, which is the end of the recto.
2796	Mr. Kenyon informs me that the Greek texts on the
2797	recto' contain official registers of land dated in the
2798	seventh year of the Emperor Claudius (A.D. 46-47), and
2799	relate to the neighbourhood of 'Crocodilopolis.' As
2800	the papyrus was purchased at Aswân (in 1895) it is
2801	presumably from the upper country, and 'Crocodilopolis'
2802	must be the city of that name near Gebelên, rather
2803	than Arsinoe in the Faiyûm, which indeed is never
2804	called Crocodilopolis after the middle of the Ptolemaic
2805	period.
2806	§ 2. The story in the British Museum is here edited
2807	for the first time; but the Boulaq roll was put into
2808	the hands of Heinrich Brugsch as long ago as 1865,
2809	and in September, 1867, he printed his famous trans-
2810	lation?. The text has been facsimiled in MARIETTE,
2811	Les Papyrus Egyptiens du Musée de Boulag, tome i,
2812	Pl. 29-32, and more recently by KrALL in his Demotische
2813	Lesestücke. The latter copy is very clear, but not so
2814	accurate as the former, which is of extraordinary exacti-
2815	tude. It was made in 1870 by Émile Brugsch, the
2816	present curator of the Gizeh Museum, and in it
2817	the minute and delicate writing is mechanically repro-
2818	duced with marvellous skill.
2819	Editions of the text with translation and commentary
2820	were issued by REVILLOUT, Le Roman de Setna, 1877-
2821	1880, and by Hess, Der demotische Roman von Stne
2822	Ha-m-us, 1888. The former, though giving some new
2823	" The verso also shows some remains of Greek writing which have
2824	escaped the sponge of the cleaner. They are visible in the photograph
2825	of the sixth page, at the end of 1l. II, 12, and 15.
2826	" Rev. Arch., IIme Série, tome xvi, pp. 161-179.
p. 87
2827	CH. IV] TRANSLITERATION
2828	light, especially from Coptic analogies, shows no inde-
2829	pendent understanding of the script; also the text is
2830	very incorrect, and the reading is not at the level of
2831	Brugsch's first translation. The edition of Hess, which
2832	has a glossary at the end, represents Brugsch's reading
2833	with many improvements by his pupil, the author, and
2834	is very valuable; its text, however, which is from the
2835	master's hand-copy, contains some serious errors that
2836	can be detected by the aid of the facsimile. Another
2837	translation is by Maspero', who in 1877-1880 attempted
2838	the difficult task of rendering a page of the story in
2839	hieroglyphs. The present edition of the tale will be
2840	found to contain many rectifications of my own earlier
2841	version printed in America.
2842	§ 3. The method of transliteration for demotic adopted
2843	in this volume is explained in P.S.B.A. 1899, pp. 273-
2844	2763 The alphabet is e, y, w,', s, b, p, f, m, n, r, 1, h, h,
2845	h, s, š, k, g, q, t, 0, z. In such words as mhwet, &c.,
2846	the dot marks off the flexional consonant, while a
2847	hyphen is placed between compounded words and
2848	before suffixes: Pr-t, stm-f. Italicized letters are those
2849	which in Coptic are much modifed or entirely lost,
2850	y = є, rmt=pweee; and superfluous letters which have
2851	been added by false analogy are generally placed
2852	between (), e.g. wn(n'y)=nte. This transliteration is
2853	of necessity very conventional and does not aim at
2854	uniformity, but rather at facilitating the reading of
2855	a difficult script ; it is, I hope, sufficiently intelligible
2856	to all hieroglyphic students. In the transliteration of
2857	His latestversion, with a full bibliography, is in Conles Populaires
2858	de I Egyple Ancicnne, and ed., 1889, pp. 163 et segg.
2859	In the Egyptian section of The World'sBest Lileralure, New York,
2860	1898, pp. 5362 et seqq.
2861	" For y I have since substituted • as the equivalent of \|, and generally
2862	of Eg. i (false y) at the beginning of words. I also now write 1 kh.,
2863	I1 Kh., instead of 1 S., 11 S., in referring to the two storics.
p. 88
2864	70 DEMOTIC PHILOLOGY [PT. II
2865	II Kh. the is omitted, except where it is of special
2866	importance, as at the beginning of a word'.
2867	§ 4. The language of these stories may be said to lie
2868	about half way between New Egyptian and Coptic, thé
2869	differences from each being considerable. The second
2870	story having been written not earlier than the middle
2871	of the first century A.D., at the utmost only four centuries
2872	before the Coptic translations of the Bible, it is curious
2873	to find that linguistically it is related about as closely to
2874	New Egyptian of the twelfth century B.C. as to the
2875	Biblical Coptic of the fourth or fifth century A.D. The
2876	fact is that though progress towards Coptic is observable
2877	in late demotic, it was hopelessly fettered by the writing
2878	and traditions of the pagan scribes. The Christians,
2879	on the other hand, starting with a simple alphabet
2880	based upon the Greek, cast aside the old conventions
2881	which were due largely to the clumsy spelling of
2882	demotic. When freed from these trammels, the written
2883	language came abreast of the living language at a
2884	single bound, and rendered the speech of the people
2885	so faithfully as to distinguish clearly between no less
2886	than four dialects.
2887	Demotic was a conventional mode of literary expres-
2888	sion, and in one important detail it seems to be actually
2889	less advanced than New Egyptian, namely, in its abun-
2890	dant use of the narrative tense stm-f (for sam-n-f)?.
2891	This was probably an artificial reversion to the old style
2892	in order to avoid troublesome periphrases, rather than
2893	a real development on the old lines.
2894	Multitudes of words occur in demotic that have never
2895	yet been found in Coptic; on the other hand, words
2896	" The philological notes added to the transliteration are confined to
2897	what seem most necessary. Further illustration is reserved for the
2898	glossary, and it is proposed to print some notes on words and con-
2899	structions in the Proceedings of the Sociely of Biblical Archaeology.
2900	3 Cf. SETHE, Verbum ii, § 153•
p. 89
2901	CH. IV] RELATION TO COPTIC 71
2902	alphabetically spelled in their Coptic forms, and differing
2903	completely from the Egyptian forms of the same, are
2904	very numerous in late demotic. Many of the common
2905	verbal forms of demotic are obsolete in Coptic; many
2906	others agree with the Coptic precisely, when allowance
2907	has been made for the degeneration of the written con-
2908	sonants. Transliterated according to the analogy of
2909	New Egyptian writing, the demotic negative perfect may
2910	give bw-pw-f stm, but this is really the precise equivalent
2911	of enуcwтєм; so also ty šm-w is apparently the
2912	equivalent of x00%, and ly nsy-w of Tenroos.
2913	The spelling of words is often entirely regardless of
2914	their etymology, largely owing to false traditions dating
2915	as far back as New Egyptian. But in a careless late
2916	text such as Il Kh. the confusion is very great, two
2917	spellings of one word often occurring side by side, of
2918	which one is more or less etymological, while in the
2919	other the origin of the word is wholly lost sight of.
2920	Thus eTe, 'which it is,' is often rendered properly nt e,
2921	but also m te (II Kh. iv. 20). Again eeneg, 'he did
2922	not, usually b-p-f, is once spelled as if it were the homo-
2923	phonous eeneg, 'of his' (vi. 34). So also in the
2924	Historical Romance of Vienna ueee&g, 'in the pre-
2925	sence of,' is sometimes spelled correctly m-bh, 'in front
2926	of'; at other times mh, as if it were from eeorg, "fill,'
2927	by the false analogy of ordinal numbers, мuesg B,
2928	"second,' being correctly spelled in demotic as mh II.
2929	§ 5. The old Coptic magical texts transcribed in Greek
2930	characters, and others in later Coptic writing, preserve
2931	several usages of demotic that are generally obsolete,
2932	but very great differences remain both in grammar and
2933	vocabulary between the most lively forms of demotic'
2934	'e.g. the Gnostic magical papyri, or some of the latest inscriptions
2935	of Philae. Certain religious texts are litile more than transcripts of
2936	Old Egyptian in demotic spelling.
p. 90
2937	72 DEMOTIC PHILOLOGY [PT. II
2938	and any patchwork of archaisms that one might construct
2939	to compare with it from Coptic dialects.
2940	Endeavouring to recover the actual pronunciation of
2941	demotic is, however, a very interesting branch of
2942	Egyptological research. Here Coptic is of the greatest
2943	assistance. The admirable study of Sethe on the
2944	Egyptian verb, as well as the penetrating remarks of
2945	Erman and Steindorff in their Grammars and scattered
2946	articles, throw much light on the pronunciation of
2947	Egyptian generally; and altogether we now seem to
2948	be in possession of means whereby the greater part
2949	of demotic sentences may be rendered approximately
2950	according to the original sound. Much more will
2951	doubtless be done when the full bearing of Greek
2952	transcriptions, of the scanty remains of archaic pagan
2953	Coptic, and of the evidence of all the Coptic dialects,
2954	has been studied in regard to demotic in particular.
2955	§ 5. The following rough attempt to transcribe
2956	phonetically the first page of the first story will give at
2957	least a general idea of the sounds of the words. In
2958	the main I have followed Sahidic for the vowels, but
2959	I have preserved the h as in Achmimic (corresponding
2960	to S. and B. cy), and have borrowed freely from Boheiric
2961	wherever that seemed helpful to the rendering, the
2962	original consonants k, g, 0, z are also retained in place of
2963	o and x. By variations of spelling 1 have aimed at
2964	suggesting probabilities or doubts!
2965	Пl. r. ' ••••ntok pet howš eroy (?): e-f hôpe (?) e
2966	mn ntey šêre nsa šere snaw, an phap themse wa'y nem
2967	1. 1. e-f hope EcyWПe: Eсусп. The Boh. form is still followed by
2968	attributive € (St., § 626).
2969	' Words of which the pronunciation is very uncertain, or which are
2970	left in simple transliteration, are preceded by ®.
p. 91
2971	CH. IV] PHONETIC RENDERING 73
2972	wa'y mmow? eye thmse NenfrekePtah nem t. šere
2973	n u lemeše,
2974	2. eye themse Ah.] nem pšêre n ke lemerše .
2975	hpof (?) etenomhwe efašay (?)' •hpe pnaw, semnew
2976	thrwte mmah Pero (?). se'êw nsôy, Oyow tl (lowt?)
2977	et hrwte
2978	. 3. nrens . bpof ehtêy] tahr emašo, entl oy (ire)
2979	mpaginsaf an. zo nay Pero 'Ah., an nto or (?) tawow
2980	nay n ney metleh (?) ze "mathemsoy nem
2981	4. Nen. pasen]o ?"' zoy naf 'mahemsoy nem pšêre n
2982	ulemerše, mahemsof nem tšeere nkelemêtse hôf; bpof
2983	etenomhwe eašay (?)' • sebyoy, sebye Pero
2984	1.2. For the vocalization of sim-f, which is the principal verbal form in
2985	demotic narrative, we depend almost entirely on the analogy of the
2986	causatives in Coptic, formed of stm-f dependent on ty. See SETHE,
2987	Verbum, II, § 207 et segg. It would seem that pronouns and suffixes
2988	did not affect the final o; cf. for the subject suffix, opoy, ist sing.
2989	epos, ard pl. epoox from epo. Further T-EnПo-08-cE ly
2990	nºy-ze(+ stl), X0-07-CE ly šm-ze( + stl), (cf. I Kh. i. 12; II Kh. ili. 25)
2991	seem to imply that the object pronoun added lo the subject suffix did
2992	not alter the vowel; but, being late formations on false analogy, neither
2993	of these verbs is a very good witness. On the other hand, a nominal
2994	subject shortens the vowel, witness ope-, T&erece-, &c., &c., and so
2995	does a direct object—nominal or infinitive—following the subject suffix
2996	ореу-сштєм, ореу-, ist sing. ops-, 3rd рl. ореч.: трот-,
2997	also Sah. TOTItOT- (for which last see SETHE, addendum to § 247 on
2998	p. 461).
2999	Thus we obtain the following table :-selmof, 'he heard': selmof
3000	ephrow, 'he heard the voice': selmofse, 'he heard them'; but selme pnúle,
3001	"god heard': selmef psasi, 'he heard the tale." In the remaining case
3002	selmose (selmese?) pnúle, 'god heard them,' the vowel is uncertain.
3003	It is of course possible that these particular modifications of the vowels
3004	date only from a very late period, when demotic was nearly extinct:
3005	and moreover slm-f, when it replaces sim-n-f, may have a vocalization
3006	distinct from other cases.
3007	Pero. It is difficult to say whether Pero or Ero (ЄPO) should be
3008	read. Old Copt. Par. transcribes p' Pr-e in Gnostic by ПЄpo alone
3009	(HEss, p. 82; cf. STEINDORFF, A. Z.., 188g,107).
3010	1.3. or. So in the Greck transcripts of proper names, but the true
3011	pronunciation was perhaps with some other short vowel.
p. 92
3012	74 DEMOTIC PHILOLOGY [PT. II
3013	5........ ze] Pero ' plepis (?), madew Ah. epêy
3014	n Nen. mpgorh, malyew entnib etnanow nemas têrw'
3015	Oyow ti (?) nhime epêy n Nen.
3016	6..... te Pero] now nay šap (?) n hat nub: te
3017	napi-Pero enw nay têrw. re Nen. how nûfe nemay.
3018	špef he'n (?) napi-Pero têrw . qtof nemay mpgôrh
3019	nrenf.af ginti (?)
3020	7....... ne]may 'on 'on . re rôme mere pefere
3021	mmon . bpe pa susu (?) n erhosm, empi erhosm 'on : rew
3022	Cansemme mmos emmah Pero, nenfre htêf emašo. te
3023	Pero Oyow enka 'ašay (?)
3024	8. nahray tey hot]e, tef 'now nay šap (?) n hat nub
3025	šens enanuw emašo. hpe pa susu mmise mesyey pey
3026	hemhal et nahrak, et ewzô naf •Mr-êb n ran. tew sahf
3027	n še m (?) P-anh
3028	9. hpof e mn nte Nen.] pa son yope hi pto, nsa
3029	mo'še hi t ohse m Membe, ef 'ôš nneshay (?) et hen
3030	n °hô(?)n mPero (?), nem nwite nnsah P-onh, nem
3031	nshay (?) ethi
3032	I0........ etbe shay emašo. nsa nay bpe uha'
3033	esPtah. še Nen. hn hene'te ewošte. bpof ef moše nsa
3034	pha efôš n neshay et hi n og' n nentêr.
3035	Il. gmes uwêsb ef aye (?) m]misi erof: sebyof. zo
3036	naf Nen. 'erek (ek ?) sôbe (kcwße) etbe ah?'. zof 'nti
3037	sôbe mmok an; arisôbe, hôpe (bpo ?) ek (erek) ôš n
3038	han shay emnnte
3039	12. rome mpto . ... ef hôpe] ek (erek) wôh eš
3040	shay, amu nay, tey Oyowtk (Oyowk?) epma ete pey
3041	zo'me mmof, e Thôwt por (?) shef (sehf?) ntot-f hôf,
3042	ef na'y ehrey n sa nentêr. hp snaw n shay nethiôtf,
3043	erek
3044	13. eš phap n horp (?) ereke] pehre tpe pto ttê ntuyê
3045	1.5. lepis (?). sin at the end of a compound word seems generally
3046	reduced to s, see note to cyntc in l. 8 below, p. 8g.
p. 93
3047	CH. IV] PHONETIC RENDERING 75
3048	namayu, erekegem nete n'ôpt ntpe nem nzatfe ezotw
3049	têrw, erekenaw e nrami mpemto ewn
3050	14. naš n nute wêh mmow n tew r (?)] hray (?):
3051	erek 'eš phap mmah snaw, ef hope (?) erek hn Amente
3052	erek mpekgay hi pto (ginhipto?) 'on, ereke naw epRês
3053	ef oh' ntpe nem tef op' ntêr nem poh [m]pef gy n owbn'
3054	15. 20 naf Nen.] 'ostn-anhof! (shof?) mazow nay
3055	umetnofre (?) erek wahs, tey rows nak, ntak (nek)
3056	hoby epma ete pey zo'me mmof'. ze pwêb n Nen. 'ef
3057	hôpe [erek] wôh hobk
3058	I6. epma ete pei zo'me mmo]f, erek e ti nay hat
3059	otbn še ûbe ta gayse, erek e trow nay.... snaw n wêb
3060	at otne'. 'âše Nen. e uhal, tef tew phat še mpwêb, tef
3061	whe n le.:..(?) snaw, tef rowse
3062	17......... ze pwêb n] Nen. 'p zo'me nrenf
3063	ef (g ?) ntmête mpyom n Qebtô hen u têbe mbenipe,
3064	e ttêbe mbenipe hen utêbe
3065	18. n homt e ttêbe n homt] hen u têbe n hen°gty
3066	e ttêbe n hen°gty hen u têbe n yeb (?) ohbyn ettêbe
3067	n yeb ohbyn hen u
3068	19. têbe n hat e ttêbe] n hat hen u têbe n nub e
3069	pzo'me huns (?): ewn (ewen) uor n hof wo'he zatfe
3070	nib mpgôte enttêbe ete p zo'me huns (?) ewn
3071	20. u hof nºze mpqôte]n ttêbe nrens'. tewnu n saze
3072	ea (?) pwêb nahre n Nen., mpef gem ma nib mpto etef
3073	emmof. ef (g) 'êw ebol hen heneete, sezyof
3074	21. nahray n mute (?) nib are (?) hôpe mmof] têrw:
3075	zof nay 'eyeše e Qebtô, eye em pei zô'me, [empi]hrur
3076	epemhit 'on' • hpof eykô (kê?) 'on mpwêb ze 'hra (?)
3077	nak Amun ehak (?) saze nahraf ney
3078	22..... ohe 'nok nay pemlah• ptoš n Nê (?)
3079	gemyoys .. .' srey 'a(n)tot nem Nen. e tem tšof e
3080	Qebtô . [mpe]f sôtem nay . šof mmah
3081	1. 15. hoby (?), Coptic "goBT.
p. 94
3082	DEMOTIC PHILOLOGY [PT. I1
3083	23. Per'o sezyof mmah] Per'o n mute nim eza naf
3084	pwe'b têrw . zo naf Per'o 'ab pet[ekwôh mmof]?' zof
3085	naf 'matow ney toshre Per'o nem pes sobte . [elye 0i
3086	Ah.
3087	24. nem M. pes he]mhal e rês (?) nemay, eye mpey
3088	zo'me, empi hrur' • tow naf toshre Pero nem pes sobte,
3089	alon emêr eros, 'ren sgêr, phon
3090	25. e Qebtô . rew 'ansemme] mmos nahren nweb n
3091	Ese n Qebtô, plašane (?) n Ese: se'ew ehray ehêtn,
3092	mpu hrur ethê n Nen., new hyome 'ew ehray ehêt hổ.
3093	26. 'alyon ehray n negrôw, šon hen] hene'te n Ese
3094	Harpehrat. te Nen. now ehe ôpt êrp, ref glil wôten
3095	mmah Ese n Qebtô Harpehrat . Oowtn (0own?) e uêi
3096	enanef emašo
3097	27.. ..... re Nen. hôw ftow ef er how nûfe nem
3098	nwe'b n Ése n Qebtô e ne hyome n nweb n Êse er
3099	how nûfe nemay hổ.hpe towe mpen how (m)mah
3100	snaw, te Nen.
3101	28. new mulh efoš ef]wa'b nahraf, ref u orms efmêh
3102	nnef ohny nem nef hwêt (?): Cašef shay erow tef canhow
3103	tof naw (now) têw, hwof (?) se epyom; mhef toshre
3104	Pero nšô
3105	29. ...... a]lof e mêr . hemsoy hi ze mpyom n
3106	Qebtô hô ze 'eye gem petefe hôpe mmof! zof 'n
3107	ohny hnos (?) haroy ša' pma ete pei zôme
3108	30. mmof. hnows harof ngôrh] n°gty mere. af (?) pôh
3109	erof n how homt, hewyef (?) šô hêtí, hpe u weš n yor.
3110	af (?) gem u or n hof wohe zatfe nim empqôte
3111	31. emppêy (?) ete pzo'me] hunf (?): af (?) gem u hof
3112	n oze mpgôte nttebe n rens 'ašef shay e por n hof
3113	wo'he zatfe nim etempqôte enttêbe. mpef te pyow
3114	32. šof (?) e p ma ete p hojf noze mmof ref qonqen
3115	nemaf, hetbofs 'anhof: ref pef gay (?) on. ref gonqen
3116	nemaf 'on emah sopsnaw, hetbofs 'anhof 'on. ref
3117	33. gongen nemaf 'on emeh sop] homt, rofs n š'te
p. 95
3118	CH. IV] PHONETIC RENDERING 77
3119	sente tef šo 'ute oğte nem tesere. mwof (?) mpef er
3120	pef gay (?) e ošwe. še Nen. epma ete ttêbe mmof,
3121	34. gmofs utêbe m]benipe te . wnof eros, gmef utêbe
3122	n homt: wnof eros, gmef utêbe n hen°gte: wnof eros
3123	gmef utêbe n yeb ohbyn:
3124	35. wnof eros gmef u têbe nJhat: wnof eros gmef
3125	u têbe n nub: wnof eros gmef p zô'me huns (?). 'nef p
3126	zô'me ehray hen ttêbe n nub 'ašef u hap n shay mmof,
3127	36. pehref tpe pto ttêy n] tuye namayu, gmef nete
3128	nôpt ntpe nem nrami mpemto n oy mptow zô mmow
3129	terw. a'šef kehap n shay, nwof (?)
3130	37. e pRês ef ha'y (?) n tpe nem tef op' ntêr], nem
3131	p'oh ef won nem n siw mpew gay: nwof (?) e nrami
3132	mpemto ewn naš nuti wêh mmow hizow. a'šef shay e p
3133	38. mow tef ref pef gy 'on . 'alof e mjêr, zof nnohny
3134	'henyo haroy ša' p ma et...... ' hanyow (?) harof
3135	ngôrh onqty mere. af pôh epma etey
3136	39. mmof, gmof t(y ?)ey hmo's] hize n pyom n Qebtô,
3137	empi sô wôm, empi er mûte nim mpto, ey nsmot n
3138	rôme e phof e Pinufe (?) . zoy n Nen.
3139	40. '...... m]anwoy e pei zô'me ešpen ney ohyyt
3140	saoy etbêtf'. tef pzô'me nto't, 'ašey u hap n shay mmof,
3141	pehrey
3142	41. tpe
3143	§ 6. A few words may perhaps be allowed as to the
3144	course to pursue in commencing the study of demotic.
3145	A certain degree of acquaintance with Coptic and
3146	Hieroglyphic is, of course, a necessary preliminary; no
3147	satisfactory progress can indeed be made without a fair
3148	knowledge of the latter and of texts in hieratic For
3149	Coptic the words and forms have been so conveniently
3150	classified in grammars and dictionaries that practice in
3151	' It is hardly necessary to name Erman's Newaegyplische Grammalik and
3152	Sethe's Verbum as indispensable works of reference in this department.
p. 96
3153	78 DEMOTIC PHILOLOGY LPT. II
3154	handling the books of reference will supply most needs
3155	in that direction.
3156	Hess's Roman von Stne Ha-m-us contains a good
3157	list of signs and a glossary, and affords throughout, by
3158	its clear copy of the text, admirable practice in reading.
3159	The publication is, however, nearly twelve years old,
3160	and great alterations would now be necessary for a new
3161	edition; but by keeping an eye on the transliteration,
3162	translation, and notes in the present edition of the 'first
3163	tale,' the student of Hess's publication can correct it for
3164	himself. The facsimiles of the text issued by Mariette
3165	and Krall (Lesestücke) should also be diligently consulted,
3166	—probably with most profit after a certain familiarity
3167	has been acquired with the somewhat conventionalized
3168	transcripts of demotic generally used by scholars!. After
3169	this, the London Gnostic Papyrus published in photo-
3170	graphic facsimile by Hess, with glossary, can be read as
3171	an example of the latest form of demotic; and the inscrip-
3172	tions of Rosetta and Canopus as examples of lapidary
3173	writing. Brugsch's Wörterbuch-and to a less degree
3174	his Supplement to it (vols. v-vii)—is full of demotic
3175	words excellently explained, and the word-lists in
3176	Brugsch's Zwei bilingue Papyri and Krall's Historischer
3177	Roman are very good for consultation.
3178	For Coptic, Peyron's Lexicon (with the useful though
3179	ill-made Auctarium recently issued) and the additions
3180	to the Lexicon in his Grammatica, are of course the
3181	main source of words; but Tattam's Lexicon (hitherto it
3182	would seem neglected) is full of excellent references for
3183	special meanings, and contains words that are not found
3184	elsewhere. The Latin-Coptic portion of Parthey's
3185	Vocabularium is an especially valuable aid in the study
3186	of demotic, suggesting the right Coptic equivalent in
3187	• Printing with demotic type is very unsatisfactory. Texts so published
3188	cannot be recommended for study.
p. 97
3189	CH. IV] BIBLIOGRAPHY 79
3190	countless cases where the meaning of the demotic
3191	word can already be guessed approximately. Stern's
3192	Grammar is invaluable, and Steindorff's small Grammar
3193	of Sahidic is very useful, the explanations contained in
3194	it marking a distinct advance on the great treatise of
3195	Stern. All the above works on Coptic should be con-
3196	stantly in the hands of the student of demotic.
3197	§ 7. The following is a list of the abbreviations here
3198	used in references:—
3199	Ä.Z.. Zeilschrifl für Aegyplische Sprache und Allerthumskunde
3200	(Berlin).
3201	BR., dem.-gr. H. BRUGSCH, Sammlung demolisch-griechischer Eigen-
3202	Ligennamen namen, 1851.
3203	Br., dem. Urk. H. BruGscH, Sammlung demolischer Urkunden.
3204	Br., Dicl.Géog. H. BruGscH, Dictionnaire géographique de lancienne
3205	Egypte. = vols.
3206	BR., Geog. Insc. H. BRuGscH, Geographische Inschriften altaegyplischer
3207	Denkmäler. 3 vols.
3208	Br., Thes. . . H. BruGscH, Thesaurus inscriptionum aegypliacarum.
3209	6 vols. (The fifth volume contains a large collection
3210	of demotic texts on papyrus and stone from the
3211	Serapeum, Philae, &c.)
3212	BR., Wib and\|H. BRuGscH, Hierogtyphisch-demobisches Wörterbuch, 4 vols., and Supplement, vols. 5-7.
3213	Can... . • Tablet of Canopus; for the demotic text see Br., Thes.,
3214	1554 et segq., W. N. GRoFF, Les deux versions
3215	démotiques du décret de Canope.
3216	Dem. Proos. . Demotic Proverbs in the Louvre, published in facsimile
3217	by PIErrEt in Rec. de Trav. I; cf. ReviLLouT in
3218	Rev. Eg. I, Pl. 8.
3219	ERM., Gr. . • AD. ERMAN, Aegyplische Grammatik.
3220	ERM., N.A.Gr. AD. ErmAN, Neuaegyplische Grammalik.
3221	ERM.,West. AD. ERMAN, Papyrus Weskar, Commenlar (in Milthei-
3222	Comm. lungen aus den Orienlalischen Sammlungen, Heft
3223	V, VI).
3224	Gnost. Demotic magical texts with Greck transcriptions, in the
3225	British Museum (see Hess), Leyden (published in
3226	LEEMANS, Monuments Lig. d. Musée des Pays-Bas, II),
3227	and the Louvre (published in MAsPErO, Qudlques
3228	Papyrus du Louvre).
3229	HESS • . • J• J. HEss, Der demolische Roman von Sine Ha-m-ses,
3230	1888.
3231	HEss, London (J. ). Hess, Der groslische Papyrus zon London (with
3232	Gnos. Glossary), 1892.
p. 98
3233	80
3234	Hieroglyphs
3235	Hist. Rom.
3236	Kopt. Urk..
3237	Kufi.
3238	L., D..
3239	LEPs., Taib.
3240	Leyden Gnos.
3241	Leyden Mor.
3242	O. C. Horosc.
3243	O.C. Par..
3244	Pamonth .
3245	Pap. An..
3246	Pap. Dodgson
3247	Pap. judician
3248	Pap. Sall..
3249	Pap. Unuamo
3250	PEYRON • •
3251	PEYrON, Auct
3252	PEYRON, Gr.
3253	PIEHL, Insc.
3254	hierog.
3255	DEMOTIC PHILOLOGY [PT. I1
3256	• F. LL. GRIFFITH, A Collection of Hieroglyphs (sixth
3257	memoir of the Archaeological Survey of the Egypt
3258	Exploration Fund).
3259	• J. KRaLı, Ein neuer historischer Roman in demotischer
3260	Schrift (with Glossary), inMittheilungenaus der
3261	Sammlung der Papyrus Erzherzog Rainer, Bd. VI.
3262	('No....: refers to the index of demotic groups.)
3263	One page facsimiled in KraLL's Demotische Lesestücke.
3264	• Aegyplische Urkunden aus den königlichen Museen zu
3265	Berlin, Koptische und Arabische Urkunden.
3266	• Long fable of a monkey (Kufi) and a cat, in demotic:
3267	Pap. I. 384 of Leyden, published by LEEmANs, Monu-
3268	menis Égypliens du Musée d' Antiquités des Pays-Bas
3269	à Leide, II, Taf. ccxv-ccxxv, and by J. KRALL,
3270	Demolische Lesestücke, Wien, 1897.
3271	• LEPSIUS, Denkmäler aus Aegypten und Aethiopien. 12
3272	vols.
3273	• LePsIUs, Das Todtenbuch der Aegypler, Leipzig, 1842.
3274	• The demotic gnostic papyrus of Leyden, published by
3275	LEEMANS, Monuments Égyptiens du Musée d Antquités
3276	des Pays-Bas à Leide, II.
3277	• Papyrus of Moral Sayings published by PLEyrE and
3278	BOEsEr, Monuments Égypliens, 34º livraison (Papyrus
3279	démotique Insinger).
3280	• Old Coptic Horoscope on a Greek MS. in the British
3281	Museum. KENYoN, Cat. of Gk. MSS. in B. M., I,
3282	Pl. 73-4, cols. 4-6.
3283	• Old Coptic texts in a Greek papyrus-codex at Paris,
3284	fos. 1-3, with facsimiles, ERMAN, A. Z., 1883, 89.
3285	• The demotic Book of the Dead in the Louvre, published
3286	by H. BruGScH in Sammlung demotischer Urkunden,
3287	Taf. VI, VII
3288	• Anastasi papyri published in Select Papyri of the British
3289	Museum.
3290	• Facsimiled in Transactions Soc. Bibl. Arch. VIII, 9.
3291	e T. DEvÉRIA, Le papyrus judiciaire de Turin (XXth
3292	dynasty).
3293	• Sallier papyri published in Select Papyri of the British
3294	Museum.
3295	n Papyrus hiéralique de la collection W. Golénischeff, in
3296	Rec. de Trav., XXI (AAIst dynasty).
3297	• A. PExRON, Lexicon Coplicum, 1835-
3298	• Auctarium ad Peyronis Lexicon Copticum, Berlin, 1896.
3299	• A. PEYRON, Grammatica Linguae Coplicae (with addi-
3300	tions to the Lexicon).
3301	K. PiwhI, bascriptions hiéroglyphiqzes recueillies en Europe el en Egyple.
p. 99
3302	CH. IV] ABBREVIATED REFERENCES 8г
3303	Poème Sal.. • Facsimile in RevILLorT, Un Poème salyrigue...; cf.
3304	BRUGSCH in Ä. Z., 1888, 4 et segq. (das Gedichl rom
3305	Harfenspieler).
3306	P. S.B.A.. Proceedings of the Socielyof Biblical Archaeology
3307	(London).
3308	Rec. de Trav.. Recueil de travaux relalifs à la philologie el l'archéologie
3309	Egyptiennes el assyriennes (Paris).
3310	Re. Eg. .. Revue Egyplologique (Paris).
3311	REVILLOUT REVILLOUT, Le Roman de Selna, Paris, 1877.
3312	Rh. bil. pap. . BruGscH, Rhind's swei bilingue Papyri, hieralisch und
3313	demotisch (' No. ...? refers to the index of demotic
3314	groups at the end): facsimiled in BIrcH, Facsimiles
3315	of two Papyri found in a Tomb al Thebes).
3316	Ros.. The demotic inscription of the Rosetta stone, published
3317	in KraLL, Demolische Lesesticke (and elsewhere).
3318	Sign papyrus. List of hieroglyphic signs with explanations in hieratic
3319	(Roman), facsimiled in GRIFFITH and PETRIE, Two
3320	hieroglyphic Papyri from Taniş. Memoir of the
3321	EgyptExploration Fund.
3322	SPIEG., Corresp. W. SPIEGELBErG, Correspondances du Lemps des rois-prêtres
3323	(XXIst dynasty), in Nolices el Extrails des MSS. de
3324	la Bibliotheque Nationale, Tome XXXIV.
3325	ST. . L. STERN, Koptische Grammatik, 1880.
3326	STD.. • G. STEINDORFF, Koplische Grammatik.
3327	StD., Elias • G. StEINDOrFF, Die Apokalypse des Elias (Achmimic
3328	dialect, &c.) in Texle und Ünlersuchungen zur Ge-
3329	schichte der allchristlichen Lileralur.
3330	TATTAM • • H. TATTAM, Lexicon Aeg'ypliaco-Larinum, 1835 (Coptic).
3331	Verbum. . • K. SETHE, Das aegyplische Verbum im Allaegsplischen,
3332	Neuaegsplischen und Koptischen. 2 vols. 1899.
3333	2. . ZOEGA, Calalogus codicum coplicorum qui in museo Bor-
3334	giano Velitris asservantur.
3335	N.B-I Kh., 11 Kh., denote the first and second tale of Khamuas
3336	respectively: the five dialects of Coptic—Achmimic, Faiyumic,
3337	Memphitic, Sahidic, and Boheiric—are also referred to by
3338	contractions, S., Sah., B., Boh., &c. The Sahidic form takes
3339	the first place when Boheiric is quoted with it without specifi-
3340	cation, e.g. O : 01.
3341	*die- E demianic. ine. E iEative Farpia pa(ieuac quisch).
3342	qualitative (pseudo-participle). del. = determinative.
3343	GRIFPITH. G
p. 100
3344	CHAPTER V
3345	TRANSLITERATION
3346	mh 11I
3347	1..........(m)nte-k p'nt hwš r-hr-y 'e-f hpr
3348	'e mn mte-y šre m-s' šre snw 'n p' hp ty hmse we
3349	erme wr n-m-w 'e-y ty hmse N('y)-nfr-k?-Pth 'erme
3350	t' šret n we mr-mše
3351	2. 'e-y ty hmse 'H]wret 'erme p' šre n ky mr-mšle
3352	N. B.- A vocalized rendering of page ili is given above, pp. 72-7.
3353	l. I. hruš. This spelling would be abnormal for wcy 'to trouble,'
3354	"vex,' 'endanger' It would rather represent the origin of g00xCy:
3355	2wOTL Лаборет (constructed with €), but it is possible that the same
3356	group was used for gwcy; cf. s wd used for &hHs, 1. 24. The
3357	precise meaning of hus is uncertain. See examples, BR., Wtb. 893, and
3358	HESS, p. I, viz. Pamonth, i. 37, ly hres, and m or hs hres...hry, Dem.
3359	provs. ii. 7, 8; ill. 2.
3360	This sentence may, of course, be incomplete at the beginning, e.g.
3361	" Art thou he that hrš to me?'
3362	r-hr-y, Ist sing., corresponds to ror-f epoc, 3rd sing.; cf. iv. ro
3363	with iv. 14. So also hr.r.hr-y Dapor to hr.r-r-f D&pog, both in
3364	ili. 38. In the Gnostic papyri y.ar-y is ıst sing., and inl Kh. r.hr-k is
3365	and sing., but in I Kh. yar-k, v. 32, 36. Probably Epos, epOR simply
3366	are intended by these spellings. The Late Eg. forms are normal like the
3367	Coptic. One might have expected r-hr-y to represent something like
3368	*eд&1.
3369	e-f hpr. O. C. Horosc. v. 21 eoWn (EorN); O. C. Par.
3370	єболпе (є...), Ä. Z., 83, 1о6; єсушпе : єсушп (e...). Note
3371	that the impersonal subj. is masc. in e-f hpr, hpr-f. Contrast normal
3372	Coptic, St., § 487, but see v. I note pa sr hpr.
3373	ly. In this verb a special mode of writing is used for the form stm-f,
3374	i.e. le-f (l.6). The commonest form, here transcribed ly, more properly
3375	le•l, is the infinitive, and stands also for the qualitative TO : TOs (II Kh.
3376	vi. 33). As the latter form in almost every line of demotic spells
p. 101
3377	THE FIRST TALE OF KHAMUAS
3378	TRANSLATION
3379	Third
3380	1..........'thou art (?) he that abuseth(?) me.
3381	If it be that I have not a child beside two children, does
3382	the law make one marry with the other of them? I will
3383	make Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah marry with the daughter of
3384	a general,
3385	2. I will make Ahjure [marry] with the son of another
3386	simply ti, the Coptic T 'give,' it must be the origin of the peculiarly
3387	Coptic letter T, to which it bears so close an outward resemblance
3388	(STD., §4 Anm.). I have not yet observed an instance of T&&r: THI.
3389	hmse. The sign, 'woman, s.1 (shm.l) CgIelE seems to represent
3390	the syllable se, though it originated in the det. of the sitting figure; sce
3391	the note to 4m-t l. 5.
3392	lyhmse is hereprobablypredicative rather than dependent on php.
3393	" is it the law to marry,' as Hess, &c., take it.
3394	serme. This is merely the approximate pronunciation of the Late
3395	Egyptian yrmw, suggested by ERm., N.A. Gr., § 10g. een: neee
3396	seems formed from it by the addition of il. n is very commonly added
3397	to adverbs, prepositions, &c., and is often suppressed in demotic writing
3398	even where it occurs in Late Eg., e.g. in 1l for ITOOTs, eor fur for
3399	на&рen, &c., &c.
3400	e-y ly. r is not written in fut. Ist sing. EIE, owing to preceding
3401	semivowel y: in other persons we have e-k r, e-f r, &c.
3402	Noy-nfr-k-Pih. The god's name, according to a common usage
3403	in hieroglyphs, though written first is doubtless to be read at the end
3404	of the name.
3405	w. The indef. article in dem. always distinguishes gender, thus
3406	affording valuable aid to the lexicographer where Coptic O is valueless.
3407	mr-mše=Леленнує птраттубь: cf. P.S. B. A., Nov. 1899, p. a7о.
3408	1. 2. 'Hurel, or possibly •Hhrel, as the syllabic is sometimes hr, see
3409	hrr, l. 21.
3410	G 2
p. 102
3411	TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 11
3412	hpr-f r? ten mhwet y? sy apr p'nwe s'mne-w t
3413	hrwtt m-bh Pr-e st w m-s'-y O-w t-y r t hrwtt
3414	3. n rn-s kpr-f? 'e hst-]y thr m šs 'e bn te-y or n
3415	hpr-f might be 'it happened,' but more probably is an old optative
3416	(ERM., Gr., § 182; Verbum, ii, §158) in a formal wish for good fortune
3417	after talk of marriage.
3418	r and n are frequently confused by demotic scholars. In this and
3419	the parallel I. 4 r rather than » is fairly certain. hpr n, Eg. hprm, is 'to be-
3420	come of, 'happen to; сf. асуушпемемос. ассушпє єршмее
3421	means, ' He became a man,' not 'it happened to a man.'
3422	reğy. I find no parallel by which to fix the meaning, unless in
3423	O. C. Horosc. v. 17 &&сунєт.
3424	s-mne-w. It seems undesirable to take this as conjunctive depending
3425	on the substantive nwe ('the hour that they should set,' as Brugsch, &c.)
3426	until clear parallels can be quoted.
3427	hral-t. BR., Thes. 1012 seems to give éopmń, spelt hewrle in an
3428	inscription of about the third cent. A.D. at Philae. All other known
3429	instances (probably none much earlier than I Kh.) are spelt as here.
3430	SPIEGELBERG, Rec. de Trav., xvi. 25, has collected examples and
3431	recognized the Greek origin, but wrongly quotes hwrte from I Kh. The
3432	word being foreign, wu is used to represent the vowel o. The misplace-
3433	ment of Greek vowels is frequent in demotic renderings of proper names,
3434	e.g. Pilwmys = Iroleuaêos. This is probably not caused by any Greek
3435	dialectic peculiarity, but by the phonetic laws governing Egyptian, which
3436	do not,permit an accented syllable before the penultimate. The pro-
3437	nunciationwas therefore approximately herbte, Petlómyos. Thus the
3438	form éporh given by Hesychius as Cypriote may really be Egyptian.
3439	m-bh, Eg. m üh=eeees&, see above p. 7. япелето
3440	occurs, always with the article and with no restriction to exalted persons,
3441	Kufi, xi. 26; Leyden Gnos. xxii. 21, &c.
3442	Hess and Krall wrongly give a superfluous stroke before sl. The
3443	facsimileshows that it is simply the last stroke of Pr-es.
3444	si "w. The past narrative tense formed with the pseudo-participle
3445	(uneigentlicher Nominalsatz, ERm., Gr., §§ 240, 241. 2) appears to survive
3446	in dem. only in this verb, in which, however, it is common (l. 20, iv. 22,
3447	II Kh. iii. 8, &c., &c.), cf. P. S. B. A., 1896, 104. The verb is presumably
3448	in the pseudo-participle, and in fact the inf. of yru (z) is not used in
3449	hare Fig. (Verbum, Sal.ii.) buo theap. Anoulr du io. unais the opast
3450	transcriptions €T, &T (HEss, Lond. Gnost. Gloss., p. 2) probably represent
3451	the pseudo-participle H7: H0r (see ПHT). For T&8O see v. 4,
3452	27, Il Kh. ili. 29, and for the past relative (?) form, I Kh.v. 18. For NH8
3453	see Il Kh. ii. 8, and note thereon.
p. 103
3454	CH. V] 1 KH. III. 2-3 85
3455	general. May it be for our family for abounding!' The
3456	hour came, the éoprń was set before Pharaoh. They came
3457	after me and took me to the éoprý
3458	3. named. It came to pass that] my [heart] was sad
3459	"w ms. Cf. the caus. T&8O MC& arcessere, St.,§561. Es ()
3460	stc&, on the other hand, means 'follow.'
3461	0-zu l-y. In Late Eg. the object-pronouns are normal; Verbum, ii,
3462	§ 494. In dem. only those of the 3rd pers. are normal; the rest, 1-y, 1-k
3463	(II Kh. iii. 17; vi. 12), 1-r (in contracts passim), 1-» (below, l.26), are
3464	a new formation of / followed by the possessive suffixes. They are
3465	found also in contemporary archaistic inscriptions and papyri. In Late
3466	Eg. of the twenty-frst dynasty we have y-ry re-k (Pap. Unuamon, i,
3467	x+2-3)=S.&2OK. This example raises the question whether the /
3468	was ever really pronounced. A genuine loss of t, however, took place
3469	early before the suffixes in tw-f, tw-k=-, K-; later also in mle-k=
3470	NЄК: NT&K, and in the case of many feminine infinitives, esp. in Sah.,
3471	so thattw-k=S.-K is not surprising. The T added to the inf. for the
3472	suffix of the ist pers. goßcT, STD., § 176, may be taken from the 1-y
3473	of this object-pronoun by false analogy, and the Boh. imperatives
3474	&2IT:, &IUT:, &prT:, may possibly show other survivals. The
3475	origin of the series of the demotic object-pronouns may be analogy with
3476	(1) the above tw-f series, the use of which resembles that of absolute
3477	pronouns; (2) suffixes added to fem. infinitives; (3) the old passive
3478	form sdm-tw-f. It is noticeable that Coptic retains no causatives of
3479	transitive verbs requiring object-pronouns, the uses of epo 'cause to
3480	make, TOYNO. 'cause to open' being strictly limited. This makes
3481	the false formations TENMOOTCE, XOOTCE (which verbs seem to be
3482	from intransitives, n°y, šm), all the more interesting.
3483	1. 3. [hpr-f e]. In demotic the attributive construction follows hpr, in
3484	Coptic the indicative follows cywne; cf. 1.10.
3485	e hel-y ler; cf. the same words II Kh. iii. 6; vii. g. Uur is apparently
3486	qual., while the, likewise always with 1%, is infnitive, iv. 12, 35; II Kh. ili.9.
3487	But in Hist.Rom. Gloss., No. 340, Ihr seems to cover both usages, cf.
3488	S. TWEP and eo : T&o (Verbum, i, p. 144), Eg. di°, Pap. Prisse,
3489	xii. 1, and perhaps B. 002, qual. OEg. The rare TW&P (Z., 624)
3490	is 'aemulari' in PeYRoN, but 'ressentir vivement' according to REVILLOUT,
3491	Setna, 1880, p. 9.
3492	m Js, Eg.m is mas, m is, B. ereacyw. Cr. the form eencys,
3493	Il Kh. i. 6 note, and for js=cyW cf. šs (*) sin=yenc, below, 1.8.
3494	Bn...'»; negalive of the present st... &n.
3495	•p 1. Probably O1 I : O M, St., §496 and § 491. p. 315 (cf. l.14).
3496	unless it means 'acted in the manner.'
p. 104
3497	86 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
3498	p'e gy n sf'n zt n(?)-y Pre 'Hwret ?n (m)nte-t or ty
3499	>w-w n(')-y n n'y(y) mtwt lhe zt my ty hmse-y 'erme
3500	4. N('y)-nfr-k'-Pth p'e sn] « zt-y n-f my hmse-y
3501	'erme p' šre n w mr-mše my hmse-f 'erme t' šret
3502	n ky mr-mše hef kpr-f r? t'e-n mhwet r š'y sby-y
3503	sby Pr-s
3504	5. [p' mr-pr-stn "w zt n-f] Pr-r p' mr-pr-stn my 0-w
3505	'Hwret r p' cy n N('y)-nfr-k?-Pth n p' grh my O-w nt
3506	nb-t nt n('y)-ne-w erme-s tr-w Ow t-yn hmt r p'
3507	ry n N(y)-nfr-k-Pth
3508	б... ..te Pr- ?] 'n-w n(')-y špe n ht nb te n'y•w
3509	gy. It is curious that while 6&: (*xal?), and B. XIlt-are masc.
3510	likegy,the S. compounds with OTft-are generally fem.
3511	mnt-tor ly. ar sim is the regular form of thepast active participle
3512	in dem., cf. mt no sr hpr, iv. 5, &c. After the article or copula (?) the
3513	form is ear; 1.12 p' ear sh, iv. 8 l ear hpr. For the beginnings of this
3514	periphrastic participle in Late Egyptian see Verbum, ii, § 876. In Pap.
3515	Unuamon, ii. 13, we already find it with the article p'yr wud-k. It
3516	appears to correspondto the old imperfect participle (Verbum, l.c.),
3517	hardly to the past participle (ibid., §839) Cf. also Topyous=13-e.3y-8,
3518	•Ajeúpraios= Eg. Ymn-yr-dy-s, &c., HEss, A. Z., 90, I; MüLLER, Rec. de
3519	Trav., xiii. 152, note I; STEINDORFr, Keilinsch.-Wiedergabe in Beitr.
3520	f. Assyriologie, i. 352; Verbum, i, § 3. The op, up, and Assyrian ar
3521	transcripts show that the or was pronounced with a short vowel pre-
3522	ceding r. Often predicative as here, cf. use of ЄT-, ПЄТ-, ST., § 306.
3523	lhe. Cf. Ih, Poème Sat. iii. 8; Leyden Mor. v. 6; viii. 22, &c.
3524	my ly (ee&T, ee&.T-), not my (eeos, els-) alone, is the
3525	imperative of the causative, vid. St.,$385.
3526	1. 4. For the restoration see iv. 3.
3527	sl-y. Note that ПEX&J (ERM., A. Z., 93, 102 note) is no guide to
3528	the form 3t-y, nex&l being apparently formed with the relative verb
3529	(Verbum, ii, p. 434). Cf. I. 20 note.
3530	my hms-y. Cr. ee&pey-, from my sr-f, Verbum,ii, S§ 202, 539.
3531	1. 5. Or restore ny-nfr hel-f m šs z1] Py-es, exactly filling the space at
3532	the beginning implied by the necessary restorations in Il. 2,4, 9, 13, I4, &c.
3533	p' after the gap, of course, marks the vocative.
3534	mr-pr-sin. This title seems rare in hieroglyphs: pronounced perhaps
3535	le-pi-ns (?).
3536	pr; for the phonology of this word see STEINDORFF, Ä. Z., 1889,
3537	107, No. 6. As a separate word, pr (*péy) is written in I Kh. with a line
3538	above the group and its det., iv. 6, &c. In composition before a consonant
3539	pr-nfr, 1.39, pr-Bst, &c.—as pi-it retains this line, but before a vowel,
p. 105
3540	CH. V] 1 КН. III. 3-6 87
3541	exceedingly, I not being in my guise (?) of the previous
3542	day. Said Pharaoh to me, 'Ahure, didst thou send
3543	to me in this fool's-counsel (?), saying, " Marry me with
3544	4. Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah my] elder [brother]?"' I said
3545	to him, 'Let me marry with the son of a general, let
3546	him marry with the daughter of another general likewise.
3547	May it come to pass for our family for abounding!'
3548	1 laughed, Pharaoh laughed.
3549	5. The steward of the king's house came; said to
3550	him] Pharaoh, 'O steward of the king's house, let Ahure
3551	be taken to the house of Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah in the night,
3552	let every beautiful thing be taken with her, all! I was
3553	taken as wife to the house of Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah.
3554	6.... ••.. caused] to be brought to me a
3555	as in Pr-enh, 1. 8 (from which the • has gone) it loses the line, being
3556	reduced to M-, as witness Hlárovpos nEOWel =pr-Tm, Busiris
3557	потсіре=pr-"Sr. Hence its usein the same form by false analogy
3558	for the article in geographical expressions where it precedes a vowel
3559	nERe&IT, &c.,1.21. See alsothe next note, and 1ºy.w pr in 1.6.
3560	y (), Hl, tonlos S,vid. iv. 25; for the reading see SPIEGELBERG,
3561	Ä.Z., 1899, 28: derived from pr, STEINDORFF, A. Z., 188g, 107, No. 6.
3562	• S. ¿ieeE always means 'wife' : and is written as here in most dem.
3563	texts. Another group(the seated woman), below, iv. 27, represents C&Ile€
3564	' woman' (s-hm-l), but its pl. reads hmwt gsolee 'women, ili. 25.
3565	For brevity in lists, hm-t,'wife, is sometimes rendered by the sign for
3566	•woman' alone, Br., Dem. Urk. X; and on the other hand in Rh. Bil.,
3567	No.316, ¿IOLeE 'women' is written by exception with the plural of
3568	the group for hm-. In Old Eg. hm-b, 'lemale' means generally " wife,'
3569	and s•1 (fem. of s 'person') always ' woman'; but hm-wl is 'women."
3570	This rule remains in Late Eg. (and in part survives in Coptic), only that
3571	in Late Eg. while hm-f is 'wife,' s.8, having lost its ending in pronunciation,
3572	is now defined by the addition of the adj. hm-t, s-f-hm-l. There is some
3573	indication that the seated woman in dem. in part retains the value of the
3574	old s-6, *se, e.g. in the group for hmse, 'sit'
3575	1. 6. 'They caused themselves to be carried.' A passive meaning
3576	a verb following ly is not uncommon, e.g. l.8 le-wu sb-s, iv. 4 le-f mh-f,
3577	11 Kh. iii. 13 de-y s-hpr 1º-k. Evidendly in these cases we have the
3578	infinitive (STD., § 171) of the dependent verb as in Tweec, &i., St.,
3579	p. 316, not a passive subjunctive; and it muse here be B. ЄПOT not
3580	S.NTOT.
p. 106
3581	88 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. PT. II
3582	pr Pr-esn-w n(')y tr-w r N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth hew nfr
3583	erme-y šp-f he n'yw pr Pr-e tr-w qt-f 'erme-y n p'
3584	grh n rn-f poy-f gmt-y
3585	7... 'er]me-y 'n sp sn 'r rmt mr p'e-f r nom-n
3586	bpr p'e ss n r hsmu b-p-y ?r hsma en ?r-w en-smy
3587	n-m-s m-bh Pr-e› n('y)-nfr hst-f m šs te Pr-ss 0-w
3588	nka y
3589	8. er-hr-y t'y hte]t? te-f 'n-w n()y špe n ht nb šs-
3590	sin e n('y)-ne-w m šs bpr p'e ss n ms ms-y py hm
3591	bl nt e-r-hr-k nt 'e-w zt n-f Mr-b n rn te-w sh-f n še
3592	n (?) Pr-sn/g
3593	nºу-го-pr П&*пнг (?) 'household,' occurs by itself, iv. 39. Note
3594	that pr is without det. in this expression, suggesting that it is a different
3595	word from pr in iv. 6. For the possess. art. pl. in dem., cf. Suaxouveus,
3596	Br., Dem.-gr. Eigennamen, p. 14; also Poème Sat. iv. 2.
3597	šp l°, with suffixes II Kh. vi. 12 (?), vii. 8, lit. perhaps 'receive the
3598	person of,' and so 'lodge' or 'entertain as visitor.' In Coptic simply
3599	сусоп.
3600	ql-s. The fem. noun gtet (Kufi, ili. 33)=Eg. gd.t=(T)KITE
3601	(ERM., A. Z., 1895, 50; Kopt. Urk., No. 22) makes the reading quite
3602	certain. It is curious, however, that SIKOT "n-gly for n-gtt is written
3603	with quite a different group for gi.
3604	p' grh n rn-f; cf. O. C. Horosc., v. 2o преe'перıлох 'the
3605	years named, (P =-p= пp) and Pap. Unuamon, i. 20.
3606	gor-fgm. This emphatic form—which occurs in Late Eg. (Verbum,
3607	ii, §§ 205, 276, 348 et seqq.), and eventually quite displaced the ordinary
3608	past narrative forms, appearing in Coptic as &, &C (ibid., §§ 206, 350)-
3609	is often used in dem. to mark a notable occurrence or development in
3610	the narrative, especially with gm, 'find,' nw, 'perceive In such cases
3611	I have generally pointed the translation with 'behold!' eor-f seems to
3612	vary with rar-f even in this text, cf. iv. 38, v. 3.
3613	gm may perhaps mean 'knew sexually,' though there is no
3614	sexual det.
3615	1. 7. en sp-sn, i. e. en en, seems always to strengthen a negative (with past
3616	or future); v. 18; II Kh. vi. 29 ; vii. 7; Poème Sat., ii. 40.
3617	or rmt mr; this is the form with nominal subject corresponding to
3618	yar-fmr; cf. Verbum, ii,§ 203.
3619	p'e-f"r, incorrectly copied in Hess, p. 23; cf. the reciprocal use
3620	of the plur. ернт.
3621	hsmn; cf. Pap. Ebers, xcvi. 21, and Hess, p. 24.
p. 107
3622	CH. V] 1 кн. I. 6-8
3623	present of silver and gold. All the household of
3624	Pharaoh caused themselves to be brought to me.
3625	Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah made a good day with me. He
3626	entertained all the household of Pharaoh. He slept
3627	with me in the night named. And lo! he found me
3628	7. ............ wi]th me again, again: and
3629	lo! each of us loved his fellow. There came my
3630	time of making purification, I did not make purification
3631	again. They made announcement of it before Pharaoh,
3632	his heart was glad exceedingly. Pharaoh caused much
3633	stuff to be taken
3634	8. before me instantly (?)]. He caused to be carried
3635	to me a present of silver, gold, royal linen, they being
3636	beautiful exceedingly. There came my time of bearing,
3637	1 bore this child that is before thee, to whom is said
3638	Mer-ab as name. He was caused to be written in
3639	record in (of?) the House of Life.
3640	en s-my, "returning of account'; cf. SpiEG., Corresp., 273. Hence
3641	S. &N ceeeeє (BscIAI, Ä. Z., 1887, 68), 'law,' 'ordinance' ; lit.
3642	• promulgation (of a law)"
3643	nka; cf. Hess, p. 25.
3644	1.8. The restoration (cf. v. 20) is quite uncertain; the incomplete word
3645	might be Py-t.
3646	Js-(12)-s/n (=Búrowa ¿lóva in Ros., 1.17) produces Cy NC, as Hu (?)-
3647	n-sin QNHC; and in Dendereh, XXV B. iv. I. 1 fns seems to sland
3648	for ly (TOI?) n(?) sin in a late rendering of the funerary formula hip
3649	rdy sin. Possibly sin produced ns, not s alone.
3650	hm-ll, 'child,' in Il Kh. ii et seqq. is applied to Si-Osiri up to the
3651	age of twelve years; cf. also below iv. 18 for a still wider use.
3652	S. Zeega), Achmimic geegen (grge), Rec. de Trav., xi.
3653	147) 'servant,' cf. garçon. Literally it may mean without child,' or
3654	' without servant'; vid. fi, below, l. 16. Im is less likely to mean 'liule"
3655	=the adj. hт, сунее.
3656	Mr-b. That thesecond group reads8 (vb?) is shown by lur-b,
3657	Rh. bil. pap., xvii. 9. In the highly archaistic and faully Livre des
3658	Transformations, this group regularly spells the word for 'heart,' bur seems
3659	10 have been often read 11% by confusion with the laser word, being
3660	written with terminal /: but note especially !er-b, ibid., i.14, nlm-b, v. 8;
3661	vii. 12.
3662	sk. SETHI in Verbum, i, § 360 gives sh as the Eg. word for
p. 108
3663	go TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. I1
3664	9. [pr-f 'e mn mte N('y)-nfr-]k-Pth p'e sn yp.t hr
3665	p' t m-s mšs hr t lset n Mn-nfr 'e-fš n n' shw nt
3666	hn n' hwt n n' Pr-sw erme n' wytw n n' shw
3667	Pr-nk erme n' shwat hr
3668	I0..... ....] tb sh m šs m-s n'y(y) hpr we
3669	Lsy us Pth, šm N('y)-nfr-k'-Pth hn h-ntr r wšte hpr-f
3670	e-f mš m-s p'ky e-fšn n' shwat hr n'gwtn n'
3671	ntr•w
3672	11. gm-se? wr web e-f y n ms] g.r-f sby-f zt n-f
3673	N(y)-nfr-k-Pth e-r-k sby n•'m-ytb h zt-f bn te-y sby
3674	n-m-k 'n gory sby hpr r-keš n hynw shw e mn mte
3675	12. rmtnpt....e-fhpr]r-k whs sh m n()y
3676	'write! It is, however, written sš even in N.K. Is not C&&J: CD&I
3677	due to fusion of sš with Eg. sh 'remember'? Here we have the sense
3678	'be enrolled,' 'be registered,' as in Cg&s, RoBINsoN, Copt. Apocr.
3679	Gosp., 19%.
3680	je.t seems in Late Egyptian applicable to any kind of document.
3681	Note the absence of the article, which may imply a phrase sh n je.t for
3682	• be registered.' The t is doubtful. If n is to be read, translate ' in the
3683	House of Life'; otherwise Je./ Pr-nh must mean 'the register of P!
3684	1. g. For the restoration cf. iv. 38.
3685	ур.t, ЄЛОПЄ, ЄІЄП-; cf. HEss, A. Z., 18g0, pp. 6-y for the derivation
3686	from Eg. up.t,yp-t.
3687	hse-l. Alphabetically spelled in Br., Thes. 931, in the same phrase,
3688	' the necropolis of Memphis'; cf. Rh. bil. pap., No. 36g, and BR., Wtb.
3689	Suppl. 897.
3690	h-wl 1%,' grave,' and h-t, 'fortress, "residence' (=gw, 2.<-,
3691	ERM., A. Z. 83, 101, Anm. 2), are written alike in late hieroglyphic, and
3692	in demotic.
3693	Praes.w, Achm. pp&r.
3694	1. 1o. by, in Eg.'manifestation (of a god or king); =(& : (&J, 'feast,'
3695	so here ' procession.'
3696	ns-Pth. Compounds of ns with a divine name are very common in
3697	proper names, but the form seems almost obsolete in the language. N.S
3698	occurs, however, several times in Pap. Unuamon, ii. 24, 25, and it is
3699	used here probably on account of the god's name.
3700	šm, vid. Hess, p. 149, Ä. Z.., 18g0, 5 for the reading, =суєт: сує.
3701	The spelling in Pap. Unuamon, i. 12, &c. indicates the loss of the m.
3702	h-nir, S. ğEnEETe, T. 'monastery! In dem. always without
3703	the article; cf. ss Pr-inh in l.8, Pr-s, and the title sime itself.
3704	nіr-г, птHp, ERM., Ä.Z. 95, 47.
p. 109
3705	CH. V] 1 KH. I. g-ı2 9I
3706	9. It came to pass that Ne-nefer]ka-Ptah my brother
3707	[had no] occupation on the earth except to walk on
3708	the gebel of- Memphis, reading in the writings that
3709	were in the tombs of the Pharaohs and the tablets of
3710	the scribes of the House of Life and the writings that
3711	were on
3712	10. ...... and great was his zeal] about writings
3713	exceedingly. After these things, there happened a
3714	procession in honour of Ptah, Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah went
3715	into the temple to worship. He happened to be
3716	walking behind (?) the procession reading in the writings
3717	that were upon the shrines of the gods..
3718	II..... it happened that there came (?) a priest
3719	greater in age] than he; he laughed. Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah
3720	said to him, 'Wherefore dost thou laugh at me?'
3721	Said he, 'I am not laughing at thee" Make thou
3722	sport and be reading in writings (of a sort) that belongs
3723	to no
3724	12. man on the earth their like (?). If] thou seekest
3725	1. 11. The det. of ms is unmistakable, and it is, therefore, difficult to
3726	• restore the line differently. Cf.e-fy n ms in vi. 11.
3727	e-9y-k. This might represent the past &KCWßE, cf. above, 1.6;
3728	oг єк(*єрек)сшвє (cf. fem. єрє, Boh. pl. єретєп); or simply
3729	Kcwße. The last seems here the best, and €(PE)K is spelt y-k after
3730	hpr, at the end of this line; cf. iv. 25.
3731	1b for ET BE, the e (r) being omitted in writing; cf. v. 30, note.
3732	rory sby can hardly here be of the form ror-f sim; read it
3733	therefore as &ps-. The hpr following can only be imperative; cr. St.,
3734	$385ad fin Others translate •If I laughed, it was that,' but so bold
3735	a rendering requires parallels to support it.
3736	hyn-w. The meaning'pair,' referring to the two spells, suggested
3737	by BruGscH and HEss, P.30, is not yet authenticaled, though here, as
3738	often, appropriate.
3739	1. 12. 20h (not abi); for variants vid. HEss, p. 31 (read abi in Gnost.
3740	Gloss., confused also with gly). Old Eg. wh, Late Eg. w(3')b (Verbum,
3741	i,§87), 'seek'=orwcy ' desire.' In II Kh.(vid. ii. 29) the group spells
3742	uh, 'letter."
3743	š, with direct obj. means ' pronounce,' " read aloud'; ef u-seems to
3744	mean 'read in,' 'peruse,' cr. "5 n-m-f, l. 35, iv. 38.
p. 110
3745	92 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. I1
3746	te-y O-w t-k r p' m'(s) nt e p'y zme nom-f e Thwt p'
3747	eor sh-f n tt-f hef e-f ny r bry m s' n' ntrw hp snw
3748	nsh n'nthr st(t)-f r-k
3749	13. 5 p'hp mh I(?) r-k r] phre t p p'tt tt n'
3750	tww n' ymw r-k r gm n'at e n ptw n t p erme
3751	n' ztfe•w r ztt-w tr-w r-k r nw r n' rymw np mty
3752	e wn
3753	14. nht n ntr wh n mw te-w rylt? hrytr-keš p'
3754	hp mh snw e-f kpr r-k hn 'Mnt r-k n p'e-k gy hr p'
3755	t'nr-kr nwr p' Rere-f he nt'perme t'e-f p'ntrw
3756	'erme p'›ch [n] p'e-f gy n wbn
3757	15. zt n-f N('y)-nfr-k'-Pth] stn 'nh-f my zt•w n(')-y
3758	wet mt nfr.t r-k wh-se te-y or-w se n-k nte-k hb-y r
3759	le-y. Old conjunctive(final) sdm-f, especially common in the ist
3760	pers. of this verb (l. 15, &c.). Cf. Verbum, ii, § 16o for Late Eg.
3761	n2sm-f. This locative use remains in eeeeoç, St., § 298, z.
3762	e Thwl; so also € not epe before ПET-, Sr., § 407.
3763	Thwt=O. C. Par. 000TT, A. Z. 83,94.
3764	p eor sh-f; see note on (m)nt-tar ly in l. 3; cf. ПET&C- in St.,
3765	$ з0б.
3766	e-J, which can spell both EG, Eg. yre-f, and 9- (late Eg. tw-f);
3767	here apparently stands for the latter (Ist pres.).
3768	ny=Eg. n.1, ny, 'go, MOT: MOTS mellew, so in vi. 14; here
3769	qual. Mt& 'go' (which is used as qual. of cye, Sr., $ 348). In II Kh.
3770	and Gnost. it is falsely spelled "n-nºy, except in the causative; see the
3771	examples in HEss, PP. 32-6. TENNOOY 'send,' seems a new forma-
3772	tion from its caus., TENПO-07.
3773	hp is here probably 'law,' i. e. 'formula"
3774	hp II, &c.: complex examples of emphasis are common in dem.
3775	Here the two formulae are named and described together by a separate
3776	phrase in apposition; the sentence is never properly finished, a new
3777	sentence dealing with each separately.
3778	1. 13. The restoration is from 1.14, helped by 1. 40.
3779	phre, B. Ф&Dpi, for the sense cf. ф&Дep 'incantator, and
3780	О. С. пеěр- 'enchant, Ä. Z., 1883, 106=S. *п2др-.
3781	pl. sº is an impossible reading being only a phonetic value in
3782	hieroglyphic, vid. Hieroglyphs, pp. 22-3. For the reading pl—founded
3783	on thehieroglyphic pd-w, which this grouprenders inPamonth, i.
3784	35-cf."pl-w, along with rym-w as here, spelt out in Kufi, iii. 29.
3785	There seems a superfluous line before n° plw, omitted in the
3786	parallels, iii. 36; iv. 1.
p. 111
3787	CH. v] 1 КН. III. 12-15 93
3788	to pronounce a spell, come to me, that I may cause
3789	thee to be taken to the place in which is that book
3790	that it was Thoth that wrote it with his own hand, when
3791	he went down following (?) the gods. Two formulae of
3792	writing, namely what are upon it—thou
3793	13. reading the first formula, thou wilt] charm the
3794	heaven, the earth, the underworld, the mountains, the
3795	seas. Thou wilt discern what the birds of heaven,
3796	and the creeping things shall say, all. Thou shalt see
3797	the fish of the deep, there being
3798	14. power of god resting upon water] over [them].
3799	Reading the second formula, if it be that thou art in
3800	Amenti, thou art again on earth in thy (usual) form;
3801	thou wilt see the Sun rising in heaven with his cycle
3802	of deities, and the Moon [in] his form of shining.
3803	15. Said to him Nenefer-ka-Ptah] 'O king, may he
3804	live! may I be told a good thing that thou desirest that
3805	I should cause it to be done to thee, that thou mayest
3806	eun=eTr:0T
3807	1.14. For therestoration see l. 37, and the other parallel passages,
3808	which vary in detail.
3809	ry.l. Late Eg. ru-ysl, 'side, apparently from Eg. r-u?./, 'edge of
3810	the way? It also means 'niche,' and ps 'cell' seems derived from it.
3811	3r-k и кеепєкоs; cf. l. 3, contrast sr-f pef gy without n in
3812	Il. 32 et seqq. The construction may rather point to the rendering
3813	' whether thou art in Amenti, (or) again on earth
3814	se% 008. This rather than Yh (cf. Boh. JW&) seems the best
3815	transcription. See the rendering of 1w& in London Gnos. vili. 2.
3816	1.15. The restoration is perhaps incomplete.
3817	sln enh-f. A common ejaculation, or rather lively mode of address,
3818	in Kufi (xvii. 26), where when a female is addressed (ibid, v. 11 ; xix. 31),
3819	sin enh-s, 'may she live,' is used: so equivalent to 'Ny good sir!' •My
3820	good lady!' It is evidently modelled on the full address to the king, as
3821	seen below in iv. 24. enh-f is optative, ' may he live!' rather than indicative
3822	'as he liveth" Contrast enh=Cy€-, v.14.
3823	hb-y. For 2wß as a verb in Pagan Coptic (Eg.26) see ERM.,
3824	Ä. Z., 1895, 50; Kopt. Urk., No. 22. Note thai y is still used, as in Eg.,
3825	for the suffix of the ist sing. 1o the inf., instead of Coplic T.
p. 112
3826	94 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 1I
3827	p' m(') nt e p'y zm' nom f et p'web n N('y)-nfr-k?-Pth
3828	e-fhpr [r-k] wlg? hb-k
3829	16. r p'm() nt e p'y zms nom]f\|r-k r ty n()-y ht
3830	tbn št (?) wbe t'e qst r-k r ty "r-w n()y.... Il? n
3831	wrbt the (es N(y)-nfr-k-Pth rwe bitef te-w p'ht
3832	Cnp' wsb te-f wh? n'mr?......Ite-f "r-w s(st)
3833	17....ztp'wsb n]N(y)-nfr-k-Pth p' zme
3834	n rn-f'e-f n t mtyt n p ym n Qbt hn wet tbet n
3835	bnpy e t' tbet n bnpy [hn] wet tbet
3836	18. n hmt e t tbet n hmt] hn wrt tbet n ht n qtet
3837	e t tbet [n] ht n qtet hn wet tbet n yb hbyn e t
3838	tbet n yb hb[y]n hn ws.t
3839	19. tbet n ht 'e t tbet]n ht hn wst tbet n nb 'e
3840	p' zmr hn-se 'e [wn ws r]n hf whet ztfet nb-t n p'
3841	qte n t' tbet nt 'e p' zms hn-se 'e wn
3842	20. ws hf n z:t n p qte] n t tbet n rn-se t' wnet
3843	n szy por p web [e-y-hr] N('y)-nfr-k'-[Pth] b-p-f gm
3844	m'() nb np't e-f noom-f'e-fwr bl hn h-ntr szy-f
3845	21. e-y-hr-y n mt nb.t or bpr nom-f] tr-w [zt-f
3846	ho-k, if this be the true reading, must be infinitive.
3847	1. 16. wo Orß€. Is this as English ' against my burial'? cf.Ros., 1.18.
3848	gs-1; the sign sometimes read as in this group is really a form of the
3849	symbol of 'bone'
3850	%. In N. K. the Eg. ywtt, ' without,' is sometimes spelt »/=&T-,
3851	NAVILLE, Todtenbuch, Einleitung, 62, 77, &c. The demotic group occurs
3852	in Poème Sat. i. 4; iii. 12, and in the contracts passim.
3853	tne. Cr. Poème Sat. i. 3 with similar det.; Ros., 1.9 tn nor w6
3854	=тeleoTuкó» "initiation fee (?)'
3855	hl=Faiyumic g€2 'servant'; BourIANT, Fragments Baschmou-
3856	riques, gloss.; Cruw, Coptic MSS. from the Faiyûm, p. 46.
3857	wh?,3r-w?, vid. 1. 37.
3858	nºmr..., very uncertain.
3859	1l1-20 Cf. Il. 34 et seqq. for the restorations.
3860	1. 19. 'r, 'schoenus, cf. iv. 5, &c., and p. 22 above.
3861	1.20. ror is relative past (sdm-f); cf. Verbum, ii, §$ 766 et seqq.; 792
3862	et seqq., so also r.zl, l. 23; r•šp, l. 40; r.hy, iv. 17; r•wnn'y, iv. 21;
3863	ronw, iv. 26; r•ph, v. 14; role, II Kh. v. 28; r•h°, II Kh. vi. 24; also
3864	r.nhm (?), II Kh. vi. g. This form is found in O. C. Par. in пяе
p. 113
3865	CH. V] 1 KH. III. 15-21 95
3866	despatch me to the place in which this book is. Said
3867	the priest to Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah. 'If it be that thou
3868	desirest to be directed (?)
3869	16. to the place in which this book is] thou shalt
3870	give me a hundred teben of silver for my burial, thou
3871	shalt cause two [salaries (?)] of a priest to be made
3872	for me without deduction (?)'_ Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah called to
3873	a youth, he caused the hundred (teben) of silver to be
3874	given to the priest, he caused the superintendents (?)
3875	of the treasury (?) to add (?) two . •. he caused
3876	them to be made
3877	17. for the priest without fee (?). Said the priest
3878	to] Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah 'the book named it is in the midst
3879	of the sea of Coptos, in a box of iron, the box of iron
3880	being in a box
3881	18. of bronze, the box of bronze] in a box of qete-
3882	wood, the box of gete-wood in a box of ivory and
3883	ebony, the box of ivory and ebony in a
3884	19. box of silver, (and) the box of] silver in a box
3885	of gold in which is the book: there being a schoenus
3886	of every kind of serpent, scorpion, and reptile around
3887	the box in which the book is, there being
3888	20. an endless (?) snake around] the box named.
3889	The time of relating that the priest did before
3890	Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah, he found not any place of earth in
3891	which he was. He came out of the temple and related
3892	21. of everything that had become of him], all. He
3893	ENeєCIє-MIee ' N whom N bore' (Erm., A.Z.93.103), and in Coptic
3894	in П-ЄХЄ-, lit. 'that which ... said, П-ЄХД-9, П-ЄХШ-08: П-
3895	єX&T; сf. also ee-єсує-, яе-єсу&к, Erм., A. Z. 94, 128.
3896	P rene-l e ssy ror, cf. TETNOT ET&, hora gua, guando (PRYRON).
3897	B-p-5 gm, &c. A regular phrase, with some varieties, for amaze-
3898	ment or excitement.
3899	1.21. For the restoration at the beginning see iv. 15, and for e op-y hrr
3900	below, 1. 34.
p. 114
3901	TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 11
3902	n(')-y e-y šm r Qbt e-y 'n p'y zm‹ [e bp-y] hrr r p(r)
3903	mht in hpr-f e-y h' (?) "n n? p' wsb zt hr? n-k 'Mn?
3904	e? hr-k szy e-r-hr-f n'y(y)
3905	22.. . • • • •.]he n-k n'y p' mlhe p' tš n
3906	Ne gm-y se... • Pr-y y ?] tt-y 'erme N('y)-nfr-k'-Pth
3907	r tm ty šm-f r Qbt [opl-f stm n'-y šm-f mbh
3908	23. Pr-ss szy-f mbh] Pr-s? n mt nbit r.zt n-f p' wsb
3909	tr-w zt n-f Pr-r h p' nt [e-r-k w/g nom-f?] zl-f n-f my
3910	te-w n'-y t' shret Pr-s erme p'e-s sbte [el-y 0 ›Hwret
3911	hrr; for the reading cf. 'N-hr, Eg. Yn-hr.t "Ovoupis, rightly read
3912	by LEGRAIN in Miss. Arch. Franç. viii. 374; Br., dem. Urk. iv. c.a. This
3913	group is therefore &poTp, as Brugsch long ago suggested. Eg. hr(J')r
3914	=' depart from,' 'avoid'; so hrr r with negative may mean 'not avoid,'
3915	" go straight to,' and hrr alone with neg. 'not delay.' Verbum, i, $426,
3916	makes 2porp a Vae, inf. reduplication of Eg. hr(J), 'be satisfied, and
3917	that it exceeds three radicals seems proved by the periphrastic ar-fhrr,
3918	iv. 12, cf. Verbum, ii, § 195. But it seems to have h, not h, for its
3919	occurrence in "N-hr is as early as Nekhtnebef.
3920	pr mhi, nEJegIT; we have also NEJNT, ПEIЄВT similarly
3921	written, v. 11, II Kh. vi. 1o. So also ПIJ&K Фinar 'the island Lak'
3922	is spelt pr-y-Lk, and this rendering of the article is common in
3923	geographical names.
3924	2°°, KW: XW; for the reading see HEss, Ä. Z., 1890, 4; with it
3925	is either the det. of evil indicating a special meaning in this passage, or
3926	better (as Hess) the word en. Following this is the preposition n rather
3927	than r. he en n probably means 'opposed, " blamed, or 'reproached';
3928	but there seems to be no such use in Coptic, and he may here be either
3929	inf., or better qual.
3930	hr n-k "Mn (?) (the hr as in 20, 2p&: "face,' but with det. of evil)
3931	occurs II Kh. v. 29: "Amon curse thee,' or 'stop it for thee,' or ' prevent
3932	thee' (cf. ¿єppI), or 'beware of Amon for thyself" (&OpO8, PEYRON,
3933	Auct.); hardly 'may Amon attend to thee' with implied' bad sense, for
3934	my hr (I1 Kh. v. 8) is constructed with r. In the present passage 'Mn is
3935	uncertain.
3936	[e] hr-ke say, 'thou having related, *€g&k(?)c&xs. This is
3937	a regular form in texts of Ptolemaic and early Roman period for the past
3938	verbal attribute where the relative is the subject of its sentence (ST.,
3939	§423, p. 260); cf. iv. 4 and Ros., 1.6, rhr-f ty, and contrast e r-f s/m,
3940	iv. 26. It is essentially the emphatic form in dependent sentences,
3941	perhaps also emphasizing the subject (here the pronoun). See notes to
3942	iv. 5 and 26. In II Kh. hr n-k "Mn is followed by emphatic mte-k,
3943	ЛТОК.
p. 115
3944	CH. V] 1 КН. III. 21-23 97
3945	said to me 'I will go to Coptos, I will bring this book,
3946	having come straight back to the North.' It came to
3947	pass that I reproached (?) the priest saying, 'May
3948	Amon curse thee (?) in that thou hast related to him
3949	these
3950	22. ill-omened things! Thou hast prepared (?)for
3951	me the] battle, thou hast brought to me the quarrel.
3952	The Thebais, I have found it [cruel (?)' I did the
3953	extent of] my hand with Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah to prevent
3954	him from going to Coptos. He did not hearken to me.
3955	He went before
3956	23. Pharaoh, he related before] Pharaoh of everything
3957	that the priest had told him, all. Said to him Pharaoh,
3958	'What is it that [thou desirest]?' He said to him,
3959	•Let the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh be given me with
3960	its equipment. I will take Ahure
3961	1. 22. she...mlhe. The same association of words in Hist. Rom.
3962	Gloss., Nos. 11, 129, as pointed out by KRaLL, 1. c.; he=Eg. %°, later
3963	yh, 'fight' (Hieroglyphs, p. 15).
3964	p° is; Hess and Krall read n p' ls, 'strife of the Thebaid,' but
3965	the facsimile and photograph show this to be wrong and due to an
3966	accidental split in the sign p: otherwise the line might continue
3967	*I found him [deaf to me]'
3968	Ne, Late Eg. N.l, Pap. Unuamon, ii. 78, &c.=m3, Ass. Ni' ; see
3969	Hess, p. 8I. Originally fem., it is so in Kufi, v. 33, Pe-f ne-l, 'his city.'
3970	But in Br., Thes. 897 quoting from Rh. bil. pap., p'e-f ne is read where
3971	HEss (l.c.) reads ne•l-f; the writing of the passage is here confused in
3972	the original (vid. the facsimile published by Birch), p'e-f (?) being an addi-
3973	tion, so it is not a good authority. In O. C. Par., M€ probably = Thebes
3974	(ERM., Ä. Z., 93, 103, note 10 l. 46).
3975	['r-y cy] Ll-y; cf.v.36. If this is the correct restoration, y had
3976	here the exceptional det. of speech as in Il Kh. ii. 11.
3977	Coptic, in єTeeтрege, uses the periphrasis r-f 3m for im-f
3978	on the same principle as in the past "r-f sim = agcwtere for sim-f.
3979	s/m n, 'hearken to' ; cf. s'm r, 'hear' (a voice or sound), v. 27,
3980	slm ml-l, "hear" (a thing), iv. 12.
3981	1. 33. For the restoration vid. vi. 5.
3982	shrc-l, probably to be connected with Eg. hr, caus. sihr, "please";
3983	so 'pleasing' or 'pleasure-boat'
3984	GRIFFITH. H
p. 116
3985	98 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
3986	24. 'erme Mr-b p'e-s b]m hl r rs? 'erme-y e-y "n
3987	p'y zm' e bp-y? hrr te[-w n-f t'] shret Pr-e erme p'e-s
3988	sbte e-n r mrt rr-s "-n sgr ph-n
3989	25. r Qbt "r-w in smy] n-'m-s e-y-hr n' webw n's
3990	nlbt p'mr šn n's st [w]r bryrhet-n bp-w hrr
3991	rths.tn N('y)-nfr-k-Pth n'e-w hmwt w r hryr
3992	het-y h'y
3993	26. In r hry n n' grw šm-n hn] h-ntrn'S Hr-p-hrt
3994	te N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth 'n-w h 'pt "rp "r-f glyl wtne m-b'h
3995	'S n Qbt Hr-p'-hrt O-w t-n r wr ry e n('y)-sne-f m šs
3996	27..........°rN(y)-nfr-k-Pth hrw ftw e-f"r
3997	hrw nfr 'erme n' wbwe n'S n Obt enhmwtn n'
3998	webw n'S r hew nfr erme-y hey bpr twen p'e-n hrw
3999	mh snw te N('y)-nfr-k-Pth
4000	1.24. In Eg.rs seems only adj., the subst. being qme. N.B.rs without
4001	article ; so also in O. C. Par. Єрнс .... єпємедIT (cf. l. 21) Ä.Z.
4002	93, 100, 1.46.
4003	It will be observed that the edges of the lacuna in Il. 24-26 are
4004	brought too close together on the facsimile. For the restorations see the
4005	parallel vi. 7,8.
4006	e bp-y hrr (eeeп/2p0xp). Although it is quite possible to
4007	translate (Є2eПI, ST., § 435) ' I not having delayed,'i.e. 'without delay,'
4008	e bp occurs so constantly in I Kh. after a future that it may perhaps be
4009	interpreted as a negative conjunctive to the future, just as mte, NT€, is
4010	the positive conjunctive; cf. v. 9, Io. But in v. 5, 8 we seem to have
4011	e nn e for the negative future conjunctive. e bp-f in such instances seems
4012	exactly parallel to Late Eg. nn n-f in Verbum, ii. § 563, and this suggests
4013	that the Late Eg. past neg. br pu-f, eenec may also be an un-
4014	etymological spelling of nn n-f, 'not (was there) to him' followed by the
4015	infinitive.
4016	e/ (from Eg. er) probably allied to w) •lift up,' 'take away,' but
4017	the sense is absolutely that of theintransitive&2e:&2HI(to which S.
4018	elur is probably the qual. and T&2o the caus.) 'go on board'
4019	a ship, 'mount' a horse, 'climb' a rock (Z. 15). In vi. y we have 'he
4020	went up thence' (from the shore to the town). Cf. Hist. Rom. Gloss.,
4021	No.7,where thespellingle,/eshows more clearly its identity with
4022	&nE. In Kufi, xvii.27 the same group e/ spells wod.
4023	r mr-t, "to ship-board,' " on board' (so also II Kh. v. 6, Hist. Rom.,
4024	No. 124); cf. hr mr.t, 'on board,' iv. 9, 14, 20. The change of meaning
4025	of mr.t in these nautical terms from 'board-ship' to 'far shore, ' other
4026	side,' in єленр, дiяeнp is curious.
p. 117
4027	CH. V] 1 КH. III. 24-27 99
4028	24. with Mer-ab, her child] to the South with me.
4029	I will bring this book not having delayed.' The pleasure-
4030	boat of Pharaoh was given him with its equipment, we
4031	went aboard upon it, we made sail, we reached
4032	25. Coptos, report] of it [was made] unto the priests
4033	of Isis of Coptos, and the chief priest of Isis. They
4034	came down to meet us, they went straight to meet
4035	Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah, their' women came down to meet
4036	me myselt.
4037	26. We went up from the shore, we went into] the
4038	temple of Isis and Harpochrates. Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah
4039	caused to be brought ox, goose, wine; he made
4040	offering and libation before Isis of Coptos and Harpo-
4041	chrates. They took us to a house beautiful exceedingly.
4042	27.......... Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah spent four
4043	daysmaking holiday with the priests of Isis of Coptos,
4044	the women of the priests of Isis making holiday with
4045	me myself. There came the morning of our next day,
4046	Nenefer-ka-Ptah caused
4047	sgr, cбнр, from I Kh. might seem to he used specifically of
4048	' going up stream,' Eg. hnl; hut in Hist. Rom. (No. 275) it does not
4049	specify direction, cf. «уОнр єДнт (Z. 23, Il. 32-3).
4050	1. 25. For the restoration vid. vi.7.
4051	mr šn ápxiepeús, Ros., l. 4 and Can.=hacy&me (?), cf. P.S. B.A.,
4052	Nov. 1899, p. 271.
4053	r hº.1-11, S. E&HTI (rare), ST.. $565 ad fin.; r l h./ n N.=
4054	ET&H I N., but with different meaning, St., §§ 516, 575.
4055	mureeecoteom5
4056	1. 26. opt.; see the plur. in l. 13. 'The singular, 'bird' or 'goose,'
4057	occurs in hieroglyphs as the name of a star, L., D. ili, 227 a,b;
4058	=WBT, PEYrON, and KRALL, Rainer, Kopt. Urk. i, p. 187.
4059	glyl wlne, Buoias kni oromis. Ros., 1.29. gll (I1 Kh. klyl) with
4060	det. of fire, O31a. The Heb. Sa "burnt-offering, is borrowed from
4061	the Eg. according 1o Grorr, Les deux sièles de Canope, p. 6. Il may
4062	be derived from an old hieroglyphic word grr, "burn' (poltery), in very
4063	late times =' offering." As 'burnt-offerings' were almost unknown in
4064	Egypt, probably the word refers io the burning of incense which always
4065	accompanied sacrifices from the carliest times.
4066	1.27.mhsmu= ueee&2 B: S1.§ 284.
4067	1 2
p. 118
4068	IOO TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. I1
4069	28.nwmah e-f5e-f]web e-y-hr-f rf we rms
4070	se-f mh n n'e-f hnw 'erme n'e-f hytw š-f sh v-r-w
4071	te-f enk-w te-f n-w tw hwy-f (s)st r p' ym mh-f t
4072	shr[e•d] Pr-s? n še
4073	29.......... Hf r mrt hmsy hr zơ p' ym
4074	n Qbt hey zl e-y gm p'nt e-f r hpr no'm-f zt-f n'
4075	hn•w (?) hn-se hrrhr-y š p' m'() nt e p'y zme
4076	30. n-m-f hn-w se hr(rr)-fn grh] m qty mre pory-f
4077	ph rr-f n hrw hmt hwy-f š het-t bpr ws wš n yr
4078	gop-fgm we or n hf whet ztft nb.t n p qte
4079	31. n p' pr? nt e p' zmg hn-f pog-f gm we hf n
4080	zit n p'qte n t' tbet n rn-se š-f shr prn hf whet
4081	ztfit nb-t nt n p'qte n t'tbet bp-f ty p'y-w
4082	32. šm-f r p' m'(e) nt e p'hlf n zit nom-f r-f qnqne
4083	serme-f htb-f se inh-f r-f p'e-f gy en "r-f qnqne 'erme-f
4084	"n r mh sp Il htb-f se inh-f en ?r-f
4085	1. 28. For the restoration cf. II Kh. v. 1g.
4086	Can e-r-hr-f be in origin a participle, or an inf. dependent on r
4087	"to': 'to make (or making) his face'? Note that prepositional phrases
4088	usually follow the direct object; hence the long separation from the verb
4089	in the present instance; cf. iv. 4, and e ar n-f, II Kh. vi. 35.
4090	rms, in Hist. Rom., No. 177, is a vessel used for transport of
4091	soldiers. In Lond. Gnost. vi. 3r the rms of Osiris with Isis and
4092	Nephthys is mentioned. In Late Eg. Spiegelberg finds rsmw (Corresp.,
4093	p.230); rms occurs in the Roman Sign Papyrus, p. xix, 1. 5.
4094	hn-w. This dem. group corresponds to hn, ' row,' Br., Wtb. 1104,
4095	esp. Rh. bil. pap. xxvi. 5• Another dem. form of hn (see BR., Wtb. l.c.)
4096	is used in spelling hnt, 'be near,' in II Kh. ii. 8; and in Kufi, ix. 19
4097	hney.w, "rowers, seems clearly spelt with that group, thus confirming the
4098	value here.
4099	hylor. The his read in all the hand copies, but is imperfect and
4100	not quite certain. PEYRoN, Gr., gives S. ¿0THT 'sailor,' perhaps
4101	' pilot': Ezech. xxvii. 29. Cf. EP2WT navigare, and in Eg. there
4102	is hre•lir (with h), Br., Wtb. Suppl. 8o0; PLeYtE, Pap. de Turin,
4103	Pl. 44. hy-w, Rec. de trav. xvii. 158 leaves the / unexplained.
4104	1W; see MüLLER, A. Z., 1886, 86.
4105	hwwy 21081; in Pap. Unuamon, ii. 74 already spelt hre; see
4106	Verbum, i. § 397, 1o for various forms: here "launch'?
4107	1. 29. hr 2i; for It to be supplied in 2IxeM, cf. note to erme, 1. I;
4108	дIхen фroee, Sт., § 553, 2.
p. 119
4109	CH. V] 1 KH. III. 28-32 IOI
4110	28. to be brought wax much and] pure unto him,
4111	he made a boat, filled with its rowers and its navi-
4112	gators (?). He read a spell to them, he made them
4113	live, he gave to them breath, he cast them into the
4114	sea. He filled the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh with sand.
4115	29.......... he went] on board. I sat over
4116	the sea of Coptos myself, saying, 'I will find out what
4117	will become of him.' He said, 'Rowers, row it, carrying
4118	me to the place which this book is
4119	30. in it.' They rowed it carrying him by night] as
4120	midday. And lo! he reached it in three days, he cast
4121	sand before him, there became a gap of river. And
4122	lo! he found a schoenus of every kind of serpent,
4123	scorpion, and reptile around
4124	31. [the place (?)] in which [was this book], and lo!
4125	he found an endless snake around the box named. He
4126	pronounced a spell against the schoenus of every kind
4127	of snake, scorpion, and reptile that was around the box,
4128	he allowed them not to leap up.
4129	32. He went to the place] in which [was the] endless
4130	[snake]. He fought with it, he slew it—it lived, it made
4131	its form again. He fought with it again a second time.
4132	He slew it, it lived again. He
4133	D& is regularly used of the freight of a vessel; cf. Pap. Unuamon,
4134	i.x+ 23-3.
4135	1. 30. For the restoration see 1. 38.
4136	mgly; before a suffix this word ends with1, see iv. 21. COT
4137	differs in fem. gender and in its use with the article, but may perhaps be
4138	derived from qly.
4139	mre, lit. 'mid-day, but in Coptic nxwpe neee reepi=' night
4140	and day'; cf. II Kh. ii, 18.
4141	p.1-J; cf.iv. 34, as S. &HTG, ST.,§ 565. Contrast r 1e-6, l. 25.
4142	zš, wšr örwcy, I.
4143	1.31. Restored from l.1g with pr (cf. iv. 6) instead of /be.l. hn-f seems
4144	to require pr since mºe, 'place' takes nºm-f. The form ПДнту із
4145	found in Gnost., but apparently not earlier.
4146	1.32. ?r.fpe-fgyen; cr. Ros.,1.20, de-for klhd p'r-w sy.
4147	or-f yayne. sdm-f is not admitted in quadriliteral verhs in Late
p. 120
4148	102 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 1I
4149	33. qnqne ? 'erme-f n r mh sp] IIl "r-f se n šst•t
4150	Il•t te-f se wt sst-t erme t'e-se r•t mt-f] op-f r p'e-f
4151	gy r šwe šm N('y)-nfr-k'-Pth r p' m'() nt e t? tbet
4152	n•m-f
4153	34. gm-f se wet tbet n] bnpy t'y wn-f rr-se gm-f
4154	wr.t tbet n hmt wn-f y.r-se gm-f wet tbet n ht n qtet
4155	wn-f rr-se gm-f wrt tbet n yb hbyn
4156	35. wn-f rr-se gm-f wet tbet n] ht wn-f rr-se gm-f
4157	wr.t tbet n nb wn-f rr-se gm-f p' zm[] hn-se n-f p
4158	zme r hry hn t' tbetnnb š-f wehp nsh nom-f
4159	36. phre-ft p p' t t tt n] tww n' ymw g'm-f
4160	n'at e n''ptwo n t'p'erme n'rym.[w n] p'mty n'
4161	ywt (?) n p' tw zt nom-w tr-w š-f ky hpe n sh nwe-f
4162	37. r p' R°e-fhentperme t'e-f p ntrw] 'erme
4163	p' sh e-f won 'erme n' syww n p'e-w gy nwe-fr n
4164	rym•w n p' mty e wn nht-ntr wh n mw hr 2z-w (š-f
4165	shrp (?)
4166	Eg.; cf. Verbum ii, § 194, and II Kh. i. 1o s-nh; ii. y snsn. or-f is
4167	quite distinct from ror-f noticed in 1.6.
4168	htb, fully spelled out in Hist. Rom. Gloss., No. 245.
4169	1.33.3r-f se nfe%t, a good instance of this use of r showing that the
4170	common marriage formula is to be read r-y l-t n hm-t, 'I have made
4171	thee wife!
4172	5%(written with knife and arm), Late Eg. jed, probably confused
4173	with hl, 'engrave.' In dem. the group means both ' cut' and ' engrave?
4174	mi-f. The remains suit the group ml (Br., Wtb. 730), which is
4175	required by the context to oppose to enh-f after the previous contests.
4176	r Swe only after negative, Il Kh. ii. 7, 22, vi. 2 seems to have det.
4177	of time 'again': connect perhaps with šw•l, 'shadow' or šw, 'emply,'
4178	so lit. 'to a shadow,' cf. Fr. pas.
4179	1. 34. Perhaps kšp-f, ' he looked,' cf. II Kh. i. 16, may have preceded
4180	the words in the text, cf. Ach. «0nTe оrezЛяcс& пки2т
4181	TE 'I found it a sea of fire,' STD., Elias, A. vii. 8-g.
4182	1. 35. r hry hn; St., § 556, ad fin., p. 372.
4183	es-fwehp...n.m-f illustrates the use ofes with and without n; cf.
4184	above, note to l. 12.
4185	1. 36. Xw eeewot, so also iv. ı; but in ili. 13, В. ЄTЄХОТ08.
4186	1. 37. The restoration from parallel passages must be shortened,
4187	probably by leaving out the last phrase.
4188	e un nigl-ntr, &c.; cr. iv. 3, 10, 14.
p. 121
4189	CH. V] 1 КН. III. 33-37 103
4190	33. fought with it again a] third [time]. He made it
4191	in two pieces, he put sand between a piece and its
4192	fellow. It died, it did not make its form ever again.
4193	Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah went to the place in which the box was
4194	34. he found that it] was [a box of] iron. He opened
4195	it, he found a box of bronze. He opened it, he
4196	found a box of qete-wood. He opened it, he found
4197	a box of ivory and ebony.
4198	35. He opened it, he found a box of] silver. He
4199	opened it, he found a box of gold. He opened it,
4200	he found the book in it, he took the book up from
4201	the box of gold. He read a formula of writing in it,
4202	36. he enchanted heaven, earth, the underworld,
4203	the] mountains, the seas; he found of what the birds
4204	of the heaven with the fishes of the deep, the animals
4205	of the mountain spake, all. He read another formula
4206	of writing he saw
4207	37. the Sun rising in heaven, with his cycle of gods,]
4208	and the Moon rising, and the stars in their form; he
4209	saw the fishes of the deep, there being divine power
4210	resting in water over them. He read a writing to the
4211	nl-nir; in the parallels nhi n nir, 'divine power' Here we seem
4212	to have nh(1) written with weak 1, as opposed to nhi in iv. 7 with the
4213	final / repeated. It is perhaps the same word that in Gnost. is spelt
4214	out n°5, 'power' =S. M&CY, STHC posse (PEYRON). In Gnost., Lond.
4215	and Leyd., there is mention of p' nºš n po nir, 'the power of the god,"
4216	vid. HEss, London Gnost., s.v. n°%. In I Kh. there is never any article
4217	with this word: on the other hand, the Nil of iv. 7, g.v., is a definite entity
4218	or personality, a Power, Súvajus, or angel, and has the article.
4219	wh; to read this p-w is impossible as it does not change with the
4220	object which would be ist pers. sing. in iv. 14, 3rd pers. sing. in iv. 10.
4221	The reading wh, which seems probable in itself (cf. the form in L.ond.
4222	Gnost. Gloss.), is provedby vi. 4.Apparently itis herethe qual O7HS
4223	"dwelling,'"resting.' In iv. 1o this word is slightly misplaced.
4224	nmw. No article in any of the parallels. Probably w0/e-p-mu is
4225	simply an expression for 'floating.'
4226	her 2'3-w. The parallel passages have Pe.w (Pc), Pc) gad hugol,
4227	'their (his, my) upper side.'
4228	The line apparently ends with a superfluous stroke.
p. 122
4229	104 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 1I
4230	38. mw te-f "r-f p'e-f gy en? i-f r mrt zt-f n n'
4231	hn•w hn hr r hr-y s° p' m'(s) nt (?) [e-f hn se (?) r]r-w
4232	hn-w hr(rr)-fn grh m gty mre goy-f ph-y (sic) r p'
4233	m'() nt e-y
4234	39. n•'m-f gm-f t-y e-y hms] hr zz n p' ym n Obt
4235	e bp-y sur wm e bp-y "r mt nbit n p't' e-y n smte n
4236	rmt e ph-f r Pr-nfr zt-y n N(y)-nfr-k-Pth
4237	40...• :.....m]y nwe-y r p'y zme r.šp-n n'y(y)
4238	hyytw [y•w?] tb•t-f te-f p' zm'n tt-y e-y we hpe n
4239	sh nom-f phr-y
4240	41. t'p
4241	mh IV
4242	1. phr-y t pp'tt tt n' tww n' ymw gm-y n' nt
4243	e n''ptw nt p n' rym•w n p'mty 'erme n' 'y-wt(?) zl
4244	n•'m'w tr-w "š-y ky
4245	2. hpensh nweyr p'R'e-fhy nt'perme t'et p'
4246	ntr.w nwe-y r p h e-f won erme n'syww nt' p
4247	tr-w erme p'e-w gy nwe-y r n'
4248	3. rym-w n p' mty e wn nht n ntr wh n mw t'e-w
4249	ry.t hryt e be r-y sh wn(n'y) e-y zt r N(y)-nfr-k?-Pth
4250	1.38. There is no authority for the first part of the restoration at the
4251	beginning, but it seems probable.
4252	The gap in the middle of the line is difficult to fill. The change of
4253	person suggested in the restoration is not usual.
4254	ph-y can hardly have been intended for 'reach me'; it is certainly
4255	a mistake.
4256	1.39. sr wum (for rem see v.17, 27) with only one negative is quite
4257	correct, see Il Kh. ili. 6-7. For wm in Eg. see Hieroglyphs, PP. 37, 67.
4258	smle. In many texts both early and late, e.g. Ros. and Hist. Rom.
4259	creOT is regularly spelled out, and by its use its identity with this
4260	group is quite clear.
4261	e ph-f relative past with indef. antecedent forming the subject of the
4262	relative sentence, E&gCWTEll. Not found with this use in Late Eg.
4263	Cf. ERM., N. A. G., §§ 195 et seqq. for similar forms.
4264	1. 40. r•sp-n=єТ&псушп; relative with definile antecedent, not the
4265	subject of the sentence.
4266	hyyt•w. šp hyyl, cf. vi. 4, seems to mean 'undertake labour'
4267	hyjt (fem.) appears to have no Coptic derivative.
p. 123
4268	CH. V] 1 KH. III. 38-IV. з 105
4269	38. water (f), he caused it to take its form again (?).
4270	He went on bojard, he said to the rowers, 'Row carrying
4271	me to the place which [he commanded] them (?)! They
4272	rowed carrying him by night as midday. And lo! he
4273	arrived at the place which I was
4274	39. in it, he found me sitting] over the sea of Coptos,
4275	not having drank nor eaten, not having done anything
4276	on earth, being in the form of a man that has reached
4277	the Good House. I said to Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah
4278	40.......... let (?) me see this book for which
4279	we have taken these pains ...... He put the book
4280	in my hand, I read a formula of writing in it, I enchanted
4281	41. the heaven.
4282	Fourth
4283	1. I enchanted the heaven, the earth, the underworld,
4284	the mountains, the seas; I discovered the things that
4285	the birds of the heaven, the fishes of the sea and the
4286	animals say, all. I read another [
4287	2. formula of writing; I saw the Sun rising in heaven,
4288	with his cycle of gods; I saw the Moon rising with
4289	all the stars in heaven with their nature; I saw the
4290	3. fishes in the deep, there being power of god
4291	resting in water over them. I not doing writing,-l
4292	The mark above the plural sign following hyyt must be the end of
4293	a thick stroke, such as occurs in wiy, 'these, &c. It may possibly stand
4294	for » p' ", 'of the world,' which occurs in II Kh. ii. 9; ili. 22 in the
4295	phrases myh n p l, 'wonder of the world, pryn por,'joy of the
4296	world.
4297	1. I. sy-zer(?). Eg. "w-l, Late Eg.p°(20)l, Pap. D'Orb.8. 1.
4298	1. 3. be sr; aorist reєpe: лепaре, St., § 396. See Verbum, ii,
4299	§§ 989 et segg. for origin of negative aorist. Apparently Ereєpe is in
4300	Coptic used only as attribute to a noun (ST., § 433), not absolutely as
4301	here. Cf. also note to l.12.
4302	zenn'y e-f seems to represent Late Eg. wn-s, wnef (et sim.,
4303	Verbum, ii, 356) = ЄNЄ4, пєд: м&с, St., § 373; STD., § 272; the
4304	ЛE which often follows is a Coptic addition. The Boh. M&c secms
p. 124
4305	тоб TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 11
4306	p'e sn" nt e sh nfr rmt rhmšs p'y te-f n-w we.t
4307	set•l
4308	4. n zme n m'y e-r-hr-f sh-f mt nbit gzn(n'y) hr
4309	p' zmr e-y-hr-f tr-w te-f mh-f n hngle] wty-f se hr
4310	mw rh-f se e hr-f wyt swr-f se rh-f r p'y wn(n'y)
4311	e-f nom-f•
4312	5. st-n r Qbt n p' hrw n rn-f "r-n hew nfr m bh
4313	'S n Qbt Hr-p'-hrt &-n r mrt hty-n ph-n p(r)-mht n
4314	Qbt n 'r Iss? hr Thwt gm mt nbt or hpr n
4315	an irregular vocalization due perhaps to the relative form. A distinct r
4316	(not n) follows &t, and can only be the r of relation or comparison:
4317	cf. Poème Sat. v. I wnne e-y zi-s r n' gnow por-f, 'l was speaking in
4318	regard to the failures (?) that he made'
4319	1.'4. r m'y; cf. Hess, p. 66 for the reading.
4320	g.wnny; cf. l. 7; past participle, in Late Eg. wnze et sim. without
4321	prosthetic alif (Verbum, ii, §§ 86z, 879, imperfect active participle).
4322	The y seems false, indicating only the € remaining from the initial zu
4323	in wnw=S. ENE as attribute, St., § 428 ad init., e.g. ПEOOT ЄNЄ
4324	OrNT&r9 2&8THK, &c. Il Kh. writes the word more correctly
4325	without the r, vid. II Kh. v. 3.
4326	e-y-hur-f should perhaps be omitted?
4327	le-f mh-f; cf. iii. 6 note.
4328	hng; cf. Hess, p. 67. Eg. hgt, fem. 2EeeKI: 2 NKE (PEYRON,
4329	Gr. and Auct.) masc.
4330	wly...wyt, S. OTEITE TKErOaL, OVET-MaлaкúvEw (PEYRON).
4331	rh-f. It is easy to distinguish rh, "r-rh, 'know,' ' perceive,' "ascertain'
4332	from the same verb rh (in the infinitive only), 'be able' The forms are
4333	(I) of 'know': rh-f, 'he perceived,' here and II Kh. vi. 21, 27; rlg,
4334	'ascertain !' I Kh. iv. 6 ; v. 1: otherwise r-rh, viz. te-f ar-rh-f, ' he caused
4335	him to know, II Kh. i. 9; iii. 8 (but my rh-y, " let me learn,' II Kh. v.9);
4336	e bor-rh-f, 'he not knowing,' *eeeєcy&g, I Kh. iv. 21; II Kh. ili. 7;
4337	3g-k °r-rl-s, Ist (?) pres., I Kh. vi. 3, 11 ; e-y sy-rh, 'I knowing' (qualitative),
4338	Il Kh. ii. 15. (2) Of 'be able,' cy : ecy, Achm. &, infinitive only,
4339	always written rh: e-y (EIEP) r}, 'I shall be (?) able, I Kh. iv. 18;
4340	Il Kh. iii. 17; e-f r rh, 'he will be able, II Kh.ii.25, &c.; nne-f rh.
4341	'he will not be able, Il Kh. vi. I, 21 (with nominal subject nne rh N. in
4342	contracts, passim, as ney 21s goneeox, St., § 455)—all the
4343	above future in expression though present in meaning. bp-f rh, 'he was
4344	not able,' 1 Kh. v. 32 ; II Kh. v. 35 ; e-f rh, 'he being able,' II Kh. ii. 3I.
4345	As to the pronunciation of the former bw rh-f is especially common in
4346	Late Egyptian (Verbum, ii, 8989) and b3y-rh-f (not bor-f rh!) can only
4347	represent this, = eeecy&c (ERM., A. Z. 94, 129). The introduction of
p. 125
4348	CH. V] 1 KH. IV. 3-5 107
4349	mean (in comparison) to Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah my elder
4350	brother, who was a good scribe and learned man
4351	exceedingly—he caused to be brought a piece
4352	4. of new papyrus unto him. He wrote every word
4353	that was on the roll (before him), all. He caused it
4354	to be soaked with beer (?), he melted it in (?) water,
4355	he ascertained that it was melted he drank it, he knew
4356	according to that in which it was contained (?).
4357	5. We returned to Coptos on the day named. We
4358	made a good day before Isis of Coptos and Harpo-
4359	chrates. We embarked on board, we travelled down,
4360	we reached the north of Coptos by one schoenus.
4361	Behold Thoth had (?) learned everything that had
4362	become of
4363	"p may be due to the common bw r-f = eeey, in which or has lost all
4364	sound (unless it be €). The question remains whether or is silent in the
4365	other forms, and merely a means of distinguishing 'know' from ' be able,'
4366	or does r +rh=P+ CY, indicating the preservation of the r? cf. pwcys
4367	"judge'; pacy : parcy; pucy 'measure' (unfortunately none of
4368	these occur in Achmimic by whichthe question whether the cy=5 or 1
4369	could be decided). See notes to Il. 6, 37.
4370	e hr-f wyt, verbal attribute E&g...;cf.iii. ar note ad fin. For
4371	a close parallel see Kufi, xviii. 7, rh-f s r hr-y st hr ll-y snh, 'he recog-
4372	nized with regard to (?) me, that my paw was entangled': note e lurs
4373	before suffixes, lur before nouns (?).
4374	rh-fr. The r is difficult; cf. the last guotation.
4375	py wunny e-f n.m-f, something like nar eneg eeeeog, Sт.,
4376	$ 428, 'this that it consisted of,' or 'this (book) in which it was.' Cf.
4377	1.21.
4378	1. 5. st, 'return,' Eg. s0, st, 'drag,' "draw'; in dem. usually intrans.
4379	as here, but with reflexive pronoun in v. 5; II Kh. vi. I, 29; transitive
4380	also ib. vi. 31. Cf. caus. T&CeO. CWT redimere is derived from it,
4381	being similarly written in dem. contracts, e.g. Hess, p. 98.
4382	hly from Eg. lyd (Illae inf., Verbum, i, p. 238), ' descend river,' ' go
4383	north, D&T 'flow down' (of river); cf. DHT 'north'
4384	es must be interjectional, and can hardly be anything else than F.g.
4385	ys, EIC 'lo!' For an investigation of the word see SPIEGELBERG, A.Z.
4386	99,39-43
4387	es her Thwl gm. Here the form is evidendly influenced by es. gm
4388	Thwl, gm-f wouldbe the ordinary narralive form,"r T/re/ gm, r.or.f 59
p. 126
4389	108 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. I1
4390	6. (n) (sic) N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth tb p' zms bp Thwt hrr
4391	s'my-f m-oh p' R‹ zt r p'e hp te wpyt 'erme
4392	N('y)-nfr-k-Pth p' šre n Pr-s Mr-...Pth? šm-f r
4393	p'e pr
4394	7. Kl-f se o-f t'e tbet hr t'-e 'net? htb-f p'-e mnet
4395	g-wn(n'y) hrh rs-f zl-w n-f e-f er-hr-k erme rmt nb
4396	nt mte-f tr-w wt-w we Nht n ntr r hry
4397	8.nt pzt mr ty šm N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth r Mn-nfr
4398	e-f wz erme rmt nb nt mte-f tr-w wr.t wnet t' eor
4399	kpr Mr-b p' hm hl wr bl hr t' bybt n t' shret
4400	9. Prc hyfr p'yr y-f hst p' Roes rmt nb rwn
4401	the emphatic form (iii. 6, 7), and here in the emphatic form hr replaces
4402	•r on account of the interjection es: so also in II Kh. vi. 13, probably
4403	on account of the relative nt in an emphatic past relative sentence (in
4404	Il Kh. iv. 28, probably faulty). For e hr-f sim, hr N. stm, past verbal
4405	attributive, see ili. 21; iv. 4 note. In the very late inscriptions of Philae,
4406	Br., Thes, 1009, &c., the narrative is regularly hr-f stm, hr N. stm: either
4407	this is for emphasis in the boastful style of the inscriptions, like r.or-f slm,
4408	or indicates that 2&9 (CRum, Ä. Z., 1898, 139), &CJ was now to be
4409	considered the ordinary narrative form. Some connexion between hr-f
4410	slm, and the Late Eg. yw-f hr sim may be suspected, but the hr may be
4411	quite unetymological.
4412	orhpr; cf.or ly, ili. 3 note.
4413	1. 6. s•my-f cEMeeeE: CEes means 'appear before a person to
4414	intercede for,' or 'accuse': "intercede before,' accuse to' ; cf. 1. 10
4415	'accusation'
4416	r/z, 'ascertain,' as in iv. 4; v. I. Another instance, mutilated, of the
4417	technical legal usage occurs in the complaint of the Cat to Ra, Kufi, iii. 2.
4418	So also pwiye: pwcys judicially önreoda; see Acts xviii. 15; Matt.
4419	xxvii. 4 (TATTAM).
4420	wpy.t; for its judicial sense see BR., Wtb. Suppl. 57.
4421	presumably " BPld: The sha read eut may be only the ouct, of t.c.
4422	preceding group.
4423	pr cf.Tili. 31?]. It here would mean a small separate building, so
4424	also in v. 13 'kiosque' (?). In v. 28 it is rather a chamber in the house.
4425	1. 7. "ne•1(?) is the reading suggested in Hess, pp. x44-5. zopy-4,
4426	Ä. Z. 97, 148 is certainly wrong. The word is very common in
4427	contracts, but the meaning is not quite clear.
4428	mnel=eenoxT (as RevILLout and HEss), curiously written with
4429	the complete group for mne, 'remain,, followed by / and det.
p. 127
4430	CH. v] 1 KH. IV. 6-9 109
4431	6. (of) Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah about the book. Thoth did
4432	not delay. He pleaded before the Sun saying, 'Know
4433	my right and my judgement (?) with Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah
4434	the son of Pharaoh Mer-neb(?)-Ptah (?). He went to
4435	my chamber
4436	7. he plundered it, he took my box with my
4437	document (?). He slew my custodian that was guarding
4438	it. They said to him, 'He is before thee with every
4439	person belonging to him, all!' A Power of God was
4440	sent down
4441	8. from heaven, saying, 'Do not allow Ne-nefer-ka-
4442	Ptah to go to Memphis, he prospering with every person
4443	belonging to him, all. At a moment, that which happened,
4444	Mer-ab the child came out from under the shade of the
4445	pleasure-boat
4446	9. of Pharaoh. He fell into the river, he did the
4447	will of Ra. Every person that was on board uttered
4448	gst&&p&k ist pres. Late Eg, t-f, ERM. N. A. G. § 20g. Cf.
4449	sl (CE) r f'e sre, Il Kh. ili. 5.
4450	wl, Late Eg. wd, e. g. Pap. Unuamon, i.x+ 5.
4451	Nht *vexarıs, vid. Hess, note on p. 73, with det. prefix of divinity
4452	like spd-d, "Sothis' in hieroglyphs, BR., Thes. 1564. For instances of
4453	N'hl cf. Hess, Lond. Gnost. Gloss., S.v.; Kufi, vili. 33—ix. 5 (cf. ili. 37).
4454	1.8. m »r; Eвм. N. A. G., § 279 leПp; but m or ly would be m dyl in
4455	Late Eg.
4456	" eor hpr seems in apposition to we./ wne-l, which as an expression
4457	of time may not require a preposition. Thus the phrase would perhaps
4458	mean 'at a certain moment.' But from the instancesv.3r, Il Kh.i.15,
4459	one would suspect it to mean 'at that moment' Hess translates "Eine
4460	Stunde dauerte dies' Apparently there is a somewhat similar construc-
4461	tion in II Kh. iv. 21, ny say S-Sr, &c. The meaning in the two cases
4462	may be approximately 'a moment having passed, and 'these words
4463	having been said, lit. 'a moment, being that which had happened,' and
4464	• these words, Si-Osiri being he that had been (engaged) in them' These
4465	expressions always introduce a sudden development or interruption in
4466	the narrative. [f'er, p'ni'r are perhaps rather predicative, like ПET-,
4467	ST., § 306 ; STD., §§ 508-12, 'a time (?) it was that passed.']
4468	1.g.hs-l,evidenily the old expression for what is "praised by" or
4469	' pleasing to' god, king, &c.
p. 128
4470	IIO TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
4471	(n'y)hr mrtsgptr-w N(y)-nfr-k-Pth wr blhr t'e-f
4472	hbet š-f sh rr-f te-f p'y-f e wn
4473	10. nlt n ntr n mw wh t'e-f ryt hry.t eš-f sh rr-f
4474	te-f szy-f e r hr-f n mt nb•t r-hpr no'm-f tr-w erme
4475	P' gy n smy gor Thwt m-bh p' Rs st-n r Qbte
4476	erme-f
4477	11. te-n 0-w se r Pr-nfr te-n chr-w wbe-f te-n qs-w
4478	se r hit hry rmt «? te-n htp-f hn t'e-f tybt hr t' hset
4479	nQbte zt N('y)-nfr-k?-Pth p'e sn
4480	12. my bty-n m'r ty or-n hrr be'r Pr-s stm n' mt-wt
4481	rhpr nom-n mte ht-f the tbt-s 9-n r mrt hty-n
4482	bp-n hrr p(r) mhtn
4483	13. Qbtnr1 p' m()nhy por Mr-b p' hm hl r
4484	p' yr nom-f te-y wr bl br t' hyb-t n t shret Pr-ss
4485	hyy r p' yr rr-y
4486	Jer mr.l, cf. note on ili. 24.
4487	sgp, В. сук&П; e* sgp, Achm. «суб&n; Ä. Z. 86, 117; STD.,
4488	Elias, p. 37, note 4; cf. Pap. Unuamon, ii. 13, e$ sg°p.
4489	hbe-l, Eg. hby-t, 'festal tent,' S. 2BW oknun; PEYRON, Gr. 191.
4490	1. Io. n mw wh, 'a power of god of (?) water.' The n is evidently added
4491	after an accidental omission. Probably the passage should be corrected
4492	to wh n mw to agree with the parallels; cf. iii. 37.
4493	gy n s•my, S. OINCeeeLE(T) accusatio; BsCIAI, Ä. Z. 87, 68.
4494	1. 11. &ge orße is 'resist,' PEYRON, p. 16; but here the meaning
4495	must be different.
4496	h-%, perhaps from Eg. h-t, 'body,' takes suffixes in r h•t, 'like? It
4497	literally means 'copy, cf. II Kh. v. 13, also with suffixes, whence S. QE,
4498	Achm. ge (fem.) 'style,' which however takes the article. Cf. the
4499	probable history of GoT, ili. 30.
4500	hry; cf. II Kh. ili. 29, &c.
4501	rmt "=p&ee&o 'rich man."
4502	tyb.t, 'sarcophagus, with det. of stone= T&1Be(T); distinct from
4503	tbe-t, 'box,' iii. 17 THBE(T).
4504	1. I2. my hty-n, m or ly "y-n2; note the optative and its negative
4505	яепр треп-, Sт., § 398.
4506	bor in dem. ofien =neg. praes. consuet. eeepe-, Achm. ee&-,
4507	Late Eg. bu yr; Verbum, ii, § 989, above l. 3. But in proverbs, &c.
4508	e.g. Dem. Provs. i. 3, 14; ii. I, the negative of the final is often 63r-f stm,
4509	as here; and in II Kh. iv. 4 the same form seems rather negative optative.
4510	In Late Eg. bu is a usual negative before sdm-f, but I do not find it in
p. 129
4511	CH. V] 1 KH. IV. 9-13 III •
4512	a cry, all. Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah came out from under his
4513	tent, he spake a writing to him, he made him leap
4514	up, there being
4515	10. power of god as (?) water resting upon (?) him.
4516	He spake a writing to him, hẹ caused him to relate
4517	before him everything that had become of him, all,
4518	with the accusation that Thoth made before Ra. We
4519	returned to Coptos with him.
4520	11. We caused him to be taken to the Good House,
4521	we caused them to stand opposite (?) him, we caused
4522	him to be embalmed in the style of a Prince and
4523	nobleman. We caused him to rest in his sarcophagus
4524	on the gebel of Coptos. Said Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah my
4525	brother
4526	12. 'Let us voyage down, cause us not to delay;
4527	lest Pharaoh hear the things that have become of
4528	us, and his heart be grieved because of it.' We
4529	went up on board, we voyaged down, we did not
4530	delay (going) to the north of
4531	13. Coptos by one schoenus, the place of falling that
4532	Mer-ab the child made into the river therein. I came
4533	out from under the awning of the pleasure-boat of
4534	Pharaoh. 1 fell into the river, I did
4535	optative or final clauses; nor is eeegcwTele used in Coptic with
4536	such a meaning. On the other hand & r-f bears a singular resemblance
4537	to the rare m sdm-f of the Pyramid Texts. The instances of the latter
4538	(Verbum,ii,§1014, second half) canbe fairly interpreted as final and
4539	perhaps optative. ym-f sdm (ib. § 1010) also had these meanings and
4540	has left a trace in the formal •schnol literature' of New Egyptian. Thus
4541	B 'r-f slm as a final or cptalive (?) is apparently an artificia' periphrasis
4542	formed upon the Old Eg.m sdm-f and with the same uses. The further
4543	question whether it is really identical in form with the praes. cons.
4544	Bsr-f sim needs investigation.
4545	1. 13. P° n'e nhy rap; cf. v. 37, and note the variant, l. 1y below,
4546	which shows that its meaning is different from ee&it-, Sr.§ 181.
4547	Apart from etymology See&i-seems more closely rendered in dem.
4548	with "y (HI) than with m'r; see note to l. 25 below.
4549	hy ror; cf. Verbum, ii, § 585.2 for this form in Late F.g.
p. 130
4550	II2 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 1I
4551	14. hst p' Re s rmt nbt pwn(n'y) hr mrt sgpe
4552	tr-w z/-w se n N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth e-f w r bl hr t bybt
4553	n t' shret Pr-e eš-f sh r hr-y te-f p'y-y e wn nht
4554	n ntr wh
4555	15.1mw t-e rythrytte-fn-wt-y rhry s-fsh
4556	r hr-y te-f szy-y eir hr-f n mt nb.t r-hpr nom-y tr-w
4557	erme p'gy n smy yor Thwt m bh p' Rr st-fr Qbt
4558	erme-y
4559	16. te-f de-w t-y r Pr-nfr te-f che-w wbe-y te-f qs-w
4560	t-y n gst n hry rmt " m šs te-f htp-y hn t' hitnt e
4561	Mr-b p hm hl htp hn-se
4562	I7. Sl-f r mrt hty-f bp-f hrr p(r)-mht n Obt nr I
4563	r p' m'() rhy-n r p' yr nom-f mt-f erme het-f zt 'n e-y
4564	rhšm r Qbt mte-y
4565	18. hms n-'m-w ge e-f kpr e šm-y r Mn-nfr t' wnet
4566	mte Pr.e šnt-y r n'e-f hm hlw h p' nt e-y zt(t)-se
4567	n-f 'n e-y rh ztt)-s n-f zt de-y n'e-k hrtw r p' tš
4568	19. n Ne htb-y s(st) e-y inh te-y 'w r Mn-nfr e-y "nh
4569	en te-f 'n-w we hrt n šs-sin mte-f (szc) e•r hr-f r-f se
4570	n sbn 'st hbs? mre-f p' zm' te-f s r het-f
4571	20. te-f zr-f N('y)-nfr-k?-Pth w r bl hr t' hyb-tn t'
4572	1.17. hrr pr-mht: r'to' is omitted here in the writing, perhaps only
4573	because of its insignificant sound; so also v. 19.
4574	e-y r, probably *Erecy (future), see above note to r3, l. 4; but
4575	possibly and pres.
4576	1. 18. nom-w, apparently eeee&r 'there,' not eeeewor; cf.
4577	II Kh. i. 2.
4578	ge, MüLLEr, Rec. de Trav. xiii. 149. Gnost., nge; O.C. Horosc. v. 7
4579	et passim —Ke (i.e. Nб€г), S. x€ (cf. XП, XIN) 'or' (ST., § 593);
4580	cf. iv. 26 (written ge•f), 37; v. 4. It is probably derived from the Late
4581	Eg. interjection k° (ERMAN, N. A. G., § 137) as JE 'or' perhaps from y',
4582	(ib. 140).
4583	" wne-t; cf. ПTЄTNOT 'immediately,' PEYRON.
4584	hm hlow. This seems more tender than the usual hrt•w.
4585	1, 19. mle-f; either this should be omitted or some verb has been
4586	omitted after it.
4587	"s-l hbs? cf. "s.l hisl, v. 30. The hbs sign may be only det. son
p. 131
4588	CH. VJ 1 KH. IV. 14-20 113
4589	14. the will of Ra. Every person that was on board
4590	uttered a cry, all. They told it to Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah.
4591	He came out from under the awning of the pleasure-
4592	boat of Pharaoh. He spake a writing to me, he caused
4593	me to leap up, there being power of god resting
4594	15. in water upon me. He caused me to be taken up,
4595	he spake a writing to me, he caused me to relate before
4596	him everything that had become of me, all, with the
4597	manner of accusing that Thoth did before Ra. He
4598	returned to Coptos with me.
4599	16. He caused me to be taken to the Good House,
4600	he caused them to stand (busy) for me, he caused
4601	them to embalm me according to the embalmment of
4602	a Prince and very noble person, he caused me to rest
4603	in the tomb in which Merab the child rested.
4604	17. He went up on board, he voyaged down, he did
4605	not delay to the north of Coptos by one schoenus, to the
4606	place in which we fell into the river. He spake with his
4607	heart saying, 'Shall I be able to go to Coptos and
4608	18. settle there? Otherwise, if 1 shall have gone to
4609	Memphis at once and Pharaoh asks me about his chil-
4610	dren, what is it that I shall say to him? Shall I be
4611	able to say it to him saying, "I took thy children to
4612	the nome
4613	19. of Thebes, I slew them, I being alive; I came to
4614	Memphis also being alive."' He caused a strip of royal
4615	linen to be brought before him, he made it as a
4616	bandage (?). He bound the book, he put it on his
4617	body,
4618	20. he caused it to be strong. Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah
4619	came out from under the awning of the pleasure-boat
4620	•s./ might perhaps mean 'a belt to hold in place,' or sbn "s•1 hbs, 'a belt
4621	instead of clothing. сf. Єфяедлт.
4622	1. 20. le-f31-f. T&XPO; cr.1.36.
4623	GRIFFITH. 1
p. 132
4624	114 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
4625	shret Prs? hy-fr p' yr -f hst p' Rs es rmt nb
4626	r.wn(n'y) hr mrt sgpe tr-w zt wy "
4627	21. wy g' 'n st-f p' sh nfr p'rmt r/ nt e op ky
4628	apr m qty(t)-f hty t' shret Pr-s e b(r)rh rmt nb n
4629	p'tp'm()r-wn(n'y) N(y)-nfr-k-Pthnom-fphwr
4630	Mn-nfr
4631	22. 'r-w in s'my n•'m-se m-bh Pr-s? Pr-ss ow n (sic)
4632	bry r t' het n t shret Pr.e e-f hr pket e p?mše n
4633	Mn-ufr be pket trw erme n' web•w n Pth p' mr-šn
4634	23. n Pth erme t' qnb n'ew-pr Pr-s tr-w pop-w nw
4635	r N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth e-f mht n n' hnyw n t' shret Pr-e
4636	tb t'e-f ypt n sh ufr nw se r hry nw-w r p'zm'n
4637	he-t-f
4638	24. zt Pr-s my lg-w p'y zme nt n het-f zt t gnbe
4639	n Pr-e erme n' wbze n Pth p'mr-šn n Pth (n)mơh
4640	Pr-s? p'e-n nb « stn r-f p' she n p R‹ N('y)-nfr-k'-Pth
4641	sh nfr rmtrhmšs p'y te Pr-s
4642	1. 21. g*, perhaps from Eg. root g', 'oppress?
4643	m gly.t-f. Does the / before the suffix imply that this is fem.? More
4644	probably it is a repetition of the radical / in writing on account of its
4645	pronunciation immediately before the suffix, *ngôl-f (?). giy being, at
4646	least in Eg., a verb IIlne inf., dem. marks the radical y in its derivatives
4647	or supposed derivatives; cf.n-qly=MKOT, and note to iii. 30.
4648	e bay-rl}, attributive. So-also II Kh. ili. 7; the corresponding past
4649	indicative is always expressed by bp-f gm (not rh). See note to 1.4.
4650	r.rnny. Relative form of sdm-f; in Late Eg. wnw-f, without
4651	prosthetic alif (Verbum, ii, $790); cf. ill. 20 note, and iv. 4 Py rnnye-f,
4652	where the prosthetic alif is not needed after the semi-vowel or vowel of
4653	Py: also cf. the participle in iv. 4.
4654	1. 22. n hry. Coptic would have ЄДрнІ, not ПДрні (Sт., §574),
4655	and so usually dem., cf. iil. 25.
4656	pkéit, fem., Leyd. Gnost. xx. 12; cf. HEss, Lond. Gnost., Gloss.,
4657	p. 6. In Gnost. it is made of palm-fibre, suggesting 'sack cloth' here ;
4658	but Eg. pq-t is rather a fine linen, and Diod. i. 72 gives oudóves as the
4659	garb of public mourning. ФWK pallium, TATTAM, p.873, is perhaps
4660	only a mistake for фupk: the present word would be with O: X, as
4661	is shown by the spelling pg'e-t, Pap. Dodgson, recto, 1.15.
4662	mše, "people, яeннce onpos; cf. P.S. B.A., 1899, 271.
4663	1.23. qnb, hardly z'2-1(}) though it sometimes corresponds in Eg., vid.
p. 133
4664	CH. V] 1 KH. IV. 20-24 II5
4665	of Pharaoh, he fell into the river, he did the will of Ra,
4666	every person that was on board uttered a cry, all, saying,
4667	'Great woe!
4668	21. grievous woe! hath he returned, the good scribe
4669	and learned man, whose equal there hath not been?'
4670	The pleasure-boat of Pharaoh voyaged down, no person
4671	on earth knowing the place where Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah was.
4672	They reached Memphis;
4673	22. they made report of it before Pharaoh. Pharaoh
4674	came down to meet the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh
4675	wearing mourning linen, the people of Memphis taking
4676	mourning linen, all, with the priests of Ptah, the high
4677	priest
4678	23. of Ptah, with the council and the household of
4679	Pharaoh, all. And lo! they perceived Ne-nefer-ka-Ptal
4680	grasping the rudders of the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh
4681	by his art of a good scribe; they took him up, they saw
4682	the book on his body.
4683	24. Said Pharaoh, 'Let this book which is on his
4684	body be hidden. Said the council of Pharaoh with the
4685	priests of Ptah, the high priest of Ptah, before Pharaoh,
4686	'O our great lord, the King, may he accomplish the
4687	duration of Ra! Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah was a great scribe
4688	and learned man exceedingly? Caused Pharaoh
4689	p. 46. CF. SPIEGELBErG, Rec. de Tr. xvi. 24; BR., Thes. 1036, 156, l. 2
4690	r gnb.s es.t, which shows that the word is still fem. sing. in dem. It is
4691	probably not accidental that the symbol for gnb(?), Il Kh.iv. 26, and that
4692	for gme (ib. vi. 15) are alike.
4693	mhi. The Sahidic &1&&TE preserves the qualitative form
4694	which we have here. B. See&gl is properly infinitive. In v. 13
4695	the såm-f form is written ma-f.
4696	hny•w, S. ZInE (P pl. ¿ENEse) 'anchor,' or else "rudder" In
4697	Eg.hmw is the rudder-paddle of which there was often more than one.
4698	n he•l-y, 'on his body'; so also l. 33. In Gnost, this is used with
4699	suffixes in the Coptic sense of ПДНТ..
4700	1.24. L°i-n nbeo sin "r-f, &c.; so also v. 33; cf. the derived exclamation,
4701	ili. 15.
p. 134
4702	11б TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
4703	25. 0?-w n-f °q r Pr-nfr n hrw XVI tbe:/ n XXXV
4704	gst n hrw LXX te-w htp-f hn t'e-f tybit n n'e-f cyw
4705	n htp te-y se n'mtwt b'n ?hpr nomn tb py zme
4706	nt e-'r-k zt my te-w se n()-y
4707	26. mn mte-k mtt mte-f er-w o p'en chehr p' t
4708	tb-t-f zt Stne ›Hwret my te-w n()-y p'y zmr r•nw-y
4709	p.r-f 'wt-t erme N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth get e-y ot-f n gnse
4710	twn-se
4711	27. N(y)-nfr-k-Pth hr p' glge zl-f 'n (m)nte-k Stne
4712	nt e t'y s-hmt zt n n'yy) mtwt 'yt eor hr-f e op-k
4713	šp-w tr-w p' zm n rn-f 'n er-k r rh det-f tb zr n sh
4714	nfr hne
4715	28. apne? nr hbrt r hr-y my "r-n p' gyn hbc
4716	r.r-fn p' LII zt Stne te-y che te-w t' hbr[] e.?r.hr-w
4717	erme n'e-s w'w-w hb-w n p LII de N(y)-nfr-k-Pth
4718	wet
4719	1, 25. 03-z0 n-f °g: in vi. 16, 19 the verb before "g is te; here it is
4720	indistinct but preferably 0. g is subst. (see the plur. eq.re, vi. 16) of
4721	solemn religious 'entry,' cf. &EIK: &IK dedicalio, of church, &c.
4722	Pe-f lyb-t; cf.1. II. Not h-t, 'grave,' as in l.16, as read by former
4723	editors. The latter is here inappropriate and contrary to the remains of
4724	the word in the facsimile.
4725	y.w n htp, often in the plur. There are several such compounds of
4726	Cy-n- in dem.=Eg. pr-, corresponding more or less to eeart in Coptic.
4727	VoN LEmM has found Jft- parallel with Пear- in S. ПINTWK=
4728	пееaптшк 'furnace' = Eg. pr-lk° (Ä. Z. 87, 115, note i), thus
4729	giving the 'tonlos' form I-. For this y see notes to ili. 5 (p. 87) and
4730	iv. 13.
4731	le-g se. T is used of 'handing down' the faith by tradition in
4732	Luke i. 2, so this might mean I have given (related) it,namelythe
4733	misfortunes': or possibly, like Eg. m-k, 'receive thou' (Hieroglyphs,
4734	p. 16), le-y se 'I have given it' may mean ' behold,' 'such are,' cr.
4735	Pamonth, i. 28.
4736	Un, in II Kh. written simply bn, but here the peculiar form may be
4737	rendered b'n (Eg. byn, Buwn).
4738	e-3r-k zt. The same form, ili. II, якXW? eкXW?
4739	1.26. eor-w o. Past verbal attributive (emphatic, for simple r.0-w) in
4740	which the relative is the object of its sentence. Contrast e hr-f stm,
4741	iii. 21, where the relative is the subject.
p. 135
4742	CH. v] 1 KH. IV. 25-28 117
4743	25. to be taken (?) for him entry to the Good House
4744	of (?) sixteen days; wrapping of (?) thirty-five; coffining
4745	of (?) seventy days; they caused him to rest in his
4746	sarcophagus in his resting places. I have given it, the
4747	evil things that have become of us on account of this
4748	book that thou hast said, 'Let it be given to me.'
4749	26. Thou hast no affair with it, whereas they took
4750	our term of life on earth for it. Said Setne, ' Ahure,
4751	let this book be given me that I saw between thee and
4752	Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah ; otherwise I will take it by force.'
4753	Raised himself
4754	27. Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah upon the couch. He said, 'Art
4755	thou Setne before whom this woman is speaking these
4756	vain words (?) while thou hast not received them at all ?
4757	The book named wilt thou be able to take it by power
4758	of a good scribe, or
4759	28. superiority (?) in playing draughts over me. Let
4760	us make the style of draughts for it at the fifty-two."
4761	Said Setne, 'I am ready.' They put the game-board
4762	before them with its pieces. They played in the fifty-
4763	two. Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah took one
4764	Sine, vid. above, pp. 4, 9, 541.
4765	ЄІЄ бІТG Л ХОЛС; cf. v. 8. For the dem. spelling of ХOЛC
4766	cf. Il Kh.ii. 2 and (kns), Lond. Gnost., Gloss., p. 15, but its origin and
4767	precise reading gs (?) are not clear.
4768	1. 27. "yl, 'misfortune,' or 'want,' Can., l. 17 ; so here ' misfortunes' or
4769	' vain words?
4770	e bp-k, or 'and thou dost not receive them at all;cf. note to iii. a4.
4771	an e y-k. The e here might be explained as belonging to
4772	єпє(: «П) oг for Єк*(єсу), єкласу-.
4773	The n read by HEss (p. 92) after ib seems more than doubtful.
4774	hme seems to be (XM): Cy&M as introducing alternative-whether
4775	word or sentence-in a question, St., § 594.
4776	1.28. apne. The reading of the first two signs is not quite certain, the
4777	meaning is also unknown; perhaps 'champion," "vicior"
4778	r hr-g, as usual epos, here of comparison.
p. 136
4779	118 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 11
4780	29. hbs.tn Stne 45-f sh rr-f te-fr zzfn t' hit nor
4781	hbr.tr.wn(n'y) e.p hr-f te-f šm-fr p'tne š rt-fr-f
4782	p'e-s smte n t' hbrt mh Ilt Oe-f se
4783	30. n Stne te-f šm-f r p' 'tne š hnn-f 'r-f p'e-s smte
4784	n t' hbr.t mh III t te-f šm-f r p' 'tne š n'e-f msze•w m-s'
4785	n'y(y) 'r Stne gwel c.t n t Pth-
4786	3I. N(y)-nfr-k'(-Pth) š Stne v 'Nh-Hr-rw p'e-f sn
4787	n 'Rt-mnh? zt m 'r hrr r hry r p't' mte-k szy n mt
4788	nbt r-bpr n-'m-y m-bh Pr-e mte-k 'n n' sw n Pth
4789	p'e yt erme n'e zme•w
4790	32. n owet bp-f hrr r hry r p'tszy-fm-bh Pr-es
4791	n mt nb•t r-kpr n Stne zt Pr-s Oe n-f n's'-w n Pth
4792	p'e-f yt erme n'e-f zmow n de wet bp 'Nh-Hr-r-w hrr
4793	33. r bry r t hit te-f n' sow n het n Stne py-f r
4794	t'pn p' nw n rn-f te Stne šm tt-f m s p' zms de-f
4795	sehpr-fe Ste wrhryhnt'
4796	34. hit e p' wyn mš hit-f e p' qay mšs m-s'-f e
4797	›Hwre t rym m-s'-f e-s zt 'wt?-k stn p' qqy ••sw.• ?-k
4798	stn p' wyn šm nmte nb nt.
4799	1. 2g. te-f r (or n?) zz-f: so also apparently Poème Sat. v. 7, cf. †
4800	EXEN beschülzen, St., § 538; but from the passages quoted in PEYRON
4801	231 and TATTAM 8o1, the meaning here given, 'guarded himself with the
4802	draught box' (as Hess), seems not very probable. It rather in Coptic
4803	means 'aid,' "fight for,' and here 'fought for himself with the box, or
4804	• supplemented it (the spell) with the draught box.' 1y %%, in Hist. Rom.,
4805	No. 329, may be quite different.
4806	mh 1I.%. This is the only possible reading and the form of II is not
4807	unusual.
4808	1. 30. ar grve.tnt, 'suffer straits at the hands of'; cf. Hist. Rom., Gloss.,
4809	1. 31. "Nh-Hr-rw. The sign here transcribed ru (as in €pWoT)
4810	seems to serve for d, da in Leyd. Gnost. ix. 5; xvili. 34. This da
4811	however might be the absolute form of mr-= Лe- of iii. I.
4812	'his brother by Art-menkh(?)'; reading and rendering alike tentative.
4813	1. 32. A"we-t; cf. Hess, p. 98, II Kh. il. 27.
4814	1. 33. r l p, S. ETNE, SI., § 516; cf. r p° '/m, v. 29-30, and note on
4815	Il Kh. iii. 19.
4816	te šm 1.1-f m s*; cf. v. 29; Hist. Rom., No. 287.
4817	t.t-f; note how carefully TOOT:; NТООT:, iii. 12, &c.; ПТЄ(П)
p. 137
4818	CH. V] 1 KH. IV. 39-34 1I9
4819	29. game from Setne. He pronounced a spell to him,
4820	he supplemented (?) it with the draught-box that was
4821	before him;[he caused him to go into the ground as far
4822	as his feet. He did its like in the second game, he
4823	took it
4824	30. from Setne, he caused him to go into the ground
4825	as far as his phallus. He did its like with the third
4826	game, he made him go into the ground as far as his
4827	ears. After these things Setne suffered great strait at
4828	the hand of
4829	31. Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah. Setne called to Anh-herru his
4830	brother by Menkh (?)-Art, saying, • Do not delay (to go)
4831	up on the earth, and relate everything that is becoming
4832	of me before Pharaoh: and do thou bring the amulets
4833	of Ptah my father and my books
4834	32. of taking pledge.! He delayed not (to go) up on
4835	earth; he related before Pharaoh everything that was
4836	becoming of Setne. Said Pharaoh, 'Take to him the
4837	amulets of Ptah his father and his books of taking
4838	pledge' Anh-herru did not delay
4839	33. (to go) down to the tomb; he put the amulets
4840	on the body of Setne; he leaped up to heaven in the
4841	moment named. Setne put out his hand after the book,
4842	he took it. It came to pass that Setne came up out
4843	of the
4844	34. tomb, the light walking before him, the darkness
4845	walking behind him, Ahure weeping after it saying,
4846	•Welcome king Darkness, farewell king Light! Every
4847	power (?) that was
4848	iv. 30, &c. are distinguished in the orthography of 1 Kh. In II Kh. these
4849	are all much confused.
4850	1.34. "wl-, O.C. Paris, EÖTWT:, ETWT., A.Z.83,94; BRUGsCH, ib.
4851	84,18 (one text in Hess, p. 82). "Welcome" for this and "farewell' for
4852	the imperfect word.. sw.. (?) with det. of evil seem appropriate.
4853	nmte, noeet may be either "strength' or 'consolation, and the
4854	det. here seems in favour of the latter meaning, Hist. Kom., No. 16.3-
p. 138
4855	120 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 11
4856	35. hn t' h•t tr-w zt N('y)-nfr-k-Pth n 'Hwret m or
4857	the n hst e-y ty 'n-f p'y zme r on'y(y) ewn wet šltt
4858	šbte n t•t-f e wn we ch n
4859	36. ste-t hr zz-f Stne wr hry hn t' hit te-f zrm-s-f
4860	r h p'e-s smte šm Stne moh Pr-e szy-f e " hr-f n
4861	mt er hpr nom-fhr p' zme
4862	37. zt Pr-s? n Stne de p'y zms r t' hit n N('y)-nfr-
4863	k'-Pth n mt rmt rh ge e-f r ty be-k? e wn we.t šlt-t
4864	šbt n t•t-k e wn we h n stet hr zz-k op
4865	38. Stne stm n-f kpr-f e mn mte Stne ypt n p' t
4866	m-s' prhe p' zme mte-f iš n'm-f er hr rmt nb m-s
4867	n'y(y) kpr we hrw e Stne snyn hr hft-h n Pth er-f
4868	nwe r wit s-hmt
4869	39. e n(y)-n-s m šs e bp s-hmt hpr n p'e-s nw?
4870	n('y)n-s e hynw wpwt nb šy no'm-s e hynze hm
4871	hlw hmwt mšs m-s'-s e wn rmt h? n'yze-pr LII 'P
4872	yr-S
4873	1. 35. r bny, Eler&ı. Late Eg. r myn, ERm., N. A. Gr., 895, 2.
4874	šll-t šble, 'fork, stick,' the meaning doubtful.
4875	"h n ste-t, cf. O. C. Par. &0 ( = S. &cy) пс&ТI; Ä. Z. 93, 103.
4876	1.36.zr, note the absolute inf. without suffix. One would expect sr-f,
4877	but the meaning must be 'make safe' the entrance.
4878	n mi ear hpr, elsewhere n mt nor hpr, Il. 31, 32, &c. Is the e due
4879	to the ending of *Morтe?
4880	1.37.rmirh; from this, a "learned, prudent, well-trained person' and so
4881	'polite,' may be derived peepacy: peeep&rcy 'humble" меєт-
4882	peeeparcy is 'humility, and this may even be the meaning here,
4883	vid. iv. 6, rh= pwcys 'judge'? and iv. 4, note,
4884	O-k se? le-k? The reading not clear. Perhaps the scribe blundered,
4885	expecting to write 'cause thee to be taken'?
4886	1, 38. prhep' zme; cf. STD., Elias, p. 53, note 4.
4887	snyn, CNHINI, has the sense of 'walk up and down,' A.Z.,
4888	1875, 140.
4889	1.39. The signs after pe-s are obscure and perhaps corrupt; "likeness,
4890	'apparel, or 'beauty'? It might have ended with en sp-sn, cf. v. 18.
4891	rup•wt no, cf. M. JЄПNOYB. Does hynw mean 'pairs,' 'many
4892	pairs of gold ornaments,' or 'some ornaments of much gold'? hynru
4893	andes together also in v. 16.
p. 139
4894	CH. V] І KH. IV. 35-39 121
4895	35. in the tomb hath gone, all Said Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah
4896	to Ahure, ' Be not sad of heart, I will cause him to bring
4897	this book hither, there being a fork, a staff in his hand,
4898	there being a censer of
4899	36. fire upon his head!' Setne came up from in the
4900	tomb, he made fast after him like its manner. Setne
4901	went before Pharaoh, he related before him of thing
4902	that became of him with the book.
4903	37. Said Pharaoh to Setne, • Take this book to the
4904	tomb of Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah in the way of a learned man,
4905	otherwise he will cause thee to give it (?), there being
4906	a fork, a stick, in thy hand, there being a censer of fire
4907	upon thy head.' Not did
4908	38. Setne hearken to him. It came to pass that
4909	Setne had no occupation on earth but unrolling the book
4910	that he might read from it before every person. After
4911	these things, there came a day when Setne was walking
4912	up and down on the dromos (?) of Ptah, behold! he saw
4913	a woman
4914	39. beautiful exceedingly, there not having been a
4915	woman of her appearance (?). She was beautiful, there
4916	being some ornaments of gold, many, on her, there being
4917	some young people, females, walking after her, there
4918	being fifty-two men, like household-men, belonging to her.
4919	12.9m-s. Clothes would be described as being &rWTC, but orna-
4920	ments, some of which would be fastened in her ears, &c., seem to take
4921	a different preposition.
4922	hm hl-wo lem-wl. Is hm•/ adj., so 'female servants' (gEeeg22)?
4923	It can hardly be 'children and women"
4924	h noyow-pr singularly resembles the group in ili.6, but clearly with B,
4925	not l. Is l 'corps' or 'body,' i.e. 'individual'? or 'copy,' i. e. "re-
4926	sembling'? or has the group some connexion with "sol, 'crew,"'gang'
4927	for which cf. SPIEGELBERG, A. Z. 99, 39?
4928	"P, qu. HT, pertinens, from CUn numerare.
p. 140
4929	I22 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 11
4930	mh V
4931	1. t' wnet n nwe gor Stne r.r-s (n)op-f gm m'(c) n
4932	p't e-f no'm-f es Stne r p'e-f bl stm-sš zt mor hrr
4933	rp m()nt e ty s-hmt nom-fsh p'or bpr
4934	2. hr p'e-s "s-shne op p'hl stm-s hrr r p' m') nt
4935	e t s-hmt nom-f eš-f wbe t' hlt šmset r•wn(n'y) mšr
4936	m-s'-s šn-f s zt 'h n rmt t'y zt-s n-f Ty-bwbwe
4937	3. t' šret n p' hn-ntr n Bste nb.t ‹N2-twi ty e•r-s
4938	y r bn'y(y) r wšte m-oh Pth p'ntr "? st p'hl r Stne
4939	s'zy-f e-r-hr-f n mt nb•t r•zl-s n-f tr-w zt Stne n p' hl
4940	4. m-šm v•zły-s n t hlt zt Stne He-m-ws p' šre n
4941	Pr-e Wsr-m'r.t-R' p' e r ty w-y zt e-y ty n-t nb-
4942	X yory we.t wnet erme-y ge 'n?
4943	5. wn mte-t s'my n o gnse e-y ty r-w se n-t e-y ty
4944	Oe-w t-t r we m') e-f hp e in e? rmt nb np't'
4945	gm t-t st-se p' hl r p' m') nt e Ty-bwbwe n•'m-f s-f
4946	1. I. P une-t n nwe gar; cl. note to iv. 13.
4947	(n)bp-f. The additional n (for m or n) is very common in II Kh.
4948	in words beginning with ee, st.
4949	hl stm eš; cf. HESs, p. 106.
4950	poorhpr,'that which hath become' would probably be ler hpr
4951	('rly, ili. 3 note), the neuter in such cases being feminine; see 1.18 (
4952	ew-n... 1º.L-s, &c. The form here rather shows that sr is infin. so
4953	that the expression may be *персуспs 'the doing-becoming,' i.e.
4954	probably 'the method of becoming,' "how to become' It can hardly be
4955	(nearly as HESs), 'what hath been put under her authority,' i. e. what
4956	her rank and position is. Possibly 'who hath obtained authority over
4957	her, or "who hath obtained her authority (as trusted servant):
4958	1. 2. e5-shne, lit. ' pronouncing command'; for the reading cf. Hess ad
4959	loc., p.106. The expression is fully spelled out Hist. Rom., No. 50.
4960	eš y is 'call to, 'summon'; eš wbe, apparently to ' call to, ' signal to.'
4961	Ty-bwbwe, vid. above, p. 33, note; cf. Borkor splendor.
4962	1 3. hn-ntr, B. &ONT, used of the pagan priest of On, Gen. xli. 45, &c.
4963	'y, 'come" In I Kh. this occurs only in the inf., viz. in periphrastic
4964	sim-f with "r, v. 22 as here; past participle p' e-r iy, vi. 17; future EgEEI,
4965	v. g. In II Kh. it is commoner, and true sim-f may occur in ii. 29. In Late
4966	Eg. the emphatic periphrasis (with &C-) is common (Verbum, ii, § 205
4967	ad fin.), but its sdm-f still is found. Apparently it affects the emphatic
4968	form, and this is what we have here.
p. 141
4969	cH. V] 1 KH. V. I-5 123
4970	Fifth
4971	I. The moment of seeing her that Setne did, he found
4972	not place of earth in which he was. Setne called his
4973	servant-page, saying, 'Delay not (to go) to the place
4974	where this woman is; ascertain what hath taken place
4975	2. about (?) her command (?) The slave-page delayed
4976	not (to go) to the place in which the woman was. He
4977	called to the slave-girl attendant that was walking after
4978	her ; he asked her saying, ' What person is this?' She
4979	said to him, 'She is Ta-bubue,
4980	3. the daughter of the prophet of Bast mistress of
4981	Ankh-taui, shé, behold! having come hither to pray
4982	before Ptah, the great god.' The slave returned to
4983	Setne; he related before him everything that she had
4984	said to him, all. Setne said to the slave,
4985	4. 'Go and tell it to the slave-girl saying, "Setne
4986	Kha-m-uas, the son of Pharaoh Usir-ma-Ra, (is) he that
4987	sent me saying, 'I will give thee ten pieces of gold;
4988	pass an hour with me. Or hast
4989	5. thou an accusation of violence? I will cause it to be
4990	done for thee. I will cause them to take thee to a hidden
4991	place; no man on the earth shall (?) find thee.'"' The
4992	slave returned to the place in which Ta-bubue was.
4993	He called
4994	1. 4. For the imperatives vid. Hess, p. 10g.
4995	Je-m-res, Xapois, vid. above p. a; it occurs in l. 7 and vi. a0, also
4996	Il Kh. ii. 33-
4997	Wsr-mºe./-Rs, vid. above, p. 4; c. l. 7; II Kh. ii. 28. In the
4998	last the r of Wsr has apparently gone, as in Oiosuápys, but in l. 7 it is
4999	spelled with 'Sr like Ouopis, as if with strong r.
5000	nb...X. The sign before the numeral is probably that which in
5001	hieratic accounts of all periods replaces a unit of any kind in weight
5002	or measure.
5003	in is not clearly written. In the parallel passage (Il. 7-8) there is no
5004	ge, but "n is clear, and this seems the better reading.
5005	1. 5. zen mle-l s-my n O gnse; cf. 11 Kh. il. a, and p. 34, nole.
p. 142
5006	124 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
5007	6.r tes hlt šmset mt-f erme-s r-s gige mt r h
5008	hpr e wr p'y zl-f zt Ty-bwbwe n p' hl rlk-k "y-k mt
5009	wbe t'y hnšet? n hl 'm
5010	7. n()-y] mte-k r mtt erme-y tkr p'hl r p' m'()
5011	nt e Ty-bwbwe n•m-f zl-f n-s(st) e-y ty nb ... x
5012	gor-y wrt wnet erme Stne H-m-ws p'šre Pr-s Sr-
5013	me.t-Re
5014	8. 'n wn mte-t s'my n de qnse e-f r ty r-w s en e-f
5015	rOt-t r wrm'() e-f hp [e nn] e(?) rmt nb n p'tgmt-t
5016	zt Ty-bwbwe m-šm r.zty-s n Stne zt 'nwk
5017	9.web bn nwk rmt hm(?)in e-f hpr Prlk whln
5018	r p'nt mrk s erme-y r-k ry r Pr-Bst r p'-le ly
5019	wn sbte nb hn-f e-r-kr p'nt mr-k's erme-y e bp
5020	rmt nbn p' t'
5021	10. gm•t-y e bp-y "r mtt nzset h[t]? p' byr en st
5022	p' hl r Stne szy-[f] e-r-hr-f n mt nbit r•zl-s n-f tr-w
5023	zt-f p'nt mty p'y wey rmt nb rwn(n'y)
5024	e nn e seems the reading indicated by the remains, but it may be
5025	e bp as elsewhere in I Kh. in similar cases; cf, note to ill. 24.
5026	1. 6. gg°, perhaps onomatopoetic, 'to say tut tut'; cf. Eg.gg, 'cackle'
5027	But in Hist. Rom., No. 315,g°g seems a cry of trouble.
5028	r h hpr e, "like a becoming that."
5029	we 08&; cf. Hist. Rom. Gloss., Nos. 62, 350, XI-07&.
5030	py zl-f, evidently for p'y r•al-f (i.e. ПEX&С, though the Coptic
5031	word is never used as a predicate), r, for prosthetic alif, being omitted
5032	on account of the vowel preceding.
5033	r-lk-k. Ik =2o: Awxs 'be healed,' with refl. pron. 'cease':
5034	imper. S. &2ox (cf. P. S. B. A., 18g6, 105); caus. T&20o, cf. Hist.
5035	Rom. 184.
5036	hnse•l? or hnšt•t?; vid. HESs, p. I1I.
5037	m; differently written in ill. 12.
5038	1. 7.ar ml-l, 'bargain (?)'
5039	ikr, 'hasten,' or 'approach' (?); cf. Eg. Ikn, 'approach.'
5040	•Ser is transcribed orcIpe in O. C. Par., Ä. Z. 83, 94= Hess, p. 8z.
5041	There is no sign of ge at the end of the line; cf. 1.4-
5042	1.8. Note the avoidance of n-t, ' to thee,' by the youth twice after ' giving'
5043	and ' doing'—perhaps for politeness or from embarrassment.
5044	1. 9. web, ' pure,' or perhaps 'priestly"
5045	rml hm. The ordinary reading hm (S. сунeе, Achm. ¿Hee), is
p. 143
5046	CH. v] "I KH. V. 6-10 125
5047	6. to her slave-girl attendant, he spake with her.
5048	She made clatter (?) of speech as it were that it were
5049	blasphemy (?) to say it. Said Ta-bubue to the slave,
5050	'Cease arguing with (?) this fool (?) of a slave. Come
5051	7. [to me] and do thou make speech with me.' The
5052	slave hastened to the place in which Ta-bubue was.
5053	He said to her, 'I will give ten pieces of gold; pass an
5054	hour with Setne Khamuas, the son of Pharaoh Osirmara.
5055	8. Hast thou accusation of injury? he will do it
5056	also. He will take thee to a place concealed; no man
5057	on earth shall (?) find thee.? Said Ta-bubue, 'Go say it
5058	to Setne saying, " I
5059	9. am pure, not am I a mean person. If it be that
5060	thou seekest to do that which thou didst (?) desire with
5061	me, thou shalt come to Per-Bast to my house. There is
5062	every preparation in it, while thou doest that which thou
5063	hast desired with me without any man on earth
5064	Io. finding me, without my doing thing of a humble-
5065	woman in the face (?) of the street."' The slave returned
5066	to Setne, he related before him everything that she said
5067	to him, all. He said, 'This is what is satisfactory.'
5068	Shocked (?) was every man that was
5069	supported by the dem. equivalent for Spnrxnp in the late Philae inscrip-
5070	tions: BR., Thes. 1005.
5071	un OTON, St., § 308. wn, and its negative mn, eent: eeeeon
5072	(cf. SPIEGELBErG, Rec. de Trav., 1899, 41; STD., § 248) seem to be verbs
5073	used absolutely, followed generally by a nominal sentence.
5074	e-3y-kar. Is this an emphatic form "lo! thou shalt do'?
5075	mr-k; is this really a past form here, or is slm-f used sometimes of
5076	the present in relative sentences as in Late Eg. sdmf?
5077	1. TO. nzse•l, with det. of woman. In Eg. nss is a 'commoner,' as
5078	opposed to sr, a person of the official classes.
5079	fe.l p'hyr. The remains point to this reading; for fe./ cf. ill. 30
5080	note.
5081	p' nl miy p'y must be equivalent to our 'very good!' m/y=
5082	яe&тE=convenire, nearly as in the contracts.
5083	zey, probablythe verb from which 07& (l.6) is derived. Eg.ress.
5084	"blaspheme,' ' curse.'
p. 144
5085	126 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT.II
5086	II. [n] p' qte n Stne te Stne 'n-w tks br(rr)-f sl-f r
5087	mrt pr-f bp-f hrr r Pr-Bst e-f 'w p(r) mnt n p'
5088	Qmy ror-f gm we sy e-f Os
5089	12. m šs e wn we sbte m qte-f e wn we k'm ?r n-f
5090	mht e wn wet nset h r-f šn Stne zt p'y y p'cy n
5091	nme p'y zi-w n-f p' sy
5092	13. [n] Ty-bwbwe p'y šm Stne p' hn n p' sbte y-y-f
5093	ty hr-frpprnp kmr-w en smy nom-s erhr
5094	Ty-bwbwe e-s w r hry mh-s
5095	14. n t Stne zt-s n-f inh p'wt n p'y n p' ha-ntr
5096	n Bst nb-t ‹Nh-t•wi r.ph-k vr-f e-f r 'ne-y m šs sgr
5097	nom-k r hry erme-y mšr Stne r hry
5098	15. hr p'trt n pcy erme Ty-bwbwe goy-fgm t'
5099	ry.t hryt n p' ry e-s shr e-s nzh e p'e-s shre nzhe
5100	n hstb n mr.tn
5101	16. mfke n m"t e wn glg šy hn-s e-w nm'e n
5102	šs-stn e hyn-w pt n nb e-w iš hr t' wbt mh-w ws
5103	pt n nb nrp te-w s n t Stne
5104	1.I1. tks, an ordinarytravelling boat, perhaps to be connected with tks,
5105	'pierce,' so 'swift'; Pamonth, ii. 26; II Kh. s. 6.
5106	qmy, not as Maspero, lmy, ' city,' which moreover would bé written
5107	tme in I Kh.
5108	1. 12. m qle-f eпєукwтє; so also in dem. with noun, n p' qle n,
5109	1.11.
5110	r n-fmht; observe the idiom.
5111	h for ler; cf. 1. 38.
5112	1.I3. P'hn Пg0xH: ST., § 572; cf. sm-w n p hu, II Kh. ii. 3, 4.
5113	ty hr-f r, 'give attention to,' 'turn face to,' not uncommon in Eg.
5114	and dem.; cf. II Kh.v.8. T2p& ehod prospicere seems very rare
5115	and not quite the same thing: PEYRoN, 360. Hess corrects his translation
5116	on p. 16g.
5117	1. 14. enh, S. cy€- 'in oaihs,' St., §528; cf. enh p' hrt Xaroxparns, BR.,
5118	dem.-gr. Eigennamen, p. 17; Thes. 882; Verbum, i, § 3. Usually
5119	followed by the name of a god, Il Kh. ii. 14; iv. 15; vi. 34. The enh
5120	being here abbreviated, the demotic • is not written at the beginning as
5121	in other forms of the word (l.35, &c.).
5122	wi, the spelling identical with that in iv. , but here probably
5123	"flourish' from Eg. w% = OrwT ' be green, 'prosper, as HEss, p. 116,
5124	points out.
p. 145
5125	CH. V] I KH. V. 1I-16 127
5126	I1. around Setne. Setne caused a boat to be brought
5127	to him, he went up on board upon it, he delayed not
5128	(going) to Per-Bast, he came to the west of the Qemy.
5129	And lo! he found a house lofty
5130	12. exceedingly, there being a wall around it, there
5131	being a garden making north for it, there being a
5132	mastaba (?) in front of it (?). Setne asked saying, ' This
5133	house is the house of whom?' They said to him, 'The
5134	house
5135	13. of Ta-bubue it is.' Setne went inside the wall;
5136	he having turned his attention to the chamber of the
5137	garden, they made report of it before Ta-bubue. She
5138	came down, she took
5139	14. the hand of Setne. She said to him, 'By the
5140	prosperity of the house of the prophet of Bast mistress
5141	of Ankh-taui, at which thou hast arrived, it will
5142	please (?) me exceedingly. Come along up from
5143	thyself with me. Setne walked up
5144	15. on the staircase of the house with Ta-bubue.
5145	Lo! he found the upper story of the house swept and
5146	decorated, its floor (?) being decorated with real lapis
5147	lazuli and with
5148	16. real turquoise, there being many couches in it
5149	upholstered with royal linen, there being some cups of
5150	gold, numerous, upon the dresser. A cup of gold was
5151	filled with wine; it was given into the hand of Setne.
5152	«пе-у or eney, *апні ог Дл2l, must be = рaлнs or pansı
5153	'will please me,' or 'will he pleasant'; cf. ST., § 190. The r preceding
5154	must however be future €, not p.
5155	sgr 1'm-k; cf. note on ill. 24.
5156	1. 15. tr! TlpT 'stairs'; GooDwIN, Ä. Z., 187°, 135.
5157	shr nzh,see MgCO&P Mgnaxk with which this is compared by
5158	REvILLOuT, Rev. Eg. ii. 83. The det. of shre, later in the line, is that of
5159	'ground,' ' dust, as in ine, so presumably it means the " floor that is swept."
5160	1.16. opl in the first case has no plural sign, probably because it has no
5161	distinctive plural form.
5162	e-г es EXOL; N.B. not written •Sy: cf. iv. 39.
p. 146
5163	128 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
5164	17. zt-s n-f my kpr-f r-k rr p'e-k gy n wm zl-f
5165	n-s(st) mn p' nt e-y rly 'r-f te-w hwe r p' ch 'n-w sgne
5166	n t'mnet n t hrt Pr-o e or hr-f
5167	18. r Stne hrw nfr erme Ty-bwbwe e bp-f nw r
5168	p'e-s smte "n sp-sn zt Stne n Ty-bwbwe my mnq-n t'
5169	e 'wn r bn'y(y) tb't-s
5170	19.... zl-s n-fr-k r ph pe-k y p'nt e-r-k n-'m-f
5171	nwk web bn 'nwk rmt hm 'n e-f hpr rr-k wh-sn?r p'
5172	nt mr-k s erme-y e-r-k r or we sh n s-nh erme we
5173	20. tb ht r nt nb•t nka nb•t nt mte-k tr-w zt-f n-s(st)
5174	my 'n-w p' sh n st sb' on-w s t'y hte te-f r-w n-s we
5175	sh n s-nh we tb ht r nt nb't nka nb.t nt mte-f tr-w
5176	21. we.t wnet t' e•r kpr r-w en smy nom-s e r hr
5177	Stne zt n'e-k hrt•w hry zt-f my-'n-w st r hry twn-s
5178	Ty-bwbwe te-s wr ht n šs-stn hr
5179	22. >t(t)-s nw Stne g let nb't nt nom-s hn-f e•r
5180	1.17.3y-kr, fut. attributive. A good instance of "r-k= EK as well as K.
5181	have (cf. Eg. hru, with det. of wood; T. cyoor 'ointment' for the
5182	head), cyoor€ 'incense,' Z., P. 422.
5183	•n-w not clear, perhaps de-w.
5184	mne-t eeirte species.
5185	"hr.t, or n' hrows.
5186	1. 18. "n sp-sn; cf. above note to iii. 7.
5187	e "w-n: it is curious that "w-f should be admissible in attributive
5188	or conjunctive (with ly), but apparently not in indicative sentences.
5189	The relative form of sim-f seems not to occur in Late Eg. with this verb
5190	(Verbum, ii, § 803, cf. above ili. 20, note; ili. 2, note "w), and this form
5191	with e is apparently substituted for it.
5192	1. 19. A small space before zi-s, but the parallels Il. 23, 25,28 give
5193	nothing here.
5194	фнетєкяемос.
5195	s-inh camy, c&ancy: cy&rcy ' nurture, ' educate.'
5196	1. 20. wos t6 ht. This has been considered to represent og *єтBe-
5197	28.T 'a (writing) for money,' but Or TEEß-24T seems a more
5198	probable equivalent, since the same group or ligature tb spells
5199	TwwBe 'requite,' 'punish,' in Kufi and Leyden Mor.; cf. II Kh.
5200	ii. 13. (sh) ib ht are referred to in RuvilLout, Chrestomathie Démotique,
5201	215,216, 228, &c. In 216 it is a distinct document from the shn s-nh.
p. 147
5202	CH. V] 1 KH. V. 17-22 129
5203	17. She said to him, 'Let it be that thou wilt make
5204	thy manner of eating.' He said to her, 'There is not
5205	that that I shall be able to make? They put scented
5206	gums on the censer, they brought unguents of the sort
5207	of the provisions of Pharaoh, before him.
5208	18. Setne spent a good day with Ta-bubue, he not
5209	•having seen her like ever, ever. Said Setne to Tabubue,
5210	'Let us complete that on account of which we came
5211	here?
5212	19.... said she to him, 'Thou wilt reach thy house,
5213	that in which thou art. I am pure, I am not a vulgar
5214	person. If it be that thou seekest to do what thou
5215	didst desire with me, thou shalt make a writing of
5216	maintenance with a
5217	20. recompense (?) in money with regard to everything
5218	and all goods that belong to thee, all! Said he to her,
5219	' Let the scribe of the school be brought.' He was
5220	brought instantly. He caused to be made for her a
5221	writing of maintenance and a recompense (?) in money
5222	for everything and all goods belonging to him, all.
5223	21. At an hour, that which happened, they made
5224	announcement of it before Setne, saying, ' Thy children
5225	are below' Said he, 'Let them be brought up'
5226	Ta-bubue arose, she put a dress of royal linen upon
5227	22. her. Setne saw every part of her in it, his desire
5228	e./ sB'=S. ANCHBE (LEMM, Sah. Leg. v. Cyprian v. Antiochien,
5229	p. 7I), aNZHве: 211ZH3(T) 'school' A sh n e./ sbe occurs RRv.,
5230	Chrest. Dem. 284.
5231	1. 21. Ml, Eg. hli probably = S. ZOEITE veslis. STD., Elias, 27, y
5232	gives the Achm. galTe, but is this certain? BorrIAsT, Pap. d
5233	Akhmim, Gloss. reads &&/T€, which seems better though he mis-
5234	understood the passage.
5235	1.22. e.f (written with the old group e.f followed by e-f) = O. C. Par.,
5236	pl. HOT; ERm., A. Z.. 1883, 104. The sing. perhaps Hi, ibid.; but sce
5237	у, v. 36.
5238	GRIFFITH. K
p. 148
5239	130 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 11
5240	p'e-f mr y newn hw r py wn(n'y) e-f nom-f t' hst
5241	zl Stne Ty-bwbwe my mnq-y
5242	23. t' e 'w-y r b n'y(y) tbt-s zt-s n-f r-k r ph p'e-k
5243	y p' nt er-k nom-f nwk web bn nwk rmt hm n
5244	e-f hpr r-k wh' nr p' at mr-k s erme-y -k r ty
5245	sh n'e-k
5246	24. hrtw hr pe sh mor h-w rr mihe erme n'e
5247	hrtw hr n'e-k nk'w te-f n-w n'e-f hrtw te-f sh-w hr
5248	p' sh zt Stne n Ty-bwowe my mnq-y
5249	25. t' e w-y r bn'y(y) tb't-s zt-s n-fr-kr ph p'e-k
5250	y p' nt e-r-k no'm-f 'nwek web bn 'nwk rmt hm n e-f
5251	hpr e-r-k wh-s nrpnt mr-ks erme-y r-kr ty
5252	26. htb-w n'e-k hrtw m-r hxw r or mlhe erme n'e
5253	hrtw hr p'e-k nk' zt Stne my or-w n-w p'btw nt ph
5254	rhit-t te-s htb-w n'e-f hrt•w
5255	27. e-r-hr-f te-s ty w-w r hryn p'ššte e-r-hr n'
5256	w'w-w erme n' 'me•wt wm-w n'e-w 'efw e-f stm r•r-w
5257	e-f sur erme Ty-bwbwe zl Stne Ty-bwbwe
5258	28. my mnq-n t' e 'w-n r bn'y(y) tb't-s mt nb.t r zt-t
5259	hr-y ?r-w n-t tr-w zt-s n-f sgr m-k r p'y pr šm Stne
5260	rp' pr qt-f hr wo gige n
5261	2g. yb hbyn e t'e-f mrt šp nb qt n-s Ty-bwbwe
5262	ynew. So alsoin Coptic with words of increase and decrease,
5263	e.g.1 N PWT ůvaréldew, Lev. xiv. 43, and п&g пноT повок пє
5264	зДатторойто, Gen. vili. 3.
5265	ew. This subst. (cf. Br., Thes. 933) seems to be orw in forw
5266	GrowRorih0
5267	1. 23. wh° n; N.B. not wh'-s n as in Il. 19, 25.
5268	ly sh, perhaps " cause them (their names) to be written': cf. ili. 8.
5269	1. 26. biw, masc.; S. BCTE, I abominatio.
5270	ntph ETПH2•
5271	1.27. Exactly T88w0r ЄДрн.
5272	1.28. hr-y "y-w, almost &J&ITOT. One might suspect hr-y to be for
5273	&ww 'myself, St., §256, but apparently it is the emphatic form (cf.
5274	iv. 5), used here on account of the object of the sentence having gone
5275	before for emphasis.
5276	m-k. The only instance of this spelling in the story; cf. the
5277	parallel, 1. x4.
p. 149
5278	CH. v] 1 KH. V. 22-29 I31
5279	lo! coming in quantity beyond that in which it was
5280	before. Said Setne, ' Ta-bubue, let me complete
5281	23. that for which I came here! Said she to him,
5282	"Thou wilt reach thy house, that in which thou art.
5283	I am pure, I am not a common person. If it be that
5284	thou seekest to do that which thou didst desire with
5285	me, thou shalt cause thy
5286	24. children to write under my writing. Do not allow
5287	them to make quarrel with my children with thy goods.'
5288	He caused his children to be brought. He caused them
5289	to write under the writing. Setne said to Ta-bubue, ' Let
5290	me complete
5291	25. that for which I have come hither.' Said she to
5292	him, 'Thou shalt reach thy house, that in which thou art.
5293	1 am pure, I am not a common person. If it be that
5294	thou seekest to do that which thou didst desire with me,
5295	thou shalt cause
5296	26. thy children to be slain. Do not allow them to
5297	make quarrel with my children with thy goods.' Said
5298	Setne, 'Let be done to them the abomination that is
5299	arrived at thy heart.' She caused his children to be
5300	slain
5301	27. before him, she caused them to be cast down from
5302	the window before the dogs with the cats. They ate
5303	their flesh, he hearing them, he drinking with Ta-bubue.
5304	Said Setne, Ta-bubue,
5305	28. let us complete that for which we came here.
5306	Everything that thou hast said, I have done them for
5307	thee, all! Said she to him, 'Come up from where thou
5308	art to this chamber.' Went Setne to the chamber. He
5309	lay down upon a couch of
5310	29. ivory and ebony, his desire receiving gold.
5311	1.29. mr.l, the Eg. word does not survive in Coptic: cf.l.aa. pe-f mr
5312	(і. с. хеє).
5313	81n-s. This reflexive form is usual in II Kh. In Pap. Unuamon,
5314	K 2
p. 150
5315	132 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
5316	hr twn Stne te-f šm.tt-f r zhe gr-s wn-s r-s
5317	r p'
5318	30. P' (sic) "tne n we sgpe ") yor Stne nhse e-f hn
5319	we.l'sthrt e hon-f hr hn n wet shye e mn hbs n p'
5320	t hr st(t)-f
5321	31. wet wnet t' eor hpr pog Stne nwe r we rmt "
5322	e-f Os r wrt mkwet e wn rmt šy zze hr rt(t)-f e-f m
5323	qty Pr-e Stne 'w
5324	32. r twn-f bp-f rh twn-f tb' p'šyp zt mn hbs hr
5325	>.t(t)-f zt Pre Stne h por-kn p'y gy nt e-r-k nom-f
5326	zl-f N(y)-nfr-k?-Pth p' e-r or-w n'y tr-w
5327	33. zt Pre m-šm r Mn-nfr n'e-k hrtw st wh' nom-k
5328	st she r p'e-w rt(t) m-bh Pr-s zt Stne moh Pre p'e
5329	nb "stn "rfp' chenp' Roh p'gy
5330	ii. 83 we have the imperative sdryw n-k, •lie down!' suggesting that
5331	g1 (}) may sometimes be read sir; but cf. ili. 6, note.
5332	hr ten ZITOTN; apparently for hr tr n, the form with suffixes
5333	being r tre, II Kh. vii. 9, corresponding to [r?]iren, ibid. i. 5: Cr.
5334	¿ITOYW: and gITOrI 'upon, 'near,' St., S§ 198 (p. 96), 549.
5335	The det. in dem. is of flesh, agreeing with the meaning of ooTW:=
5336	KúATos, 'bosom' (ST., §198), but it seems possible that the meaning
5337	* bosom' was derived from the present use, and that the original meaning
5338	is shown in TOOrE 'sandals': cf. єp&T: Д&р&т: and the use
5339	of 'between the feet' euphemistically in Hebrew. The inclusion of the
5340	n in the word lwn shows that the origin of the word was already
5341	uncertain. It may perhaps mean 'under' in dem.; cf. vi. 13 where it
5342	corresponds to hr in vi. 15.
5343	wun-s r-s r p oine, &c. The whole phrase recurs Hist. Rom.,
5344	No. 37, of a loud cry of horror. r p' "mne, "downward,' ' right down,'
5345	cf. vi. 14 and eelTi, II Kh. ili. 19.
5346	1. 30. nhse; though M&&CE means only 'awake,' nhse in Eg. and
5347	dem. seldom has merely this meaning; see below, vi. Io note, so here it
5348	may mean 'started up' rather than 'awoke' from the trance.
5349	"s•l hr.t, "place of censer,' i.e. 'a warm place'? or 's•t may, like
5350	Eg.ys-l, mean here 'condition,' 'state"
5351	šhye, fem. with dets. of water and ground: it can hardly be con-
5352	nected with y210 ' dust'
5353	1. 31. Os r, 'mounted on': cf. B. O&cI2oo 'horseman.'
5354	mkwe-t, so also Hist. Rom., No. 139: cf. II Kh. iv. 16; v. 19 (mgye).
5355	A very ancient word occurring in Horhotep, 1. 411, zuos Oze hr mhre-1-k,
p. 151
5356	CH. v] 1 KH. V. 29-33 133
5357	Ta-bubue lay down by the side of Setne, he caused
5358	his hand to go to touch her. She opened her mouth
5359	down-
5360	30. ward in a great cry. And lo! Setne awoke, he
5361	being in a place of furnace, his phallus being inside
5362	a shye, there not being any clothes on earth upon him.
5363	3I. At an hour, that which happened, lo! Setne
5364	perceived a noble person, mounted on a litter (?), there
5365	being many men running at his feet, he being like
5366	a Pharaoh. Setne was about
5367	32. to rise; he was not able to rise on account of
5368	the shame; that is to say there was no clothing on him.
5369	Said (the) Pharaoh, 'Setne, what (hath happened) to thee
5370	in this guise in which thou art?' Said he, 'Ne-nefer-
5371	ka-Ptah is he that hath done all these things to me.'
5372	33. Said (the) Pharaoh, 'Go to Memphis, thy children
5373	they are seeking for thee, they are standing according
5374	to their style before Pharaoh? Said Setne before
5375	Pharaoh, 'My great lord the king, may he accomplish
5376	the duration of Ra! what is the manner
5377	'mount upon thy miwt! The det. in Horhotep probably represents an
5378	object carried on a pole, and so a 'litter'
5379	33e=B. GOXI 'run,' by differentiation of consonants: cf. Hist.
5380	Rom., No. 361; II. Kh. ii. 33, y-w zze showing that it is of late forma-
5381	tion, having no proper sim-f. In twenty-sixthdynastyhieroglyphic
5382	889-f: Ä. Z., 1868, 85.
5383	"w r tren-f, 'attempted to rise, 'was going to rise! The sense
5384	penzei is not uncommon in dem, both in *cjer—here and II Kh. vi. 18
5385	-and in the qual. NHT (vid. note Il Kh. il. 8), II Kh. ii. 15; vi. 28. In
5386	Coptic this meaning is rare, but EeNHOT 'future,' can be exactly
5387	paralleled from Can., 1. 42 (BR., Thes., 1566), " n' ss•0 n6'ne-'r= ẻv Toês
5388	мета тайта кapoês, where the second stela (ed. Groff., p. 28) gives for the
5389	same passage ETNCWOT 'that follow after them' Note the closcly
5390	parallel use of M08: M07) wy, Il Kh. vi. 23.
5391	1. 32. sl, a good instance of XE 'because.'
5392	•½ ror-k, 22рок: &Док, Sт., § 26з; cf. Hist. Rom., No. 34.
5393	&&: is of course the same word as &cy.
5394	I. 33. r p'e-w rll. The r is clearer in l.35, and guile clear in II Kh.
5395	ii. 2, 4. But this is not 02i ep&T0z. The word 'feet, p&t.
p. 152
5396	134 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. I1
5397	34. n šm r Mn-nfr nt e-y rh r-f e mn hbs n p't'
5398	hr st(t)y "s Prs r we hl e-f chy te-f te-f hbs n Stne
5399	zt Pr-s› Stne m-šm r Mn-nfr
5400	35. n'e-k hrtw st inh st chs r p'e-w rt(t) m-bh Pr-ss
5401	Stne w r Mn-nfr hlg-f n n'e-f hrtwn t (sic) gm-f s(st)
5402	e-w inl zt Pr-e on thy
5403	36. p'nt e-r-k.....t het? szy Stne n mt nb
5404	rbpr no'm-f erme Ty-bwbwe erme N(y)-nfr-k?-Pth tr-w
5405	zt Pro› Stne r-y ly tit-y ror-k t' het
5406	37. zt e-w r htb-k 'r-k tm o p'y zms r p'm'() n 'n-t-f
5407	ror-k bp-k stm n()y še t wnet in my de-w p'y zm' n
5408	N('y)-nfr-k'-Pth e wn we.t šltet
5409	38. šbte n t•t-k e wn we sh n stet hr zz-k Stne 'w
5410	y bl m-bh Pr-s e wn wet šltet šbtet n tt-f e wn we
5411	h stet h
5412	39.zz-fšm-fr bryrt hit r•wn(n'y) N'y-nfr-k?-Pth
5413	hn-s zt n-f 'Hwret Stne Pth p'ntr e p'eor nt-k
5414	r-k wz? sby N(y)-nfr-k-Pth
5415	never has the article; that the present phrase corresponds to B.
5416	еепотрнт is clear from II Kh. ii. 9 p rtt притє. The origin
5417	of рнтє : рнT, п may be sought in peT 'grow firm, like
5418	яIє, T 'species,' perhaps from eeorit 'remain'; or pHT
5419	'style' may mean literally 'feet,' "position' (?): cf. Piankhi Stele,
5420	1l. 149-50, 'their feet? (rdwi-sn) were as the feet? of women.'
5421	1. 34. shay; here the S of 02J is by exception written out.
5422	1. 35. hlg-f; N.B. the suffix is written before the det.
5423	n 1 gm-f : 4, 'hand,' is without its det. and the two words seem to
5424	have been accidentally fused together in the writing, leaving n d[•t-f?]
5425	incomplete. This n t gm-f can hardly be intended for siTЄрegOIne,
5426	for which see II Kh. vi. 3.
5427	1.36. The beginning is difficult to restore; ey-k [n-m-f]" ke1(?) seems
5428	meaningless, as a past tense is required.
5429	у; cf. iїi. 22. For the reading of this important group, giving the
5430	key to many words, see SPIEGELBErG, A. Z., 1899, 24 et seqq. cy lt is
5431	'extent of hand,' i. e. 'power, so=éfeva in Ros. 31 apud SPIEGELBERG,
5432	ibid., p. 3o. Note the derivative N&- = n y in папарнТ=üs sué,
5433	St., $.583, as well as examples quoted by SPIEGELBERG. Is STHI
5434	(in O. C. Par., ERm., Ä. Z. 83, 100) n' y, 'the two hands,' rather than
5435	'the limbs,' since the true plural of the latter NHOT occurs in the next
5436	line but one?
p. 153
5437	CH. V] 1 KH. V. 34-39 135
5438	34. of going to Memphis that I can do, there not
5439	being any clothing on earth upon me?' Called Pharaoh
5440	to a slave who was standing by, he caused him to
5441	give clothing to Setne. Said Pharaoh, 'Setne, go to
5442	Memphis.
5443	35. Thy children, they are alive, they are standing
5444	according to their style before Pharaoh.' Setne came
5445	to Memphis, he embraced his children with hand (?),
5446	he found them alive. Said Pharaoh, ' Is it drunkenness
5447	• 36. that in (?) which thou [wast ?] before?' Setne re-
5448	lated everything that had become of him with Ta-bubue
5449	with Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah, all. Said Pharaoh, 'Setne, I did
5450	the extent of my hand to thee before,
5451	37. saying, " They will slay thee, thou not taking this
5452	book to the place of carrying it (away) that thou didst.
5453	Thou didst not hearken to me until this moment again.
5454	Let this book be taken to Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah, there being
5455	a fork
5456	38. stick in thy hand, there being a censer of fire on
5457	thy head." Setne came out from before Pharaoh, there
5458	being a fork stick in his hand, there being a censer of
5459	hre upon
5460	39. his head. He went down to the tomb, in which
5461	was Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah. Ahure said to him, 'Setne, Ptah
5462	the great god is he that hath brought thee, thou being
5463	well.' Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah laughed.
5464	1. 37. rir-k, not EpOK 'to thee, but *ep&k 'that thou didst'; cr.
5465	ili. 1. 20; iv. l. 13.
5466	en seems vaguely used in dem. (cf. l. 8 above), and here it would
5467	almost seem an adversative particle. But perhaps the king is com-
5468	plaining that Setne has 'again' neglected his advice, implying that he
5469	had done so before.
5470	1.38. That le stands here for hr is certified bythe parallel earlier in the
5471	line. This demotic sign, which so often renders Fig. fe is perhaps in
5472	originthe'syllabic' hieroglyph !! and would be belter so transcribed
5473	throughout instead of !!?, b.
p. 154
5474	136 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
5475	mh VI
5476	I. Pth p' ntr e p' eor nt-k "-k wz
5477	2. sby N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth zt mt e zt-y s n-k t' het t'y
5478	or Stne sme r N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth gm-f s e hr-w zt p' Rs
5479	py wn(n'y) hn t' hit tr-s
5480	?. "r 'Hwret erme N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth sme r Stne m šs
5481	zt Stne N(y)-nfr-k-Pth 'n wn mt e-s šlf zt N(y)-nfr-
5482	k'-Pth Stne k? (r)rk-s zt ›Hwret
5483	4. erme Mr-b p'e-s šre st n Obt rwh ty hn ty
5484	htn yptn sh nfr my hn-w s er hr-k mte-k šp wet
5485	hyytt mte-k šm r Obte mte-k 'n-t-w?
5486	5. r bn'y(y) Stne wr hry hn t' hit šm-f m-bh Pr-s
5487	szy-f m-bh Pr-s n mt nb-t y•zt n-f N('y)-nfr-k'-Pth
5488	tr-w zt Pr-s Stne m-šm r Qbt yany
5489	6. 'Hwret erme Mr-b p'e-s šre zt-f m-oh Pr-s my
5490	te-w n'-y t' shret Pr-s erme p'e-s sbte te-w n-f t'
5491	shret Pr-s erme p'e-s sbte l-f r mrt
5492	7. "r-f [slgr bp-f hir ph-f r Qbt ?r-w in smy nom-s
5493	e-y-hr n' wob•w n 'S [n] Obt p' mr-šn n 'S st 'w r(?)
5494	hry r het-f šp-w tt-fr n' grw d-fr hry nm-wšm-f
5495	8. hn h-ntr n'S n Obt Hr-p'-hrt te-f n-w h pt rp
5496	1.2. e zi-y s; perhaps not r•zl-y s because mt is indefinite.
5497	sme, "blessing,' 'giving of thanks, ceeox, as RevilLout, rather
5498	than ceeH 'voice' Cf. II Kh. ili. I.
5499	e hr-w zl: cf. Il Kh. i. 1o. Is this use derived from Eg. hr-f stm-f
5500	(ERM., Gr. 229) 'he hears' (frequentative), cf. cy &gjcwTEee; or is it
5501	perhaps from rh-f stm, 'he could (?) hear'? rh and hr might easily be
5502	confused (see Verbum, i. §245). In the present instance, at any rate,
5503	a potential meaning seems required.
5504	1. 3. "k, perhaps some unusual word, or is it a fault of writing for "r-k as
5505	in l. 11?=Late Eg. two-k.
5506	huhworwo e mprativ from
5507	wưh; cf. MüLLER, A. Z., 1888, 94, for the hieroglyphic form. It seems
5508	to occur in Pamonth, ii. 33, tw r.w0h (?) mw, 'bread, also water.'
5509	ly, B. T&I; vid. HESS, Pp. 59, 132. SPIEGELBErg has recognized
p. 155
5510	CH. V] 1 KH. VI. 1-8 137
5511	Sixth
5512	I. 'Ptah the great god is he that hath brought thee,
5513	thou being well!
5514	2. Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah laughed saying, 'This is a thing
5515	that I said to thee at first' Setne made salutation (?)
5516	to Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah. He found it that people would
5517	have said (?) it was Ra that was in the whole tomb.
5518	3. Ahure with Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah made salutation (?) to
5519	Setne exceedingly. Said Setne, 'Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah, is
5520	there a thing that is disgraceful?' Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah
5521	said, 'Thou knowest (?) it, that Ahure
5522	4. with Mer-ab her child, they are in Coptos and
5523	also here in this tomb by the craft of a good scribe.
5524	Let it be commanded unto thee that thou take a labour,
5525	and that thou go to Coptos, and that thou bring them
5526	5. hither.' Setne came up (from) in the tomb, he
5527	went before Pharaoh, he related before Pharaoh every-
5528	thing that Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah said to him, all. Said
5529	Pharaoh, 'Setne, go to Coptos, bring
5530	6. Ahure with Mer-ab her son.' He said before
5531	Pharaoh, 'Let there be given to me the pleasure-boat
5532	of Pharaoh with its equipment. The pleasure-boat of
5533	Pharaoh was given to him with its equipment, he went
5534	up on board,
5535	7. he made sail. He delayed not, he reached Coptos.
5536	They made announcement of it before the priests of Isis
5537	of Coptos, and the high priest of Isis. They came down
5538	to meet him, they took his hand to the shore. He went
5539	up from it, he went
5540	8. into the temple of Isis of Coptos and Harpochrates.
5541	He caused ox, fowl, wine to be brought, he made
5542	its Late Egyptian form in the common group dy (Rec. de Trav.,
5543	1899,46).
5544	hn, 'command,' generally takes the vague object s.
p. 156
5545	138 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
5546	or-f glyl wtne m-oh'S n Qbt Hr-p'-hrt šm-f r tbset
5547	n Qbte erme n' wsb•w n 'S p' mr-šn n 's
5548	9. "r-w hrw III grh III e-w wh' hn n' howt nt hr t'
5549	hset n Qbt tr-w e-w pn' n n' wytw n n' shw Pr-nh
5550	e-w "š n n' shw nt hr "t(t)-w bp-w gm n' cyw
5551	10. n htp nt e 'Hwret erme Mrob p'e-s šre nom-w
5552	gm-s N(y)-nfr-k'-Pth e bp-w gm n'ywn htp n'Hwret
5553	erme Mr-b p'e-s šre nhse-f
5554	11. n we hl " wb? e-fy nms m šs e-f w r. t
5555	het n Stne nwe Stne ror-f zt Stne n p' hl e r-k n
5556	smte n rmt e-f y n ms 'n r-k (r)rh n' cy•w
5557	12. n htp nt e 'Hwret erme Mr-b p'e-s šre hn-w
5558	zt p' hl" n Stne zt-s p' yt n p'yt n p'e yt e-y-hr
5559	p' yt n p'e yt zt zt-s p' yt (szc)
5560	13. n p'e yt e-y-hr p'yt n p'e yt zt err n y•w n
5561	htp n 'Hwret erme Mr-b p'e-s šre hr twn p' qh rs
5562	n p' ly n p' h-m-šs-V?...... zt
5563	14. Stne n p' hl " ew e gm'e p' eor p' hmšs-V?
5564	gor-kr-k n'y r ty 'n-w p'e-fy r p' tne tb-t-s zt p'
5565	hl " n Stne my r-w hrh r-hr-y my or-w
5566	1. Io. gm does not take explanatory st, but rh often does (l. 3).
5567	nhse, of rising from the dead, also in II Kh. vii. 2; a still more
5568	remarkable use occurs in Hist. Rom., No. 167, apparently for boarding
5569	a ship in war.
5570	1. 11. n ws hles, an interesting use of n, so common in Eg. as m.
5571	hl es 20b (?). The last word is fairly certain, and its position as
5572	a title paralleled in hl stm 5, v.I.
5573	e-fynms: cf. Il Kh. ili. 12 sbg n ms.
5574	1.12. The facsimile shows clear traces of at zt instead of one &t alone,
5575	as read in other editions.
5576	np'yt has evidently dropped out at the end of the line.
5577	1. 13. e"r=єpe : &pe, St., § 372. e alone is required in dem. in
5578	subordinate or relative sentences; but this is indicative and emphatic.
5579	p' h-m-šs-V?. m šs is very clear in Il. 16, 17; in the other instances
5580	it is doubtful. The last three signs are the same as in the group br.....
5581	equivalent to hr-hb, 'lector' in Rh. bil., No. 367.
5582	1. 14. erw &pHr 'perhaps,' as Revillour pointed out; cf. Il Kh.
5583	iv. 27; Kufi, v. 35, with the same construction as here.
p. 157
5584	CH. v] 1 KH. VI. 8-14 139
5585	burnt-offering and libation before Isis of Coptos and
5586	Harpochrates. He went to the gebel of Coptos with
5587	the priests of Isis and the high priest of Isis.
5588	9. They spent three days three nights, seeking in the
5589	tombs which were on the gebel of Coptos, all, turning
5590	over the stelae of the scribes of the House of Life,
5591	reading the writings that were upon them. They found
5592	not the houses
5593	1o. of rest in which were Ahure with Mer-ab her son.
5594	Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah found it that they found not the
5595	houses of rest of Ahure with Mer-ab her son. He
5596	rose up
5597	Il. as an old man, a priest great of age exceedingly.
5598	He came to meet Setne. Setne saw him. Said Setne
5599	to the old man, 'Thou art in the appearance of a man
5600	that is great of age; dost thou know the houses
5601	12. of rest in which are Ahure with Mer-ab her
5602	child?' The old man said to Setne, 'The father of the
5603	father of my father said it before the father of my father,
5604	saying "The father (of the father)
5605	13. of my father said it before the father of my father
5606	saying, The houses of rest of Ahure with Mer-ab her
5607	son are by the southern corner of the house of the
5608	hemshes... priest (?)..... ""' Said
5609	14. Setne to the old man, 'Perhaps there is cheat-
5610	ing (?), that which the hemshes...(?) did to thee, on
5611	account of which thou goest to cause his house to be
5612	brought to the ground. Said the old man to Setne,
5613	'Let a watch be set over me, let them
5614	gm, S. Owweee " distort,' "pervert'; in dem. 'injure,' 'rob'=
5615	ådıкei», Ros., 1. 18, written km'e in Kufi.
5616	ny; see note to ili. 12.
5617	"18-20 r po ine: сf. II ЄПЄCHT deicere.
5618	hrh (cf. l.15)...hrlr. The uninflected 2&pe& and the quad-
5619	riliteral hrhr require the periphrasis with • in dem. A general
5620	extension of this use led to Coptic reapegcwtese.
p. 158
5621	140 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
5622	15. hrhr p' ry n p' hmšs-V? e-f kpr e op-w gm
5623	›Hwret erme Mr-b p'e-s šre hr p' qh rs n p'e-f y
5624	my "r-w n'-y btw "r-w hihrp'hl"
5625	16.gm-w p'yn htp n'Hwret erme Mr-b p'e-s
5626	šre hr p' qh n rs [n p']'y n p' h-m-šs-V? te Stne qre
5627	n n' rmtw-ry r t' shret Pr-s te-f
5628	17. qt-w p'y n p' h-m-šs-V? rh p'e-f gy t' het
5629	te N('y)-nfr-k'-Pth gm Stne p' hpr e nte-f p' e'r 'y r
5630	Qbt r ty gm-w p' ry n htp nt e 'Hwrfet]
5631	18. erme Mr-b p'e-s šre nom-f el Stne r mrt r t'
5632	shret Pr-s› hty-f bp-f hrr ph-f r Mn-nfr erme p'mše
5633	rwn(n'y) erme-f tr-w ?r-w en s'my
5634	1g. nom-s m-oh Pre ef'w? r bry hrt hetn t'
5635	shret Pr-s te-f qw n n' rmtw-y r t hit nt e
5636	N(y)-nfr-k-Pth nom-s te-fr-w hsys t'e-w ry?t
5637	20. hrytn wrgy sh mnq pyszy n Stne He-m-ws
5638	erme N(y-nfr-k-Pth erme ›Hwret t'e-f rmtt Mr-b
5639	p'e-s šre sh-w p'y de......
5640	21.mnp XV (bt) tpy pr......
5641	1.15. e bp-w: a clear and remarkable instance with future-perfect
5642	meaning.
5643	1. 16. n' rmiz-y are the 'noble' (dead), i.e. Ahure and Merab, not
5644	'the nobles' of Coptos; see l.19 and cf. Br., Thes., 939.
5645	117 gmp hpr e; cf. II Kh. v. 15.
5646	nte-f: dem. makes no distinction between abs. pron. NTOY and
5647	subjunctive mle-f NT&C.
5648	1. I9. The facsimile favours n hry rather than r bry.
5649	hr 1° k.in, D& T2H M; ST., $ 575.
5650	hsys. Hess' interpretation of this difficult word is clever. The
5651	word occurs again (masc.) II Kh. vi. I6.
5652	1. 20. The unusual form of we may indicate that the word is to be read
5653	with emphasis as a numeral, not as the indef. article 0X.
5654	s•zy. A substantive, 'tale, in apposition to sh; or perhaps an.
5655	active or passive participle ' telling (of),' 'told (of)': cf. zl, II Kh. ii. 23.
5656	rml-t, for 'wife'; also in Dendereh xxv B. A, xxvi A. 29. The
p. 159
5657	cH. v] 1 KH. VI. 15-21 I4I
5658	15. raze the house of the hemshes...(?); if it be
5659	that they have not found Ahure with Mer-ab her son
5660	under the south corner of his house, let abomination be
5661	done to me. They set a watch over the old man.
5662	16. They found the house of rest of Ahure with
5663	Mer-ab her son under the south corner of the house of
5664	the hemshes... (?). Setne gave entries to the great
5665	personages to the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh, he caused
5666	17. the house of the hemshes....?) to be built
5667	according to its manner at first. Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah
5668	caused Setne to discover the event, that it was he that
5669	had come to Coptos to cause them to find the house
5670	of rest in which was Ahure
5671	18. with Mer-ab her son. Setne went up on board
5672	the pleasure-boat of Pharaoh. He went down stream,
5673	he did not delay; he reached Memphis with the people
5674	that were with him, all. They made announcement
5675	19. of it before Pharaoh; he came down to meet the
5676	pleasure-boat of Pharaoh. He gave entries to the great
5677	people unto the tomb in which was Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah.
5678	He caused to be made a filling (?) above them
5679	20. in one manner. A complete writing is this,
5680	a story of Setne Khamuas with Ne-nefer-ka-Ptah with
5681	Ahure his wife, Mer-ab her son. This copy (?) was
5682	written......
5683	21, Year 15, first month of winter (Tybi)......
5684	reading rmbi rather than hm-l seems certified by the O.C. Tpoeer
5685	transcribing / rmd-l » in a bilingual label: STRINDORFr, A.2., 1890, 52.
5686	be...is perhaps some word for 'a copy': cf. 0 l9-s (?), "copy it,"
5687	in Il Kh. v. 13. Krall's reading, above, p. 4o, nole, seems harlly
5688	possible even in his published copy.
5689	1.21.?bl tpy pr would doubtless be read 1 (?)= TwBe.
p. 160
5690	CHAPTER 'VI
5691	TRANSLITERATION
5692	(page I)
5693	1......•[rs]w(e) e-w mt(t) erme-st) zt n mjt-t
5694	(N)Mh-wsht [t hmjt n Stme nt qt(t).... e e phre
5695	2... •...er twe n rstylt hpr m-šm hrr....
5696	n 0 mw n Stme ple-t hyl e•y-t gm wrt bret n šw [e-f?)
5697	rt(t) n•m-w
5698	1. x. For the restoration see v. 1o.
5699	(LV)Mh-. The insertions of superfluous m, n, as n, or as n abound
5700	in this text: cf. one instance also in I Kh. v.I.
5701	Jem-t; for the complete group see iii 8.
5702	Stme, Stne, Sebiore, Srwv (?), Eg. sm. The capricious changes of
5703	form in this title can be abundantly paralleled out of the history of
5704	Egyptian star-names, and even names of persons and places. Cf. above,
5705	pp. 4,9. There is unfortunately some doubt about the reading Srwv for
5706	the decan name in the Greek text of the Greek and Old Coptic Horoscope
5707	referred to on p. g. In his Catalogue, p. 129, 1. 50, Mr. Kenyon read
5708	отоиа. Erwv is Goodwin's reading. Mr. Kenyon, in reply to my
5709	enquiry, remarks: 'The supposed a may be only a mark to fill the
5710	line, though it is not of the same shape as elsewhere in this papyrus;
5711	and the preceding letter may be v as well as u. The two letters are
5712	formed very similarly, almost the only difference being that el generally
5713	has a curve in its final stroke, while st has it straight. But here the end
5714	of the final stroke has disappeared. However, I should be rather
5715	inclined to read it orov? As the form Stme is found in II Kh. either
5716	oтwи or orwp would be equally easy to identify with the title. On the
5717	other hand oroua is not a good Egyptian formation.. It seems possible
5718	that Srov or Srop is an erratic representative of the name of the nine-
5719	teenth decan, Eg. Smd-t, Smt—in Hephaestion's list Suár—produced by
5720	the influence of the well-known title of Khamuas.
5721	nt ql.1. Does the relative refer to Setme or to Meh-wesekht?
p. 161
5722	THE SECOND TALE OF.KHAMUAS
5723	TRANSLATION
5724	I.1..... •. she dreamed to herself] dream, they
5725	speaking with her [saying, 'Art] thou Meh-wesekht
5726	[the wife] of Setme, who lieth [in vain seeking (?)] to
5727	receive healing
5728	2.......?[when the morning of to-morrow hath]
5729	come, go to the entrance [of the rooms (?) of urinating (?)
5730	of Setme th[y husjband. Behold! thou shalt (?) find
5731	a vine of melon (?) [that] groweth there
5732	gl.t; the / is probably a false attachment to the det., recurring in y.
5733	'house, In-l, v. 36, &c.; cl. grh-t. The following word, which is very
5734	faint and uncertain, can hardly be "sk (vii. 10). The translation may be
5735	' that lieth without conception'; but whether it was the husband or the wife
5736	or both that suffered, perhaps from the plague of some god, is not clear.
5737	e0, probably for re.
5738	1. 2. For restoration see v. 11.
5739	O mu Steeoot is 'to rain, TATTAM, 772, but epoteeoor is
5740	an expression for urine. Perhaps here 'drain,' or "draw water'? Or the
5741	water sign mw may be only del. of some other word o.
5742	hy, imperfect, also in 1.5.
5743	eir-gm. This is the emphatic periphrasis, here expressing the
5744	future, cf. I Kh. ili. 6, note, for the emphatic periphrasis, and Verbum, ii,
5745	§276,7 for the use of the emphatic form ror, e.r.
5746	bed n šwu, &c.: cf. vii. 2-3. Eg. 8.%, 'bush,' and ju, a common
5747	vegetable, probably a 'melon' Beu is used of vines and fruit trees, but
5748	not of mere herbs, so suiting the translation ' melon' for tw. In Kufi,
5749	xix. 32, we have b'e•l n letm (Eg. ndm, 'carob' ?).
5750	pWT: BR., Wlb. 878.
5751	мит().
p. 162
5752	144 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 11
5753	3.• v]r-w bke (?) s erme ne-st qmqmy? wt
5754	mt-t ty ny-st in? •..n phry•w mt-t ty
5755	4.... ....tt-f n [p grh(t) n] rn-f tny? (N)Mh-
5756	[w]s/[ithn]t rswet e ny ne nw(e)[s(t)] r°r-w ?r-s(t) r hmt
5757	5. nb g•zt-w n-s(st) n rswet qt(t)-s(t) n-f? "] twne
5758	[Stme] pe-s(t) hy šp-s hn [wr mw n Jur tt-f hpr p[e-s(t)
5759	ss?. . "r-skt) p nhte
5760	б. .. e] hst[f nfr?] tb•t[s n p] m šs (n)m[r-f
5761	n-s(st)] s' ‹§-f n-s(st) sh qt(t)-f [n-f S]tm[e n ws grh(t)
5762	7. ..mt](t) erme-f zt Mh-wsht tle-k hmt
5763	šp[s]....•tp hm hl nt e-w r ms[t-f e-w r ty rnj-f
5764	r S-'Sr ne-s
5765	8....... tny? se Stm]e hn t rswet e ny ne
5766	nw(e)-f rr-w ne [nfr hst-f n] p m šs 'r pe-s? "n? n?
5767	•• Plur.. pš?.. s(t) n
5768	9... .. ms-s(t) we hm hl ph•w]t t-w (r)rh st Stme
5769	1. 3. hke, hkte (?); cf. S.cywwde damno afficere, vulnerare: hardly
5770	ДШк : ¿ шик ' shave?
5771	gmqmy is a mere guess from the sign for qno, ii. 5, and qm°, vi. 15;
5772	cf. OWBOWBE 'melon'; cucum-is. On the etymology of cucumis
5773	see HeHN, Kulturpßanzen, 1894, p. 309.
5774	mt-t: note the free use of the conjunctive in this text as compared
5775	with I Kh.
5776	1. 4. For the first part cf. vii. Io, and for the waking v. 14.
5777	Iny; in v. 14 Iny-s with reflexive pronoun; or gy? or poeIc?
5778	e ny ne, &c. Difficult to analyze; one might suspect it to be an
5779	absurd writing for e-wnne n-s r.r-s EN&CN&T EPO(C) 'which she
5780	was beholding,' but it recurs in 1.8 and v. 14, still with єpwox.
5781	1. 5. For the restoration at beginning cf. 1. 9 and v. 15; later,
5782	vil. 9,1o.
5783	ip-s hn we mw. So also in the parallel. šp must be absolute,
5784	•she conceived,' and the rest is to emphasize the virility of the
5785	husband.
5786	nhle; cf. iii. 18.
5787	1. 6. Or [ne-nfr] 2/ [n Stme] tbe-L[-s]; cf. iii. 23.
5788	np m ss, Achm. яency&, the usual form here, but cf. iv. 18.
5789	(n2)mr-f, &c.: cf.v. 5.
5790	gt-J n-J, &c.: cf. v. 9-10.
5791	gl-f n-f Sime. This curious resumption of the subject is frequent
p. 163
5792	CH. VI] 11 KH. I. 3-9 145
5793	3.......wound (?) it with its gourds (?), and thou
5794	shalt put it back (?) [and thou shalt make it (?)] into
5795	medicine, and thou shalt cause (?)
5796	4..... • . thou wilt conceive in a liquid of con-
5797	ception] from him in [the night] named.' Meh-wesekht
5798	awoke [from in] the dream, these being (?) the things
5799	that she saw, she did according to thing
5800	5. Levery that they had told (?) her by dream; she
5801	lay down by] the side of [Setme] her husband; she
5802	conceived in [a liquid of] conception from him. There
5803	came her [time, behold! she made] the sign
5804	6. Lof women that are pregnant. Setme made an-
5805	nouncement of it before Pharaoh] his heart [being
5806	glad] because of [it] exceedingly. He [bound on her]
5807	amulet, he read to her writing. Setme laid [him] down
5808	one night
5809	7. [and dreamed to himself (?) dream, they (?) speaking]
5810	with him saying, 'Meh-wesekht thy wife, she hath received
5811	[conception in the night (?)]. The child that shall be
5812	born, he [shall be named] Si-Osiri, numerous
5813	8. [are the marvels that he shall do in the land of
5814	Egypt (?): Awoke Setmje from the [dream], these
5815	being (?) what he saw, [his heart was glad] exceedingly.
5816	[She?] made [her months (?) of] pregnancy, she divided (?)
5817	9..... [came her time of bearing], she bore a
5818	in IIKh.(iii.7;v.9; vii.9), but only after the dalirus ethicus(with gf
5819	and šm): cf. Kufi, x. 29, 30. Coptic dialects generally insert MOT:
5820	NXE before a resumed subject, but in Achm. we constantly find the
5821	construction without MOT, as here, STERN, A.Z., 1886, 133-
5822	1. 7. Cf. i. I and v. to for the beginning.
5823	P hmhl: brought forward for emphasis like Mh-wsht in the last
5824	sentence. This is a very common trick in Il Kh.
5825	ni e-wur mst-f. There is the same inappropriate use of the plural in
5826	Coptic, e.д. Фн ст ятмедсу (S. масту); Sт., § 478 ad fin.
5827	1j rn-fr: cf.l.g and vii. 1o.
5828	1. 9. ms-sl, &c.: cf. vii. 10.
5829	r rl: cf. ili. 8 and note to I Kh. iv. 4.
5830	GRIFFITI. L
p. 164
5831	146 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
5832	[t-f rn-f]r S-'Srrh ty zt-w s(t) nrswetr..... . s(t)
5833	r qne?
5834	10.... •..n hlke r[-w?] s.nh-f hpr-f e.r p hm
5835	b[ S-Sr rpt It e] hr-[w] zt r-f rnpt II-t e-f n [rnp]t
5836	Ilt e hr-w zt r-f rnpt Ilt
5837	11.... •. n] wš n nw(e) r p hm hl S-'S'r e ne-r
5838	P mr? .. n p m šs "y[f?] zr-f t-[w] s(t) (sic) r
5839	t c.t?
5840	12. [sbet?].. •..n-frpsh rt-w ty n-f sbet
5841	hpr p b[m hl S-'Sr ef]'y? n zt...bs?... erme
5842	n sh•w Pr-nh hn
5843	13....... myh [n] p t t•t-f wn(n)e mr-se Stme
5844	[ty Pr-s?]n-w se r t hrwt móh Pr-s mt
5845	14. [Pr-s?] ........ mt?-f r n-f hr? r r-w tr-w
5846	rpwb? ...... [e? S]tme wb r hrwt
5847	rh? •. ne-f sy•w(t)
5848	15.... •ephm bi S-pSr]...... hrwt e-'y
5849	[hr-f hef? wet wnet]terhpr e- Stme stm r P
5850	hrw n we sh
5851	r hly, &c.: cf. v. 15
5852	ly zt-zus; probably for le•zt-w s.
5853	The last words are very doubtful in meaning. Perhaps 'lo, [they
5854	put him] to the breast?
5855	1. ro. hick: cf. S. ¿hoode 'be pregnant? The previous word seems
5856	to have the sexual det.
5857	"y-w s.inh; so also with this quadriliteral in Late Eg.: Verbum, ii,
5858	§ 194, p. 86.
5859	e hr-w zt; potential "they might have said'; or frequentative ' they
5860	used to say': see I Kh. vi.2
5861	1. 1. потЄсуП, rarely ПОТЕЩ : St., §56g. Generally no second n
5862	is written, but here it seems to appear, though perhaps it only represents
5863	the n of mu.
5864	y=&l&l crescere: for examples see Br., Wtb. 1549, s. v. inre.
5865	2r-j xwwрe: xwpe fortis esse: cf. the causative T&xpo- in
5866	I Kh. iv. 20.
5867	1% A mere guess at the reading: cf. I Kh. v. 20. It can hardly
5868	be (n)mr-pr(.1).
5869	1.12.... n-fr: cf. ii. 27.
5870	'y n z1: such a construction seems possible, cf. I Kh. v. 22.
p. 165
5871	CH. VI] I1 KH. I. 9-15 147
5872	[ma]le child. They caused Setme to know of it, [he
5873	named him] Si-Osiri, according to that that was said
5874	in [the] dream that [he kept (?)] in (his) bosom (?).
5875	10....... of pregnancy (?), [they] nurtured him.
5876	It came to pass that the child [Si-Osiri was in year one,
5877	• it being that people] might have (?) said he made two
5878	years. He being in two [years] it being that they might
5879	have (?) said he made three years.
5880	I1.......[And it came to pass that Setme never
5881	passed an hour] without looking at the child Si-Osiri,
5882	great being the love [that he had for him] exceed-
5883	ingly. He grew big, he grew strong, he was put to the
5884	school (?)
5885	12....•.. he rivalled the scribe that they had
5886	caused to give instruction to him. The chfild Si-Osiri]
5887	became [he] beginning (?) to say magic (?) with the
5888	scribes of the House of Life in
5889	13. [the temple of Ptah (?)] .. • [made] wonder [of]
5890	the world at him, and Setme used to love [that Pharaoh
5891	should cause] him to be taken to the éoprý before
5892	Pharaoh, and that
5893	14..... ]and that he should make for himself face (?)
5894	to them, all. [And on a certain day it happened that]
5895	Setme (was) purified for éoprń according to (?)...
5896	his dwellings
5897	15. ...... the child Si-[Osiri was going to the]
5898	éopтń before [him, also. At a time] that which happened,
5899	behold! Setme heard the voice of a wailing
5900	1. 13. myh np l, 'amazement, lit. "forgetfulness (Br., Wib. Suppl. 561)
5901	of the world,' 'of the world' giving a superlative sense, cf. iil. a2 the
5902	joy of the world'
5903	1.14. hr?: the same group v.1, q.v. Here it can hardly be 20%0.
5904	wubr hrul: cf. ili. 33-4.
5905	1. 15. wº.1 rene-l , &c.; for the restoration see 1 Kh. iv. 8.
5906	'h, Eg. 'h, 'distress."
5907	1 2
p. 166
5908	148 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
5909	16......-fgšp......ne-f cy•w(t)
5910	nt e-w fy [n•m-f?]r bl t hset e poh
5911	17...... e ne-es LPJ 3550 ho?-f gšp.
5912	•.-fn? rt • r-f nw.
5913	18 •. nht?.. • Le-lf gl [n] we tm e wn
5914	[e] mn nfr? [n p t] mšs. [m-s-f zt] Stme
5915	19. •.rr-wnphrwn? r rmt hm
5916	nt e-w fy 'm-w r thse[!]....
5917	20. •. qtly p nt] e-w or-f n py rmt km hn
5918	•Mnt ..
5919	2I. m. e-r-k r hn
5920	›Mnt
5921	22. ht.... [St]me [tb•t-]s n p m šs
5922	23. stm p hrw • zt p hm
5923	24. [bl S-Sr] •.r pe-f •'h? šn
5924	25. Stme . m-s? ny.. gm?
5925	26.. • šm Stme ?] w6 m()
5926	27. hn-w. [nwe]-k
5927	1.16. gsp, "look,' vi. 19, 26; k$p in Lond. Gnost., Gloss., very like
5928	божут : хочут. The meaning already recognized by REVILLOUT
5929	in Kufi, xi. 17. O:X is generally rendered byg in II Kh.
5930	fy nºm-f: cf.1.19=?n nm-f, ii. 1o, 12 only of carrying the corpse,
5931	otherwise fy-1-f, 'n.t-f, ii. 7,12.
5932	r bl t hse-l; probably r is accidentally omitted.
5933	• 1. 17. Jeje cf. ii. 12; cyorcyor (cf. Eg. s•2'šP), not uncommon.
5934	London Gnost., Gloss., p. 14; Ros., 1. 18 e-w , Ješ= evdóğos, and BR.,
5935	Thes. 1016 n' Jexew.
5936	h-f, or he.1-f?
5937	1. 18. The first word resembles M&&T, iii. 18.
5938	e-tgl, &c.; cf. ii. 1o.
5939	gk=B. xWA, S. qual. Goole.
5940	Im Teeн, Toee 'mat,' such as monks slept on. Is it from tm,
5941	' wrap,' ii. 8?
5942	nfr? The parallel has rmt,'man."
5943	1.19.rmt hm. There are many instances in this MS. of omission of
5944	the plur. det.
5945	1. 20. Cl. ii. 15.
p. 167
5946	CH. VI] I1 KH. I. 16-27 149
5947	16..... looked ... . of his dwellings ... . [a rich
5948	man] whom they were carrying out (to?) the desert,
5949	the wailing being [loud
5950	17. exceedingly] •....• much being [the] glory
5951	[in which he was compared to that in which (?)] he
5952	himself [was]. He gazed [again], he [looked (?)] at his
5953	feet (?) ; behold! he saw [a poor man
5954	18. being carried out from Memphis to the cemetery]
5955	•... he being wrapped [with] a mat, there being ....
5956	there not beling any man (?) on earth] walking [after
5957	him. Said] Setme, 'By
5958	19. [Ptah, the great God, how much better it shall
5959	be in Amenti for great men (?)] for wh[om they make
5960	glory (?)] with the voice of [wailing?] compared (?) to
5961	poor men (?) whom they take to the desert [without
5962	glory of funeral (?)]!
5963	20. But Si-Osiri said, 'There shall be done to thee
5964	in Amenti] like [that which] they will (?) do to this
5965	poor man in Amenti, [there shall not be done
5966	21. to thee that which shall be done to this rich
5967	man in Amenti] .... thou shalt [go (?)] into
5968	• Amenti
5969	22....... grieved was the] heart [of] Set]me [on
5970	account of] it, exceedingly
5971	23. hear (?) the voice.. • said the
5972	child
5973	24. Si-Osiri] • to his ...... wailing (?), asked
5974	25. [Setme]. ..after these things .. find
5975	26.. ••• went Setme [to] a place
5976	27. in them. •...thou [seest (?)]
5977	1.21 et seqg. The precise relative positions of these fragments as
5978	copied on the plate of transcription are open lo some douls. (The
5979	two fragments marked A and B cannot be placed, the other small
5980	fragments of pp. i. and ii. were put in position in 1895.)
5981	1.25. m-s ny; cf.I Kh. iv. 38.
p. 168
5982	150 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. LPT. 11
5983	28. •.n ne-f he-w
5984	29. hr? n.....
5985	30. nt hr t [bset?]
5986	31. nh? m gty-w?
5987	32. • pe-f nom? (sic) 11
5988	33. • ty (n)m r-W.•
5989	34. • [e] wn hyn['w] ky•w e te-w
5990	(page II)
5991	I. e wn hynw kyw e te-w hret mw t [alyw n
5992	te-w ryt hry•t e-w pte r 'nt-w r hry e lhylnw ky•w
5993	šty h[yltzt hr rt(t)-w r tm ty šm-w r r-s(st)
5994	2. šm-w r t wsht mh Vt e•r Stme nw r n hy šps
5995	e-w che y pe-w rt(t) n chs ne-t wn-t-w smy e gns? e-w
5996	herpre-wsllepk?n
5997	3. p sbe n t wsht mh V•t smne hr t-ef (sic) yrt n
5998	'mn (sic) n we rmt e-f šll e-f š sgp šm (sic) n p hn n
5999	t wsh't mh VI e-r Stme nw r n ntrw n t? [gnbe]
6000	n rmt(sic) >Mnt
6001	4. e-w che r pe-w rt(t) n che e n? šmše? n 'Mnt chs
6002	1. 31. enl, written as in ii. 11.
6003	1. I. te-wo; so written also in l. x6, but normally in l. 1g.
6004	hre-t is not merely cibus, Spe, but provisions of all sorts, as Eg.
6005	hr-l; cf. I Kh. v. 17.
6006	For forms of t, 'bread,' see Rh. bil, pap., No. 255, and Lond.
6007	Gnost., Gloss.
6008	mw i, "drink and food.' mw for 'drink' in general is common in
6009	marriage contracts.
6010	Sly hyt; cf. Kufi, xviii, 23. šlyis Eg. *d((yIKI),hytl 2OEITE(T).
6011	sm-w? I do not see how to distinguish ph from śm in II Kh.
6012	Possibly ph does not occur in it.
6013	1. 2. ne-t rent-w; unetymological spelling for METOTNTot, n' nt
6014	wn mle-w: cf. nn wnw dw-f for eerrT&y, Pap. Unuamon, i. x + 23.
6015	smy o gus (?); cf. I Kh. v. 5.
6016	k? (for k° in II Kh. see mkh, v. 34; also kky, iv. 5; km, vi.9). Can
6017	it be s=Eg. s, 'bolt" It corresponds to guere in l. 14, KEAS (?).
6018	1. 3. One might read hr t ws.t yr.t, ' the one eye, that is the right,' but
6019	apparently the flesh sign is here e-f &, and used fancifully in writing
6020	le-f on account of the peculiar anticipatory use of the pronoun of which
p. 169
6021	CH. V1] II KH. I. 28—II. 4 151
6022	28. his nobles •• • •
6023	29.
6024	30. that is upon the [desert?....
6025	31. life
6026	32. his in them (?)
6027	33. •• they did .... ..
6028	34. [They entered the fourth hall .. •... Behold!
6029	Setme saw some men that were scattered and sepa-
6030	rated (?), being great at eating besides (?), there] being
6031	some others, their....
6032	II. I. There being some others, their provision, water,
6033	and bread, being hung over them, they running to take
6034	them down, some others digging pits at their feet to
6035	preventtheir reaching it.
6036	2. They entered the fifth hall and behold! Setme
6037	saw the noble spirits, standing at their places (?) of
6038	standing, (and ?) those who had complaints of violence,
6039	standing at the entrance praying, the bolt (?) of
6040	3. the door of the fifth hall being fixed in his right
6041	eye, of a man, he praying, he uttering great lamenta-
6042	tion. They went inside of the sixth hall, and behold!
6043	Setme saw the gods of the [council] of the inhabitants
6044	of Amenti
6045	4. standing in their order of standing, the attend-
6046	this is the only example in the papyrus. It seems somewhat like
6047	*єгяту потримє; STD., $ 142. But the occurrence of the
6048	possessive article with this pronoun is remarkable.
6049	yr-t; cf. Hess., Lond. Gnost., Gloss, p. 3; SpIEGELBErG, Rec. de
6050	Trav., xvii. 93.
6051	mn as in 'Mnl, mistakenly for wnm (l.14) orInaee.
6052	šm; the plural suffix omitted as often in Il Kh.
6053	n p iu n, so also in 1.4.
6054	• [gnbe] »rmb"Mnl; cf. l.5. or for rmb read no as in 1.%.
6055	I. 4. Šmše, Imšl?, a very doubuful word, perhaps fem., but more probably
6056	pl., with following e-w. The det. of air suggests cyeecyhoe 'whistling.'
6057	Can it be for šmse, 'servants"? сf. сумесує: суелес.
p. 170
6058	152 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT.II
6059	e-w ty in sm)y šm-w n p hn n t wskt mh VIl e-r
6060	Stme nw r p sšt n'S'r p ntr • e-f
6061	5. hms hr pe-f bht n nb nfr e-f kew? n p.'tf [e]'Np
6062	p ntr • n p-e-f yby? e p ntr ‹ Thwt n te-f wnm e n
6063	ntrw n t qnbe rmt 'Mnt shs r yby? wnm nom-f e t
6064	mtyt?
6065	6. s•mne n t mty•t e-r-hr-w e-w hy (n)n whyw wbe
6066	(n)n mnh•w e Thwt pntr s sh e 'Np ty mtt r p-e-f or
6067	e pat e-w r gmt-f e ne-f whyw es r ne-f mnh•w r
6068	......nM n nb 'mnt e-w htm?
6069	•7. pe-f by hr te-f b()et b r-s(t) ty r-f snsn r šw
6070	e pnt e-w r gmt-f e ne-f mnh•w eš r ne-f why•w e-w
6071	n•t-f hn n ntrw nt gnbe n nb 'Mnt e pe-f by šm r
6072	t pt ermen byw
6073	8. šps e p nt e-w r gm•t-f e ne-f mnh•w 'n-w wbe
6074	smy: cf. the form in 1.2, which easily leads to this.
6075	sšt '(sacred?) form'; cf. the clear spelling sšt n p' Re, Kufi, v. 27
6076	sst Kwfs, ibid. xii. 32; sš-l nry-t, ibid. xxi. 4. It occurs also below, v.1o.
6077	Apparently from Eg. sšt, 'mystery'
6078	1.5. bht, Eg. bhd; cf. Hess, Gnost., Gloss., s. v. brt (lege bht).
6079	lsw? does the sign of the plural indicate an old qual. *сунох
6080	from cy&s?
6081	'f. The ' is of peculiar form, resembling the group for ЄNE: &M,
6082	but doubtless corresponds to the form found not rarely elsewhere, e.g.
6083	in the name Hwre in I Kh.
6084	yoy? so Eg., but S. 2Borp, п; В. х&0н, хасує, Т. Hкss
6085	reads hmr (?), Lond. Gnost., Gloss.
6086	mly.1 (?), if this is the reading, should be corrected to mhy-t:
6087	Pamonth, i. 18, 34 меясує, т.
6088	1.6. птяент, in medio.
6089	hy...wbe...also in Hist. Rom., No. 225, of opposing armies.
6090	why.w...mnhw, apparently both are properly adjectives. The
6091	former in Eg. wh: cf. Coptic &WoT? BR., Wtb., Suppl. 324 quotes
6092	an Eg. text in which Set is called the wh, ' bane,' 'injurer" of his brother
6093	Osiris. Eg. wh also means 'escape' and so 'fail'? Is the adj. here
6094	'cruel'? why occurs also in Leyden Mor. xvi. 17.
6095	mnh or mnš: the apparent nš may be a contraction of ht, as BRUGSCH
6096	suggests, Thes. 857. The contracted and uncontracted forms are used
6097	simultaneously in Ptolemaic texts: e.g. in Canopus, ed. GROFF. The
6098	adj. mnh=cuepyérns and cuepyerâw: so here 'kindnesses,' 'good deeds,' as
6099	opposed to why-w, 'cruelties, ; "injuries,' or 'evil deeds."
p. 171
6100	CH. VI] I1 KH. II. 4-8 153
6101	ants (?) of Amenti standing, giving proclamation. They
6102	went inside the seventh hall, and behold! Setme saw
6103	the figure of Osiris the great god, he
6104	5. seated upon his throne of good gold, he crowned
6105	with the Atef, Anubis the great god being on his left.
6106	the great god Thoth being on his right, the gods of
6107	the council (of the?) inhabitants of Amenti standing to
6108	left and right of him, the balance being
6109	6. set in the midst before them, they weighing the
6110	evil deeds against the good deeds, Thoth the great
6111	god writing, Anubis giving word to his colleague. It
6112	being that he who shall be found that his evil deeds
6113	are more numerous than his good deeds shall be
6114	thrown (?) to Ama of the Lord of Amenti, they destroy
6115	7. his soul on his body, she does not allow him to
6116	breathe ever again. It being that he whom they shall
6117	find that his good deeds are more numerous than his
6118	evil deeds, they take him among the gods of the council
6119	of the Lord of Amenti, his soul going to heaven with
6120	the spirits
6121	8. noble. It being that he whom they shall find his
6122	The illegible group preceded by r and followed by n recurs similarly
6123	inl.11. I have thought of reading it r ly-fn, B. ETHIC M.
6124	em'; cf. me•l, Pamonth, i. 20. The det. here resembles the lizard
6125	es, and evidently represents the monster (as a crocodile?).
6126	The construction is difficult. It may be e pnd.... r ... 'he who
6127	shall be found .... shall be .given (?) Lo the Devourer" ; but the parallel
6128	sentences following are against this view.
6129	e-w him and other verbs apparenily not attributive but indicalive
6130	(2nd pres.); an uncommon use in demotic.
6131	hlm, Eg. Llm, seems almost certain, though the first sign closcly
6132	resembles s.
6133	1. 7. 'y-s(/) apparently refers to the "m'.
6134	snsn, lit. 'breathe.' B. CENCEN sonare is perhaps a foreign word,
6135	vid. TATTAM.
6136	1.8. '"-w; for 'w cf. I Kh. iii. a note. In Il Kh., besides the forms
6137	*ger and T28o, n-w occurs = пи8: мн08, її. 15; vі. н,
6138	28. It has been doubted whether MHT is really derived from "20
p. 172
6139	154 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
6140	ne-f why•w e-w 'nt-f hn n 'hyw kryw? nt šms n
6141	Skr 'S'r eor Stme nw r we rmt ‹ e-f tm n mnhyt n
6142	šs(š)-stn e-f hnt(e)
6143	9. r p m() nt e 'S'r nom-f e ne- p rt(t) nt e-f nim-f
6144	n pmšs 'r Stme myhe n pt n ny nw-f rr-w hn 'Mnt
6145	mš S-Sr r bl hr? het-f? zt-f n-f p-e yt(t) Stme bn(e)
6146	e r-k nw in
6147	I0. r Py rmt ‹ nt tm n mnhyt n šs(š)-stn e-f
6148	hnte rp m(s) nt e S'r no'm-f py rmt hm r nw-k r r-f
6149	e-w 'n n•m-f r bl hn Mn-nfr e mn rmt mše m-s-f e-f
6150	gl n we tmw py 'n-w se r t T-t hy-w
6151	11. ne-f why•w wbe ne-f mnh•w e•r-f hr pt gm-w
6152	ne-f why•w (szc) e-w iš r ne-f why•w e ly p-e-f chs n
6153	enh posh Thwt rr-fr......n-fry pe-f ewn yrt
6154	hr pt hn (sic) se (n)m-6h 'Sr
6155	12. r ty hwy-w t qset n py rmt ‹ r nw-k r•r-f e-w
6156	(Verbum, ii, § 69); but in Pap. Unuamon we find strong evidence for that
6157	derivation. Here two verbs of motion in the predicate of a sentence are
6158	preceded by n, viz. in ii.63 yre-w n yo, ETNH& 'they having come,
6159	and ii. 76 yre-st n-eqw ECN.... 'she having entered.' n-yw is
6160	practically the qualitative of yru, just as n-g is of "q. The n is no doubt
6161	the predicative st (STD., § 350, 4; Erm., Gr., § 307, 6), and yw, 'q are
6162	probably pseudo-participles *H7,... used by a stretch as nouns. Thus
6163	C-Mt-HT means 'he is as one-who-hath-come' In dem. n prefixed
6164	N-KOT, Dem. Chron. (Rev. Eg., I Pl. 2, 1. 6), Leyden Gnos. xx. 29,
6165	and the false "n- for really initial n in verbs, below iii. 7 note. A further
6166	instance of ft prefixed to the qual. of a verb of motion is 'n-sny, ' past,'
6167	Pap. Dodgson, 1. 18.
6168	I do not find *nHor orße in the sense of 'equal to, but the
6169	idiom is easily understood.
6170	ekry.w from Eg.ygr? or is it to be read Skry-w? It seems at any
6171	rate to denote a lower order than $ps.
6172	tm, Eg. db (?), 'wrapped' as a mummy, or 'clothed' db mul-t n
6173	šs sin, to " wrap linen of byssus' on a statue, &c., is a regular expression:
6174	BR., Wtb. 663, 1626; Suppl. 610.
6175	hni DWNT, Eg. hnti: cf. note on hn, I Kh.ili. 28.
6176	1. 9. PHTE, N modus: cf. note to I Kh. v. 33.
6177	hr hº.l-f (?) looks like mi-f, 'he spake?'
6178	bne e'r-k: a formidable way of spelling MT.
p. 173
6179	CH. VI] 11 КН. I1. 8-12 155
6180	good deeds. being equal to his evil deeds, they carry
6181	him amongst the excellent (?) spirits that serve Sokari-
6182	Osiris. And behold Setme saw a great man clothed
6183	in raiment of byssus, he being near
6184	9. to the place in which Osiris was, the position (?)
6185	in which he was being great exceedingly. Setme made
6186	wonder of the world at those things that he saw in
6187	Amenti. Si-Osiri walked out in front of (?) him, said
6188	he to him, 'My father Setme, dost thou not see
6189	1o. this great man, who is clothed in garment of
6190	byssus, he being near to the place in which is Osiris?
6191	That poor man whom thou sawest he being carried
6192	out from Memphis, there not being a man walking
6193	after him, he being wrapped in a mat, (is) he. They
6194	brought him to the Tê, they weighed
6195	11. his evil deeds against his good deeds that he
6196	did upon earth: they found his evil deeds (sic) being
6197	more numerous than his evil deeds, according to the
6198	measure (?) of his term of life that Thoth wrote for him
6199	to be given (?) to him, according to the measure of his
6200	greatness of eye (sic) upon earth. It was commanded
6201	before Osiris
6202	12. to cause to be thrown the burial outfit of that
6203	1. 1o. Imw; better tm as in i. 18.
6204	I-l. In O. C. Par. (Hess, p. 82) TH (Fg. d'.l, also spelt THI,
6205	vid. Lond. Gnost., Gloss., p. 16) corresponds to 1 1.%. Is the article false?
6206	I. 11. ey. Two puzzling groups in this line are evidently intended for
6207	the word y which SpIEGELBErg has just deciphered and explained (vid.
6208	note to l Kh.v.36). In the first case it seems to have been assimilated
6209	by the scribe to the negalive bp (so also perhaps 1 Kh. iii.33). In the
6210	second the usual vertical line has been omitted. These may be genuine
6211	spellings, but they look like mistakes. ey, r y must mean 'according
6212	to the measure of.'
6213	w nyrl. Leyden Mor. xviii. 21; xx.19; cf. Am yrol, ibid. xix. 19.
6214	and cf. 'width of view'; 'magnanimity' (P) Ur does it mean 'respeci,"
6215	"glory, and does p'e-f refer to the rich man ?
6216	1. 12. K&Ics, like grsf, "funerary outfi,' is used of 'scpulchral
6217	wrappings?
p. 174
6218	156 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
6219	n....? nom-f r bl hn Ma-nfr e ne-š p šse nt hpr
6220	n-'m-f r py rmt hm n rn-f mt-w 'n•t-f hn (n)n 'by•w šps
6221	n rmé p? ntr nt šms Skr-S'r e-f hnte
6222	13.r p m(c) nt e 'S'r 'm-f py rmt & rnw-k r r-f 'n-w
6223	se r t T•t hy-w [ne-f] wyh•w wbe ne-f mnh•w gm-w se
6224	e ne-š ne-f why•w [r n]e-f mnh ror-f hr pt hn (sic)
6225	se r tb-f hn 'Mnt mt-f
6226	14. py rmt py? e -k n]w rr-f e p gwre n p sbc)e
6227	n 'Mnt s'mne hr te-f yrt [n?] wnm e-w htme wn(e) r
6228	bl hr yrt-f e r-f wny? nsgp snh'S'r pntrnb 'Mnt
6229	e-r-y zt n-k hr pt
6230	15. Le-w ror?]nkrhpat e-w o-fn py rmt hm
6231	nne e-wr n-kr h p at e-w r-f [n] py rmt • e-y (r)rh
6232	(n)n ()n-w r hpr m-f zt Stme pe (ytt) šre S-'S'r ne-cs
6233	n myhe•t r•nw-y rr-w hn 'Mnt m-s hpr my gm-y
6234	16. t? e•r bpr?] hr? ny rmt nt šš nwh? e ne-fy-w
6235	[wm] m s-w? e hyn•w kyw nt e te-w? hr()t mw t
6236	"hye(t) n te-w ryt hryt e-w pte r 'nt-w? r hry e
6237	hyn•w ky•wšty
6238	17. hytw hr rt(t)w r tm ty šm-w yr-w zt S-'S'r mtt
6239	mrt ty pe yt(t) Stme ny rmtw nt eor-k nwe yr-w nt
6240	rmtpntr; cf. peernorTe: one may read rmi hr ntr, also in
6241	1,25. n='as'?
6242	1. 13. tb also in vi. 12; cf. the spelling of tb ETBE, v. 17.
6243	TWwßE: TWB retribuere. Cf. Kufi, xv. 2; Leyden Mor.x I7.
6244	1.15. (n)n 'n-. I do not know how to analyze this expression, but it
6245	would seem to be for METNHOT, and with rhpr scarcely more than
6246	петпясушле. Probably the relative nt has dropped out.
6247	m-s hpr, 'after happening,' followed by optative or imperative seems
6248	to mark a polite request: 'after the happening of events, 'at your con-
6249	venience, cf. ili. 4; Dem. Chron. (Rev. Eg. i, Pl. 2, l. I1). It might
6250	perhaps mean 'after what has happened.'
6251	1. 16. r? eir hpr. In ll. 19, 21 we have the masculine used as neuter
6252	with hpr: perhaps it should be so here; cf. I Kh. v.I.
6253	rmi should be plural, see the next line.
6254	ss cywcy 'scalter'; cf. Poème Sat. ii. 13. One might expect here
6255	cuy: cwcy ' despise."
6256	nwh; cf. MOXZE 'thrust out,' 'separate'
p. 175
6257	CH. VI] 11 KH. I1. 12-17 157
6258	rich man whom thou sawest, he being carried out
6259	from Memphis, the praise that was made of him being
6260	great, unto this poor man named, and that they should
6261	take him amongst the noble spirits as a man of God
6262	that follows Sokaris Osiris, he being near
6263	13. to the place in which is Osiris. That great man
6264	whom thou didst see, they took him to the Tê, they
6265	weighed his evil deeds against his good deeds, they
6266	found him his evil deeds being more numerous than
6267	his good deeds that he did upon earth. It was com-
6268	manded to imprison (?) him in Amenti. - He
6269	14. is that man] thạt [behold! thou didst see], the
6270	bolt (?) of the gate of Amenti being fixed on his right eye,
6271	they shutting and opening out on his eye, his mouth
6272	being opened in great lamentation. By Osiris the great
6273	god Lord of Amenti, behold I said to thee upon earth
6274	15. "there shall be done] to thee even as that which
6275	is being done to this poor man, there shall not be
6276	done to thee according to that which is being done
6277	to that great man," I knowing the things that will
6278	become of him? Said Setme, 'My (father) son Si-Osiri,
6279	many are the marvels that I have seen in Amenti.
6280	After a time let me learn
6281	16. what hath happened] with these men which are
6282	scattered (?) apart (?), it being that they are great at
6283	eating in addition, it being that some others, whose
6284	provision, water, and bread is hung above them, were
6285	running to bring them down, some others digging
6286	17. pits at their feet to prevent them reaching them."
6287	Said Si-Osiri, 'It is a just word, my father Setme; these
6288	m s'-w; cf. 1. 18. Can this be adverbial like eeentencwc 'after
6289	that,' or "in addition to that"? Or is the word to be read differently, e. g-
6290	NK& 'possessions, "food'? The subject of *en&&r may of course
6291	be impersonal.
6292	1.17. mt-t mel ly. So also before an explanation in reply to a guestion,
6293	Kufi, siv. I.
p. 176
6294	158 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
6295	šš nwh? e ne-y-w wm m s-w? p smt n n rm/-w nt
6296	hr pt
6297	18. ne nt e-w hr shwe n pntr e-wrypn grh(f)
6298	mre hr p gíly n nh e ne-w hmwt hi n'm-w m s-w?
6299	e b 'r-w gi tw r wm st 'w r 'Mnt in gm-w ne-w
6300	wyh.w e-w š r ne-w mnhzu
6301	19. gm-w [py] wn-ne hpr m-w hr p t e-f hpr 2m-w
6302	hn 'Mnt no'm-w erme ny ky•w rmtw nt e-r-k nwe
6303	g.r-w nt e te-w hret mw t hye n te-w ryt hryt e-w
6304	pte r'nt-w r hry e hynze
6305	20. ky•w šty hyt hr rt(t)-w r tm ty šm-w rr-w p
6306	smt n n rmtw at hr ptnt e pe-w inh eor-hr-w e p
6307	ntr šty hyt hr rt(t)-w r tm ty gm-w se st 'w
6308	21. r 'M[nt 5n ?] bs-w (sic) py wn-ne hpr m-w hr p
6309	t e-f hpr n-m-w [on 'Mnt] 'n? rPrw? šp? pe-w by
6310	r t I•t gm st? r ht(t)-k pe yt(t) Stme zt p nt mnš hr
6311	p t e-w mnš n-f hn
6312	22. ']Mn[t e] p nt wyhe e-w whye n-f ny si s'mn[e?
6313	...... r šw (n)n mt-wt ut e-r-k nwe rr-w hn t
6314	Tt n Mn-zfr st hpr hn ty XLII n spy
6315	23.nt ej.. •..n?Srpntr hn-w šsmy?
6316	1.18.shee C&2OT:C&8071
6317	пхwр& лeле лeєрs, cf.I Kh. ili. 30.
6318	hr pgy usually has the meaning of B. ENXIN- 'with the intention
6319	of': ST., § 470; see also vi. 2ı; vii. 3; so here ' for the sake of' a•
6320	livelihood.
6321	Or 'their women also being robbed from them?
6322	en2. A vague use of this word, as often in dem.
6323	1. Ig. nºm-w repeated in order to join with the next group
6324	(erme, &c.).
6325	I. 21. he-w is unintelligible: gm-w must be intended.
6326	r.[r-w sp. This reading seems almost unavoidable, though e,
6327	not r, is usual with sr in II Kh.
6328	gm sir h't-k. I do not know any parallel to this. gm-y ht-k, Pap.
6329	Dodgson I. 8, verso 1. 4, is probably different.
6330	1.22. r šw; probably following a negative as usual.
6331	sps, Eg. sp'-k, 'nome"
p. 177
6332	CH. VI.] 11 КН. II. x7-23 159
6333	men that thou sawest, who are scattered (?) and apart (?),
6334	it being that they are great at eating in addition (?),
6335	the likeness of the men that are on earth
6336	18. are they who are under the curse of the god,
6337	they doingwork in night and day for their livelihood,
6338	their women robbing (?) them in addition (?), they find
6339	not bread to eat. They came to Amenti again, they
6340	found their evil deeds more numerous than their good
6341	deeds,
6342	19. they found that [that thing that] became of them
6343	on the earth, became of them in Amenti, of them, with
6344	those other men whom behold! thou sawest, whose
6345	food water and bread is hung over them, they running
6346	to bring them down, some
6347	20. others digging a pit at their feet to prevent
6348	their reaching them: the kind of the men that are on
6349	the earth, whose life is before them, the god digging
6350	a pit at their feet to prevent them finding it. They
6351	came
6352	21. to Amenti. They allowed (sic) that which was
6353	becoming of them on the earth, it becometh of them
6354	[in Amenti] again (?); behold! they received their
6355	soul to the Tê. Find it at thy heart, my father Setme,
6356	namely, that he who is good upon the earth, they are
6357	good to him in
6358	22. Amenti, [while] he that is evil, they are evil to
6359	him. These things, they are established (?) [they shall
6360	not be changed] for ever. The things that thou seest
6361	in the Tê in Memphis, they happen in those XLII
6362	nomes
6363	23. [which the assessors?] of Osiris the great god
6364	are in them.. •. Abydos, the place of oracle (?)
6365	1.23.[le1gnb]nSp...hn-2u?
6366	šsmy', esmy ? recurs Poème Sal. ini. 1.
p. 178
6367	тбо TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
6368	[]Bt t'st n sntr(t)? n cy•w n rpcy [Y-I]k? e-r 'Sr (sic)
6369	mng ny mtt zt e-r-hr Stme
6370	24. pe-f yt(t)] wt? -{ r hry hr thset n MnL-nfr...
6371	•.. h]pt? n•'m-f e tt-f hn t•t-f šn Stme n[m-f zt? ple
6372	šre S-Sr wt p m()n šm r bry n•m-ff
6373	25. Wt p] m() r•w-n r hry nom-f (n)op S-pSr wjsb
6374	n Stme n mtt n p t "r Stme p trye [n n] mt-t
6375	nt e-f hn-w e-f zt e-f r rh ....n hy šps n rmt
6376	p? ntr
6377	26. e-y m]še erme-f e-y zt pe šre py eš Stme [sh n
6378	.....]mzy n s•hr by e-fn myh n ptn [ny?]
6379	nwe-f rr-w hn 'Mnt e n mtwt n rn-w tp n
6380	27. Pm?}fn pmšs e bp-frh wne r rmt nbnpt
6381	e-r p h]m-hl S-S'r mnpt XII hpr-f e mn [sh nb]....
6382	n-f rr-f hn Mn-nfr n š sh m 0 'we
6383	28. m-s ny] hpr wo hrw e Pr-e Wsy-e-M t-Rs? šm
6384	s-ntr; very doubtful; swl? swht? in Hess, Gnost. Gloss., p. 12, has
6385	a curious resemblance to this.
6386	For the name of Philae in dem. see Br., Dict. Géog. 465, and for
6387	that of Abydos, ibid. I6.
6388	zt, hardly X€; rather perfect passive participle, Verbum, ii. S$ 903,
6389	927, 4; cf. s•sy, iii. 31, and I Kh. vi. 20.
6390	1. 24. WI-f seems the most probable restoration, hardly st-f, or rl-f, 'his
6391	feet'
6392	hpt is found in Eg. for 'embrace.'
6393	n.'m-f after śn, if correct, must be the thing asked about, not the
6394	person questioned: cf. šn-f s st, Kufi, xvii. 25.
6395	wt must be OTET- followed by a second OTET at the beginning
6396	of the next line; cf. St., § 309, where it is said to be a nominal verb.
6397	OYET- would appear however to be literally the inf. of orwt
6398	' separate, used as the imperative, cf. ST., § 359, p. 186. wt... w0t
6399	in Leyden Mor. xx. 14.
6400	1. 25. lry. Is this from Eg.tr, 'supplicate'? But from the context the
6401	meaning seems rather ' was amazed,' or 'was proud"'
6402	e-frrh hpr?hr?n 'hy, 'he will be able to become amongst the
6403	noble spirits, or perhaps hpr e n 'hy 'become as (cyСПЄ I) a spirit."
6404	1. 26. mzy: cf. P. S. B. A., 1899, 26g. It occurs also below, v. 11-13.
6405	s.hr, Eg. s.hr, 'overthrow'; cf. perhaps cy&pe: cy&ps.
6406	hy; a good instance of ID ' demon!
p. 179
6407	CH. VI] 11 КН. II. 23-28 ІбІ
6408	the dwellings of Princes ...... and in PhilJae (?)'
6409	Behold! (Si-)Osiri ended these words spoken before
6410	Setme
6411	24. his father] he went up upon the desert of
6412	Mem[phis, his father Setme em]bracing him, his hand
6413	being in his hand. Setme asked [it saying, 'My] son
6414	Si-Osiri, separate is the place of going down there,
6415	25. separate is the place from which we have come
6416	up?' Not did Si-[Osiri make] answer to Setme by
6417	a word on earth. Setme made the marvel (?) [at the]
6418	words that he was in, saying, 'He will (?) be able to
6419	become (?) even as (?) the noble spirits as a man of
6420	God'
6421	26. [L walking] with him, I saying 'This is my son.'
6422	Setme pronounced [writing of.... from the] book of
6423	exorcising demons, he being in wonder of the world
6424	at [those things that] he had seen in Amenti, the things
6425	named weighing
6426	27. [upon] him exceedingly, since he was not able
6427	to reveal to [any man on earth. Behold! the bjoy
6428	Si-Osiri passed twelve years and it came to pass that
6429	there was no [good scribe or learned man (?)] that
6430	rivalled (?) him in Memphis in reading, writing of taking
6431	pledge.
6432	28. After these things], a day came Pharaoh Osir[mare
6433	"p WTI' carry,' also means 'shut up," pudakițew; or is it 'loaded'?
6434	Eg. "Ip, 'load'; cf. Leyden Mor. xxx. 22.
6435	1. 27. ren, 'reveal,' cf.'iii. 1o.
6436	XII. For the form of X cf. ili. 4. It occurs regularly in Leyden
6437	Mor., and in a papyrus of the first century a.D. of the Crawford collection.
6438	•..»-fr; cf.i. 1a, possibly [h)n should be restored, &ws ' come
6439	near,' so to 'rival.'
6440	m o 'ue for n 0 "we, as in I Kh. iv. 32, written as m 0 in vi. 6. Ie
6441	is not likely lo be nt o, "that takes.
6442	1. 28. For the restoration cf. I Kh. iv. 38.
6443	GRIFFITH. M
p. 180
6444	162 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
6445	r p wrh n pr? Pr-s n Mn-(n)nfr et gnbej n n het•w
6446	n n mr-mšw nn rmtau-syz n Kmy [hg
6447	29. [r pe-w] rt n? che n p wih 'y?... •. zt en?
6448	s•]my py eor weste n 'Gš [e-f? tbe?]r bget-f n we whe
6449	r-w pe-f en smy (n)
6450	30. m bh] Pr-r on-w s r p wrh r-f šil? ztn wn p
6451	nt e-]f eš py whe r... -y r Km[y] (n)moh Pr-e n
6452	wš hl te-f hte nte š n n shw nt hr
6453	31. []4(t)-f n wš wn(e) rr-fe-f hpr e [mn sh nfr rmt
6454	r/y hn] Kmy e-f rh (š-f n wš wn(e) rr-f e-y e p zlh n
6455	Kmy r p t (N)Nhs pe tš
6456	32. t wne•]é n stm (n)n mt-wt e-r Pr-e erme ne-f
6457	hetw bp-w gm m) np t) e-w nom-f e-w zt nh Pth
6458	['n? e]s? nht tt p sh nfr rmt rh r s shw nt e-f
6459	rnw(e)
6460	wrl in Hist. Rom., No. 72, wlh (text, p. 28). The f-like sign in
6461	II Kh. must be det. Eg. wrh, a place of meeting in the king's presence,
6462	earlier, why (Westcar and Sanehat, 25ł).
6463	pr Pr-t, cf. I Kh. ili. 6; the first group, closely resembling h° (l. 5,
6464	ill. 25), recurs iv. 25 and v. II, leaving little doubt as to its meaning.
6465	n n is perhaps only the plural art. (n2)n.
6466	1.29. 'y, if the correct reading, is probably the old form of recording
6467	arrivals (lapyrus de Bulaq, No. xvili passim; fap. An. ill. 6, verso I).
6468	"te, from the det. may mean 'foreigner" or 'negro, unless it be an
6469	expression for sorcerer or an abusive term : cf. Eg. 'd, 'greedy'; "te,
6470	Kufi, x. 29.
6471	[e-f? 160?] r Bge.t-f; cf. ili. I4, e-f? tbe; 25,e l? ibe. The f is
6472	doubtful. ibe is fairly certain (cf. v. 12), TWWßE signare. Can it
6473	mean 'who was wrapped up,' or can het be here in the sense 'copy'
6474	(v. 13), and the f be anticipatory-' being sealed (?) with (?) the copy of
6475	a letter'?
6476	whe; cf. I Kh. ili. 1z. Late Eg.wh, 'letter.' Note esp. Hist. Rom.,
6477	No. 366 ; the title by ..., which KraLL rightly interprets as 'despatch-
6478	carrier, comparing Basyine, is really by-rerhe= Late Eg. fiy-wh'y,
6479	Pap. An. v., xii. 7.
6480	1.30. 34l. One would expect šIf, 'a shameful act,' but the remains
6481	rather indicate śll. For the following restorations cf. ili. 2-3. Perhaps
6482	one may correct to e-f (r r) eX.
6483	Read r.['n]-y?
6484	hie. Apparently this is the reading, not htm, cywtele, which is
6485	the verb 'close, ii. 14 ; v. 11. Does it mean 'seal,' or 'fastening'?
p. 181
6486	CH. VI] 11 KH. II. 28-32 163
6487	going] to the court (?) of Pharaoh's house in Memphis,
6488	[the council], the princes, the generals, the great men
6489	of Egypt [standing]
6490	29. according to their] style (?) of standing in the
6491	court. Came (?) ...... [saying (?)] 'This is a com-
6492	munication that an ate of Ethiopia maketh, [who is
6493	sealed ?] on his body with a letter. The announce-
6494	ment of it was made
6495	30. before Pharaoh, he was brought to the court, he
6496	made prayer (?) [saying, "Is there he who] readeth this
6497	letter that I have brought (?) to Egypt before Pharaoh
6498	without spoiling its seal (?), that will read in the writings
6499	that are on
6500	31. it without opening it. If it be that there [be
6501	no good scribe and learned man in] Egypt who is able
6502	to read it without opening it, I will take the humilia-
6503	tion of Egypt to the land of Nehes, my country.'
6504	32. The time of hearing the words that Pharaoh
6505	did [with his princes they knew not place of the] earth
6506	in which they were, saying, 'By Ptah [the great god (?)
6507	is there (?)] strength in the hand of the good scribe
6508	and learned man to read writings of which he shall see
6509	nt e for nl r, fut. ETNd-.
6510	e5 n n, not (x)n; cf. I Kh. ili. 12, note.
6511	1. 31. zlh; cf. S. XW)2 ampulare, XO)2 minimus esse, also Hist.
6512	Rom., No. 358, and references there; but none quite illustrates this
6513	instance. The general meaning of the passage from the context clearly
6514	is 'humiliate Egypt before Ethiopia."
6515	1 Nhs, 'Ethiopia'; so also Br., Thes. 1024; Pamonth, ii. 18
6516	(translating Wdn-f).
6517	1.32. simrn. N.B.—direct government; cf.1 Kh. ili. 2a, note.
6518	bp-w gm restored as in ili. 3.
6519	In the gap before nhi (7) one suspects a question, followed by ho
6520	СуД.П in the next line, but one would also expect p nfr e to follow the
6521	name of Plah. The restoration suggested may prove grammalically
6522	impossible. For the form of e-s cf. iii.8.s seems to be anticipalory of
6523	8.1 and nhi apparently means suffciens.
6524	M 2
p. 182
6525	164 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT: 11
6526	33. r pe-w] tš lın rm r eš whe [n wš wn(e) r•r-f zt]
6527	Pr-s my sš-w ny r Stm(e [H‹-n]-Wsy pe šre "r-w zze
6528	'n-w se n ty htyt hb-f se
6529	(page III)
6530	1. on-w se n ty htyt hb-f se r ptne wšt-f [Pr-s
6531	twn]f se che-f y (t sic) rt(t)-f e-f or (n)n sm()z n t wšt
6532	n Pr-r zt n-f Pr-s
6533	2. P-{e šre] Stme 'n stm-k (n)n mtwt rzt py te [n
6534	›Gš e-r]-hr-y zt n wn sh nfr rmt rh hn Kmy e-f r
6535	rh is py whe
6536	3. nt [t]t? n wš hl te-f htet? mt-f gm n nt sh hr
6537	[tlt)-f n wš wne pr-f t wnet n stm (n)n mtwt eor
6538	Stme (n)op-f gm
6539	4. m() [n p t] e-f n•m-f e-f zt pe nb ‹ nm p ut e-f
6540	rrhešshn wš wne gr-fms hpr my t-w n-y hrw
6541	Xnhry? nwey rpnt ey.. rh
6542	5. r-fr tm ty 0-w pzlh n Kmyr pt Nhs p tš n
6543	wm•w qmy zt Pr-s st r pe šre Stme t-w yw]n.
6544	6. st? hrn p'Gš or-w nfnb()y rh 'Gš twne se Pr-c
6545	hr p wrh e ht-f thr n p m šs qt-f n-f e-f wš n sær
6546	1. 33- hn, I Kh. iv. 27, or perhaps hr, i. Io.
6547	rm, possibly for nm, nire (iii. 4); or cf. B. pele sublimis esse,
6548	paees sublimitas; cf. Kufi, xi. 3I, for the same? word.
6549	1. I. smze, c2l0x (?), as in I Kh. vi. 2.
6550	wšt, Or&CyT(T) adoratio.
6551	1. 3. Lt, i. e. Ist sing. NTOOT?
6552	gm, this verb seems to supply the future to rh, ' know,' 'ascertain,'
6553	see note to l. 7.
6554	1. 4. hry (?); cf. B. ¿epı 'rest' The group somewhat resembles the
6555	common sign for hry with perhaps the determinative of time beneath.
6556	nwe-y. Apparently an instance of the final sim-f, perhaps always
6557	in the first person, and commonest with the verb te, 'cause'; e.g.l.12.
6558	e-y..rh. The space appears to be blank in the original.
6559	1. 6. st?-hr can hardly be the Eg. s.%t hr, 'entertainment?' Is it
6560	' retirement,' lit. 'returning of face'?
p. 183
6561	CH. VI] 11 КН. II. 33—1. 6 165
6562	33. their] country, or is it possible (?) to read a letter
6563	[without opening it?' said] Pharaoh, 'Let there be
6564	summoned to me Setme [Kham]wesy my son.' They
6565	ran, they brought him at that instant. He bowed
6566	himself
6567	III. I. They brought him at that instant. He bowed
6568	himself to the ground, he saluted [Pharaoh]. he [raised]
6569	himself, he stood on his feet, making the blessings of
6570	the salutations of Pharaoh. Said to him Pharaoh
6571	2. 'My [son] Setme, hast thou heard the words that
6572	this ate [of Ethiopia] hath said before me saying, "Is
6573	there a good scribe and learned man in Egypt who shall
6574	be able to read this letter
6575	3. that is in my hand without breaking its seal, and
6576	shall know what is written upon it without opening it?''
6577	The time of hearing these words that Setme did, he
6578	found not
6579	4. place [of the earth] in which he was, he saying,
6580	•My great lord, who is he that shall be able to read
6581	writing without opening it? After happening, let there
6582	be given to me ten days of delay (?), that I may see
6583	what I shall be able
6584	5. to do, to prevent the humiliation of Egypt being
6585	taken to the land of Nehes, the country of eaters of
6586	gum.' Said Pharaoh, 'They are for my son Setme.'
6587	Apartments were given of
6588	6. turning (?) the face to the Ethiopian, there was
6589	made for him wickedness (?) like an Ethiopian. Pharaoh
6590	arose from the court, his heart being grieved exceed-
6591	ingly. He lay down without drinking
6592	mby may be Moßs: noße 'sin,' 'error,' nhy in Podme Sai.
6593	ji. 17; iv. 7. Or is it to be connected with e-f "r nbre nd oporrifon,
6594	Ros., 1.11?
p. 184
6595	166 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
6596	7. wm šm-f (sic) n-f Stme v ne-f y•w e b (r)rh-f m()
6597	n pt e-f ('n)nfy r r-f swh-f se n ne-f hbsw n zz-f r
6598	rt-f qt-f n-f e 6 (r)rh-f
6599	8. m()np t e-f n-m-f t-w (r)rh st Mh-wsh't te-f hm-t
6600	e-s 'w r p m() nt e Stme n•'m-f t-s(t) šm tt-s n p hn
6601	nne-f hbsw (n)op-s
6602	9. gm hmm srf-f? hn ne-f hbsw zte-s (sic) n-f pe sn
6603	Stme mn hmm hn p qne šbsy? hn ne-f efw y(9b th
6604	n ht
6605	10. zl-f n-s(st) qne r•hr-y te snt Mh-wshit t mtt ut
6606	e hst-y thre tb•t-s bn(e) (n)mtt e šw wn(e)-s(t) r s-hmt
6607	n ty p hm-hl S-Sr
6608	I1. w r hn chefn tryt hryt n Stme pe-f yt zl-f
6609	n-f pe yt Stme eor-k qt e hst-k thr tb h n mtwt
6610	nt qny?
6611	12. hn hst-k r0y-s (sic) e-[rhr-y te-y Ik-w se zt-f
6612	1.%. Sm-f n-f Stme; cf. i. 6. Šm-f n-f generally means 'went away,' e.g.
6613	Poème Sat. iv. 15 ; but not in v. y below.
6614	e b'rrh-fi rh, 'know,' 'ascertain, is used in the imperative, the form
6615	sdm-f, and the qualitative, but not in the infinitive (see note to I Kh. iv. 4).
6616	The missing infinitive is supplied by the group which spells gm, ' find.'
6617	This group in the inf. often represents gm, Xseel in the ordinary sense
6618	of 'find,' e.g. in II Kh. vii. 2, but 'learn' or "know' is the most
6619	appropriate meaning in other cases, especially in the common phrase
6620	bp-f gm which is parallel to this e b r-rh-f in iii. 3, &c. May not the
6621	group gm also represent the inf. ELLeE: Eelr in these cases? Though
6622	EllI is perhaps from Eg. em, 'perceive, the Egyptians may even have
6623	considered it a shortened form of xseer.
6624	('n)ny, sa, cf. I Kh. iii. 12, seems to be on the false analogy of
6625	'n'w, r-H0x (see note to ii. 8): cf. ('n)mt perhaps for mt, eeor,
6626	v. 36, and in Kufi, 'nnw for Mt&r. in is never added in the causative
6627	(ТППО» іn тПл00x?) i. 3, and Gnost. (HEss, Setne, p. 36).
6628	1.9. Deeoee 'heat'
6629	srf-f. The det. seems falsely repeated after the suffix. S. CpgE
6630	racare; or grf-f, B. KWPC aboleri, olium, &c., or better a confused
6631	writing for S. Cpogpeg 'fall down,' of leaves, so perhaps 'shrink,'
6632	'wither'
6633	Zle-s. This spelling might indicate a pronunciation *XЄC rather
6634	than *хос.
p. 185
6635	CH. VI] 11 КН. III. y-12 167
6636	7. eating. Setme went to his apartments, not know-
6637	ing place of the world to which he was going. He
6638	gathered himself in his clothes from his head to his feet,
6639	he lay down, he not knowing
6640	8. place of the earth in which he was. They caused
6641	Meh-wesekht his wife to know it. She came to the place
6642	in which Setme was. She caused her hand to go in the
6643	inside of his clothes, she did not
6644	9. find warmth, he lay quiet (?) in his clothes.
6645	She said to him, 'My brother Setme, there is not
6646	warmth in the lap, sheby? in its flesh; illness, sadness
6647	of heart.
6648	1o. Said he to her, 'Cease from me, my sister
6649	Meh-wesekht, the matter on account of which my heart
6650	is grieved is not a thing that it is right to reveal to
6651	a woman. The child Si-Osiri
6652	11. came in, he stood over Setme his father; he said
6653	to him, 'My father Setme, thou liest thy heart grieved
6654	for what? the things that are embosomed (?)
6655	12. in thy heart tell them to me, that I may cause
6656	them to cease.' Said he, 'Cease from me my son
6657	p qne KOXI-: KEM- is fem. acc. to PeyroN, but masc. in
6658	TATтAм, p. 164. In Eg. guy is masc.
6659	Sbey? or sly, with det. of serpent, 'demon' or 'magic': Cf. CIT
6660	basiliscus.
6661	jeb: cf. geb, fem., Chronique dém. (Rev. Eg. i. Pl. 2, l.18); Jỏ,
6662	Kufi, xii. 30: S. EI&&RE, T, TATTAM, p. 826, ixáp, sanies (Job ii. 8;
6663	vii. 5); B. 1&.BI, T 'disease, vóoos, do bévera. This is a mere enume-
6664	ration of symptoms or diagnosis, without construction.
6665	1. 1o. qne; cf. B. KHI cessare, salis, properly imperative ' cease!" with
6666	sense of 'it is enough,' and constructed with €. ...€...•of person
6667	and thing, St.,§ 48%. It occurs again, l.12, and Kufi, xix. 3t.
6668	е бг ЄТЕЖє: ЄТЄСщЄ, Sт., § 409.
6669	1. 11. gny, Eg.qny, 'embrace," "hold"?
6670	1.12. r.0y-s=&2IC =r.2ly-s in the next line: cf. v.15 r.0-z for r.8l-ro.
6671	'which they said."
6672	TAT&lOWOT.
p. 186
6673	168 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
6674	que rhr-y pe šre S-S'r n mtwt nt hn•w (sic) het-y
6675	e-r-k sbq n ms e b ne-c-k
6676	13. ...... rhr-k zt S-'Sr rzly-se e-r-hr-y te-y
6677	søpre ht-k no'm-w zt Stme pe šre S-'Sr we te n 'Gs
6678	per ph? r hry
6679	14. r Kmy e-f? tbse r b()et-f n we whe zt 'n wn
6680	pat e-f [r?]s-fn wš wne rr-f e-f hpre mn shnfr rmt
6681	rh hn Kmy
6682	15. efrrhsfe-y opzlhn Kmy r pt Nhs
6683	pe ts er-y qt e hst-y thr tb•t-s(t) pe šre S-Sr t
6684	wnet
6685	16. n stm ny mtwt eor S-S'r sby-f š* wnet šy zt
6686	n-f Stme eor-k sby tb h zt-f e-y sby zt er-k qt
6687	17. e hst-k thr tb p smt n ty mtt hmt twne t-k pe
6688	yt Stme e-y rh š p whe ron-w r Kmy n wš wne
6689	18. r]r-f nte-y (sic) gm n nt sh hr 't(t)-f n wš n hì
6690	te-f htet? t wne•t n stm ny mtt e•r Stme twn-f se
6691	n bp ef zt h p nh(r)t
6692	19. n [n] mtwt nt e•r-k zt n•'m-w pe šre S-S'r zt-f
6693	n-f pe yt Stme m'šm r n ly (szc) n p 'tne n ne-k lyw
6694	2°m nb nt-e e-r-k fy•t-f
6695	e br ne-s-k. The neg. of this nominal verb, which according to the
6696	Coptic should be It....&I, ispossibly affected by the similarity of
6697	eren&ı (e br ney) in the writing. b is not used with wn in late Eg.,
6698	Verbum, ii. §989, yet the nominal verbs are supposed to be compounded
6699	with wn, STD., §248 Anm.
6700	1. 13. The first word is very doubtful (n)mh (?).
6701	s•hpr h%, 'comfort the heart, cf. vii. 9. In Kufi, xi. 26, s•hpr
6702	without h means 'comfort." s•hpr is here infinitive, cf. I Kh. iii. 6.
6703	ph? this seems the likely reading from the form and the absence
6704	of det.
6705	1.15. eor-y gl; this is the lively or emphatic form.
6706	1.17. ml-t hm-t, cf. I Kh. v.g for the reading. In Late Eg. we have md.t
6707	šryw= *леєт-сутрі; сf. St., § 194.
6708	tene l-k; cf. note to I Kh. iii. 2 0-z0 l-y.
6709	e-y rh future, cf. I Kh. iv. 4 note. In Copt. Tracy-, St.,§145.
6710	1.18. nie-y, observe the unetymological spelling.
p. 187
6711	CH. VI] I1 KH. III. 12-19 16g
6712	Si-Osiri, the things that are in my heart; thou art little
6713	of age, thou art not great (?),
6714	13. take heed (?) to thyself.' Said Si-Osiri, • Tell it unto
6715	me that I may cause thy heart to be refreshed in them."
6716	Said Setme, ' My son Si-Osiri, an ate of Ethiopia is he
6717	who hath come up
6718	14. to Egypt, being (?) sealed (?) upon his body with
6719	a letter, saying, 'Is there he that will (?) read it without
6720	opening it? If it be that there be no good scribe and
6721	learned man in Egypt
6722	15. who shall be able to read it, I will take the
6723	humiliation of Egypt to the land of Nehes my country.
6724	Behold! I lay down, my heart grieved on its account,
6725	my son Si-Osiri. The time
6726	16. of hearing these words that Si-Osiri did, he
6727	laughed for much time. Said to him Setme, 'Thou
6728	laughest for what?' Said he, 'I laugh because thou
6729	art lying,
6730	17. thy heart being grieved because of the likeness
6731	of this small matter. Raise thyself, my father Setme,
6732	I shall be able to read the letter that was brought to
6733	Egypt without opening
6734	18. it and to know what is written upon it without
6735	breaking its seal.' The time of hearing these words
6736	that Setme did, he arose suddenly, saying, ' What is the
6737	pledge
6738	19. of [the] things that thou sayest, my son Si-Osiri?'
6739	Said he to him, 'My father Setme, go to the apartments
6740	of the ground of thy apartments. Every book that thou
6741	bringest
6742	"2 hр.
6743	'suddenly"
6744	1.19. npome. CRUM (P.S.B. A. xxi. 350) shows that in Coplic
6745	deeds of Djême land or houses are described respectively as ITПE I
6746	" above, and eeluTit n'below, another house.
p. 188
6747	170 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. 11
6748	20. hn p hn e-y zt n-k h n zem py e-y "š-f n wš
6749	nwe rr-f e-y shen te-k ryt hryt hn ne-k lyw n p
6750	tne twn-se
6751	21. Stme che-f r rt-f mtt nb rzt n-f S-'S'r or-f r
6752	h•t-w tr-w š Stme (sic) 2ºm nb rfy Stme pe-f yt
6753	22. g hry wbe-f n wš wne rr-w Stme w r hry hn
6754	n cyow n p 'tne n ne-f lyw e-f n p ršy n p t (n)op-f
6755	hrr rp m()
6756	23. nt e Pr-s nom-f szy-f e-r-hr-f n (sic) mt-zet nb
6757	r.zt n-f p hm hi S-Sr ne-nfr het-f tbt-s n p m šs
6758	web-sw Pr-e
6759	24. r hrwte n p nw(e) n rn-f erme Stme t-f 'n-w
6760	S-Sr r t hrwt e-r-hr-f swr-w or-w hew nfr hpr twe
6761	r te-f rste•t
6762	25. by Pr-r r p wrh 'wt ne-f rm/-cy•w te Pr-s šm-w
6763	m-s p'te n 'Gš 'n-w se rp wrh e-f? tbre? rh(get-f
6764	26. n p whe chefn tmtytn p wrh p hm hl S-S'r
6765	wrt mtyt che-f erme p 'te n 'Gš mt-f wbe-f
6766	27. zt hw p sb() n Gš hr "Mn rr-f pe-f ntr
6767	(n)nt-k nt ()n-w r hry r Kmy pšy nfr Sr p htm
6768	n Rc-Hr-ht
6769	1. 20. hn; vid. HEss, Gnost., Gloss., s.v. Usually a jar, though S.
6770	¿r10, ¿M&&r means 'vessel,' 'case,' also 'thing'; probably from
6771	(1) Eg. hn, 'vessel, 'box,' and (2) hnwe, 'goods,' 'vessels, fused together.
6772	I. 21. r 1•1-w0; vid. note I Kh. iv. II.
6773	1. 23. n mt-wł is here falsely written n' mt-wt as if n were the article
6774	instead of the preposition: cf. I Kh. iv. 32, &c.
6775	1. 24. e-r-hr-f seem here used in reference to the king ; m-bh would be
6776	more correct.
6777	le-f rste•t. Is f Pharaoh, or the 'good day'? From I Kh. ili. 27
6778	the former interpretation would seem probable.
6779	pacTe is masc. in Coptic, but here fem.
6780	1. 25. le P. šm-w m s. ty šm-r m s' seems to be the origin of X00T
6781	MC&, arcessere; it occurs again v. 29. ty O-w and ly sm-w are perhaps
6782	fused together in X008; so also ly ny-w and ty "n-w 'cause to be
6783	taken,' in TENMOOY 'send'
6784	1. 26. mlwbe; cf.I Kh. v.6
6785	1.27.hw. The usual interjection of angry address in II Kh.
6786	sbe, Eg. sby, Rh. bil. pap. xxiii. 9.
p. 189
6787	CH. VI] 11 КН. III. 20-27 171
6788	20. (from) in the case, I will say to thee what book it
6789	is, I will read it without seeing it, I standing over thee
6790	in thy apartments of the ground' Arose
6791	21. Setme, he stood on his feet; everything that
6792	Si-Osiri had said to him he did according to them, all.
6793	Setme (sii) read every book that Setme his father
6794	lifted
6795	22. up over against him, without opening them.
6796	Setme came up (from) in the apartments in the ground
6797	of his apartments, he being in gladness of the earth.
6798	He delayed not to the place
6799	23. in which Pharaoh was. He related before him
6800	of all things that the child Si-Osiri had said to him,
6801	all; his heart was glad because of it exceedingly.
6802	Pharaoh washed himself
6803	24. for feasting at the time named, with Setme; he
6804	caused Si-Osiri to be brought to the feast before him.
6805	They drank, they made a good day. Came the morning
6806	of its morrow.
6807	25. Pharaoh came forth to the court between his great
6808	men. Pharaoh caused to be fetched the ale of Ethiopia,
6809	he was brought to the court being (?) sealed (?) on his
6810	body
6811	26. with the letter. He stood in the midst of the
6812	court. The child Si-Osiri came to the midst; he stood
6813	with the ate of Ethiopia, he spake against him,
6814	27. saying, 'Woe! thou wicked one of Ethiopia, may
6815	Amen, his god, smite him! Thou that hast come up
6816	to Egypt, the beautiful garden of Osiris, the footstool
6817	of Ra-Har-akht,
6818	n'G}; adjectival 'Ethiopian,' as often with this word.
6819	her, Eg. her, 'rage,' vid. BR., Wtb. 1050-7; or perhaps S, yd&p
6820	"smite! This is an old oplative som-f in cursing as with sln enh-f in
6821	blessing, I Kh. ill. 15.
6822	» nl-k nud 'ns-zu seems to be for ITOK ETNHT, the emphasis
p. 190
6823	172 TRANSLITERATION, ETC. [PT. II
6824	28.n?tbyt nfrtn pSy zt e-y o [pe-f] zlh r p
6825	t Nhs p hyt n 'Mn pe-k ntr hwy r hr-k n mtwt nt
6826	ey ty
6827	29. 'W (sic) e t? [n?] nt? sh r p whe m or zt mtt
6828	n sz n•m-w (n)m-bh Pr-s pe-k hry t wnet n nwe e•r
6829	p'te
6830	30. n 'Gš r P hm-hl S-'S'r e-f che n p wrh te-f zz-f
6831	r p'tne mt-f zt mtt nb nt e-r-k r ztt-w nn e-y zt
6832	mt•t n cz
6833	31. n•mw t hetn n szy•w rwnne eor S-Sr [zt]
6834	n•m-w szy (n)móh Pr-s erme ne-f htw e p mšs n
6835	Kmy stm n hrw-f e-f zt
6836	32. nt e n nt? sh r p whe n p 'te n 'Gš nt chs [n?]
6837	t mtyt zt hpr n? we ss•w (sic) n p he n Pr-s Mnh-p-Re
6838	S-Mn e-f
6839	(page IV)
6840	1. (N)Mnh-p-Rs S-'Mn e-f n stn (n)mnh n p t tr-f
6841	Le Kmjy won n h?-nfr no n pe-f he e ne-š-f n ty
6842	perhaps putting forward the personal pronoun, the grammatical position
6843	of which in the sentence is marked byr hr-kin the next line.
6844	hlm, D7g, Eg. hdmw, see BR., Wtb. 912 ; a 'stool, 'throne,' not
6845	•footstool,' see Kufi, x.28.
6846	1. 28. The scribe seems to have begun n n' 'hy, 'of the spirits,' and;
6847	finding his mistake, wrote a large t above the line as a clumsy correction
6848	of nn'to khy-t.
6849	Sy, see also vii. I1: cf. the proper names vaïs, MCY&S, STEINDORFF,
6850	Ä. Z. g0, 51. From Eg. *, 'fate, often personified.
6851	hyt in the same expression, iv. 22; v. 25; Lond. Gnost. vi. 35
6852	(Gloss., p. Ir). The reading is assured by the spelling in Gnost., where
6853	it occurs in various adjurations. Evidently connected with yoerT
6854	éppavns, EPOЄIT фoBáco, porBáça, numine plenus furo (PExRoN, Gr. 189).
6855	hwy is here constructed in ist pres., but whether inf. or qual. is not
6856	clear. It is used commonly with hyl, also with lyg, 'magic,' e.g. iv. 4.
6857	The meaning altogether must be 'I adjure thee by the power of Amon'
6858	1. 29. ly w T&rO. A good instance of the sense narrare. Correct
6859	to ty u-w.
6860	e te n' nl sh, perhaps for ETNETCH& ' which are those that are
6861	written'; but see note to iv. 23.
6862	1. 30. r p'ine perhaps only means ' held his head down': cf. I Kh. v. 29.
p. 191
6863	CH. VI] 11 KH. III. 28—IV. I 173
6864	28. the beautiful horizon of the Spirit, saying, "I will
6865	take [its] humiliation to the land of Nehes"; the inspira-
6866	tion (?) of Amen thy god is cast upon thee, the words
6867	that I shall nar-
6868	29. -rate that are written in this letter; do not say
6869	falsehood of them before Pharaoh thy sovereign. The
6870	time of seeing that made the ate
6871	30. of Ethiopia at the child Si-Osiri, he standing in
6872	the court, he put his head to the ground. He spake
6873	saying, 'Every word that thou shalt say, I will not speak
6874	falsehood
6875	31. of them. The beginning of the relations that
6876	Si-Osiri was making, told before Pharaoh with his
6877	nobles, the people of Egypt being attentive to his
6878	voice, he saying,
6879	32. 'They (?) that are written on the letter of the ate
6880	of Ethiopia who standeth in the midst, saying: There
6881	happened on a time in the days of Pharaoh Menkh-
6882	pa-Ra Si-Amon, he being
6883	IV. I. Menkh-p'-R' Si-Amon, he being as beneficent
6884	king of the whole land, Egypt overflowing with all things
6885	in his time, he was abundant in giving
6886	1. 31. r.wne eor Єпєрє. There seems to be a trace of sl at the
6887	lacuna.
6888	s-sy, passive participle, cf. zl, ii. 23; in the parallel passages, iv. 32,
6889	n szy 'as a relation,' v. 24, n n' ssy, i. e. (n)n szy.
6890	slm n hrw-f. "listening to his voice, as opposed to sim r brau-f,
6891	'hearing his voice.'
6892	1. 32. nt e, &c. The construction is very obscure, see iv. 23. nl e can
6893	hardly be any word for 'behold!'
6894	hprn. The n seems unlikely.
6895	he, Eg. h'wo, BR., Wtb. 888; cf. Hist. Rom., No. 18g.
6896	S-'Mn. The reading S, 'son, can scarcely be doubred: it has the
6897	det. of child in iv. 25,but it is curiously written in every case, v. 3, &c.
6898	1. 1. win, Eg. wbn, BR. Wib. Suppl. 309-10.
6899	BP-nfr, cE ZenoTge ahundanlia, but the reading of the first
6900	element is uncertain.

Provenance

title: Griffith – Stories of the High Priests of Memphis: the Sethon of Herodotus and the Demotic Tales of Khamuas (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1900) — OCR (Apple Vision)
dialect: none
source: corpus/incoming/e-2/griffith-setne-1900/ — Apple Vision OCR (tools/e2_ocr.py, worker E-2, 2026-09-29) of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/griffith_stories-high-priests-of-memphis_setne_1900.pdf, 232 PDF pages; provenance and verification in corpus/incoming/e-2/STAGING.md
licence: public domain in Canada (author died ≤ 1971, verified; LICENCES.md §7) — US position (recorded, does not gate the class; PD-CA 2026-09-26): PD-US (published ≤1930)
share: public
attribution: Griffith – Stories of the High Priests of Memphis: the Sethon of Herodotus and the Demotic Tales of Khamuas (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1900); public domain in Canada (death year verified: Griffith d.1934: PDF Author field "Griffith, F. Ll. (Francis Llewellyn), 1862-1934" (pdfinfo, read 2026-09-29) of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/griffith_stories-high-priests-of-memphis_setne_1900.pdf; title page pdf p. 11 ("… by F. Ll. Griffith … Oxford at the Clarendon Press 1900") · note (PROPOSED-scan_copyright-E-2.csv): (E-2 volume griffith-setne-1900)); OCR text by the Kemetic project, Yousef Hanna 2026.
OCR: Apple Vision VNRecognizeTextRequest rev 3, accurate, language correction off, via tools/vision_ocr/vision_ocr (NC-4/NC-9); macOS Version 26.6.2 (Build 25G83); render pdftoppm 400 dpi gray; 1 text column(s) read separately (page 1; per page in the staged records); D2 READ — CER 15.6 % against a hand-read GT crop (translit/crop_setne.png; provisional GT, not yet checked by Yousef)
file: Ancient Egyptian/Demotic texts and the trilingual decrees/Griffith, Stories of the High Priests of Memphis — Setne I and II (1900).vision-ocr.L0.txt

Cite as:

Griffith – Stories of the High Priests of Memphis: the Sethon of Herodotus and the Demotic Tales of Khamuas (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1900) — OCR (Apple Vision). corpus/incoming/e-2/griffith-setne-1900/ — Apple Vision OCR (tools/e2_ocr.py, worker E-2, 2026-09-29) of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/griffith_stories-high-priests-of-memphis_setne_1900.pdf, 232 PDF pages; provenance and verification in corpus/incoming/e-2/STAGING.md. Layers as published by the Kemetic project (Yousef Hanna), 2026: Coptic · Cairene · Kemetic, /doc/ancient-egyptian/demotic-texts-and-the-trilingual-decrees/griffith-stories-of-the-high-priests-of-memphis-setne-i-and-ii-1900.vision-ocr/. Griffith – Stories of the High Priests of Memphis: the Sethon of Herodotus and the Demotic Tales of Khamuas (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1900); public domain in Canada (death year verified: Griffith d.1934: PDF Author field "Griffith, F. Ll. (Francis Llewellyn), 1862-1934" (pdfinfo, read 2026-09-29) of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/griffith_stories-high-priests-of-memphis_setne_1900.pdf; title page pdf p. 11 ("… by F. Ll. Griffith … Oxford at the Clarendon Press 1900") · note (PROPOSED-scan_copyright-E-2.csv): (E-2 volume griffith-setne-1900)); OCR text by the Kemetic project, Yousef Hanna 2026.

What the layers are

L0 witness
The text as its witness or edition has it, original spelling; its dialect is a description and is never standardized.

L0.5 transliteration
For Egyptian texts: the transliteration with the editors' marks turned into the symbols ° * < > _ ^ (ruled 2026-09-10). For papyri: the edition's Leiden marks as the same symbols, and the editors' readings beside the scribe's as ‹scribe→editors› (ruled PAP-3).

L1 Cairene
Standardized Greco-Bohairic spelling and grammar, generated by code from the layer above under the rulings of the project.

L2 Kemetic
The Kemetic alphabet, generated by code from L1.

English
Quoted translations where they exist, credited; otherwise model drafts, marked as drafts.

Source and licence

The text — part 1 of 2

Provenance

L0 witness (OCR)

What the layers are